aandc supervisor guide

Confidential and proprietary information of NCR.Unauthorised use, reproduction and/or distribution is strictly prohibited.

APTRATM Advance NDC

Supervisor’s Guide

B006‐6062‐L000

Issue 1

June 2009


Copyright and Trademark Information

The products described in this document are copyrighted works of NCR Corporation.

NCR, APTRA, and personaS are trademarks of NCR Corporation.Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows NT and ActiveX are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.Diebold is a trademark of Diebold, Incorporated.Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Disclaimer:

It is the policy of NCR Corporation (NCR) to improve products as new technology, components, software, and firmware become available. NCR, therefore, reserves the right to change specifications without prior notice.

All features, functions, and operations described herein may not be marketed by NCR in all parts of the world. In some instances, photographs are of equipment prototypes. Therefore, before using this document, consult with your NCR representative or NCR office for information that is applicable and current.

To maintain the quality of our publications, we need your comments on the accuracy, clarity, organization, and value of this book.

Address correspondence to:

NCR Financial Solutions Group Ltd © 2000 ‐ 2009Information Solutions Feedback By NCR CorporationDiscovery Centre Dayton, Ohio U.S.A.3 Fulton Road All Rights ReservedDundee, ScotlandDD2 4SW

iii


APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Canadian Class A Device Declaration

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe A prescrites dans le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.

Information to UserThis equipment must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. However, there is no guarantee that interference to radio communications will not occur in a particular commercial installation. If this equipment does cause interference, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult an NCR service representative immediately.

Caution NCR Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorised modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by NCR. Such unauthorised modifications, substitutions, or attachments may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorised modifications, substitutions, or attachments will be the responsibility of the user.

iv APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


v



Revision Record

Revision Record

Date Page Description of Change

June 09 New revision for Advance NDC 3.04

All Updated CPM to cheque processor when the information applies to both the CPM and bunch cheque acceptor devices

xxxvGlossary‐1

Defined “cheque processor” as the combined name for CPM and bunch cheque devices

1‐3 Added information on implications of PA/PCI‐DSS compliance when using Supervisor mode

3‐32 Added note to provide reference to information about configuring EJ backup filenames

3‐39 Added the BNA reconciliation report options, 48 DSP BNA RCNL and 49 PRN BNA RCNL

3‐43, 7‐7 Added information on the BNA device limitation that prevents note counts from being updated following a jam

3‐43, 7‐9 Updated the 54 INIT BNA option on the Replenish menu and associated journalling

3‐45 Updated the 56 EXTRACT SIGS option on the Replenish menu with the format used to enter dates

4‐3 Updated the Configuration Menu graphic

4‐35 Updated the example journal entry for variable cardholder transaction data

4‐37 to 4‐54 Updated the TCP/IP CONFIG options

4‐66, 4‐68 Updated to replace references to diskette with removable drive.

4‐72 Added 46 SELECT COMMS TYPE option to the Configure menu

4‐82 Added section describing Option 84 POWERUP MSG.

Revision Record

vi APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


5‐3 Added details of the situation in which KEY LOADED is displayed in the 0 DISP ACCESS screen

7‐7 Added that the account number is masked when journalled for the BNA

7‐9 Added that notes categorised under ECB 6 regulations are only journalled if Option 44 is set

A‐9 Clarified error reporting for Option Digit 12

Glossary‐2 Added DHCP to the glossary

Oct 08 New revision for Advance NDC 3.03

1‐5 Updated the reference to the documentation on resetting the system

2‐2 & 4‐3 Added Configure Menu options 39. and 47. and rearranged layout

2‐4 Added information on the Mini Self‐Service Assistant (MSSA)

2‐5 Added note about system application display limitation

2‐8 Added the ENV INT component option to 0 PRNT CMPNT VERS on the Miscellaneous Functions menu

3‐3 Added supplies messages for cash acceptors

3‐5 Added deposited counts for recycling cassettes to 2 DISP CASH option on the Replenish menu

3‐7 Added that enhanced configuration option 76 set to 000 can now use combined or separated counts

3‐9 Amended recycled counts in the BNA counts screen of the 3 DISP CNTRS option

3‐12 Added ECB 6 counters for 3 DISP CNTRS option

3‐14 Added that 53 CLR BNA is run automatically following 5 CLR CASH if using a GBRU with recycling enabled

3‐16 Added information on the use of the 7 CLR DEPOS option with the ImageMark Passport ATM Image Agent


Revision Record

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide vii


3‐16 Added reference to 47. EXTENDED ADD CASH.

3‐23 Added that 53 CLR BNA is run automatically following 12 STD CASH if using a GBRU with recycling enabled

3‐24 Added information on available screens for settlement in 15 SPVR TRANS

3‐35 Added information on the 42 SECURITY CAMERA option (renamed from FILL CAMERA)Added information on the 1 TEST CAMERA option of the SECURITY CAMERA menu

3‐36 Added information on the 2 COPY SNAPSHOTS and 3 DELETE SNAPSHOTS options of the SECURITY CAMERA menu

3‐38 Added information on the use of the 44 CLR BINS option with the ImageMark Passport ATM Image Agent

3‐43 Added that 5 CLR CASH is run automatically following 53 CLR BNA if using a GBRU with recycling enabled

3‐44 Added the 55 CREATE SIGS option for ECB 6 support

3‐45 Added the 56 EXTRACT SIGS and 57 WRITE SIGS options for ECB 6 support

3‐46 Clarified the screen descriptions for the Display BNA Counts option and added ECB 6 counts

4‐28 Updated illustration of Automatic INIT copy drive

4‐35 Updated option 35 JOURNAL ENTRY on the Configure menu for cardless transactions

4‐37 Note 3 updated as cash taken is always journalled regardless of retract option settingAdded that text may appear interleaved with Cardholder transaction data if more than one printer data field is sent in transaction repliesAdded information on journalling of information when a camera is present


Revision Record

viii APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


4‐38 Updated information on port configuration for TCP/IP

4‐72 Added Configure Menu option 47. EXTENDED ADD CASH.

5‐18 Clarified that key mode 4 cannot be changed if using secure key entry

7‐3 Added information on format in journal of sensors unsolicited message sent while in Diagnostics

7‐7 Rewrote the introduction to BNA Journalling (formerly titled Journalling Vaulted BNA Counts)Added note on automatic error recovery and note retractAdded that refunded notes are journalled when a transaction is cancelled

7‐10 Added the format used if enhanced journalling is enabledAdded the messages journalled when a transaction times out or is cancelled on a BNAClarified the operation of a fixed retract GBNA with rejected and retracted notes

7‐13 Added information on the journalling of cassette nsertion and removal for BNA and GBXX

7‐15 Added information on the journalling of note serial numbers, failed serial number reads and failed signature reads

7‐20 Added scenarios illustrating the differences in reporting device faults on the System Application and Fault Display

7‐25 Added information on automatic error recovery

A‐2 Added option digit 1 to the option digits table

A‐10 Added information on option digit 1 combinations

A‐17 Updated the option digit example to include option digit 1

B‐2 Added error message e08


Revision Record

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide ix


B‐7 Added error messages E0010 and E0011

B‐9 Added error message E0036

B‐11 Added error message E0061

C‐6 Updated the documentation for the APTRA Simulator, which is now a released product

C‐7 Added CEN‐XFS documentation to the documentation appendix

Glossary‐2 Added entry for counterfeit note

Glossary‐5 Added entry for suspect note

Feb 08 Updated for APTRA Advance NDC 3.02.01

2‐5 Added information on exiting Diagnostics with the mode switch in the Normal position

3‐1 Added that replenishment is not supported while the SST is In Service

3‐17 Added that negative values will get an INVALID VALUE message in ADD CASH

4‐9 Removed statement that the LUNO is used as the machine number; it is not

4‐37 Added that journal level 3 only includes Notes Taken information when retract is on

5‐18 Added Key V to the key entry mode that can be used with key mode 4

6‐2 Added information on EPP initialisation error on first application load

July 07 New revision for APTRA Advance NDC 3.02

All Updated cash dispenser to cash handler

2‐3 Added note about optional MV DIAGNOSTICS menu

2‐55‐18

Changed online documentation title from Self Service to APTRA XFS

page 2‐63‐43

Exit from Supervisor and INIT BNA updated with information regarding requesting note definitions again.


Revision Record

x APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


2‐94‐64‐435‐4

Added reference to SET PRINT option to configure printer

3‐2 Added statement that only 12 faults can be displayed on the DISP SPPLY screen

3‐2 Added CPM and coin dispenser information to DISP SPPLY option of the Replenish menu

3‐5 Updated the DISP CASH option for seven cassette types

3‐7 Added bin counters information to DISP CNTRS option

3‐13 Added note on coin dispenser inclusion in PRNT CNTRS option of the Replenish menu;Added note on GBRU use;Updated CLR CASH option for extended cassettes

3‐16 Updated the ADD CASH option for seven cassette types;Added note on GBRU use

3‐17 Added 9999 note limit for GBRU

3‐21 Updated INIT RECPT option

3‐223‐23

Added note on GBRU use

3‐22 Updated TEST CASH screens for dual cash handlers

3‐24 Updated INIT STMNT option

3‐26 Added information on the clear key

3‐27 to 3‐31 Coin Dispenser now supported, added information in Replenish menu options

3‐31 Added that the end time and date is appended to the EJ data;Added that checksum is added after the security trace message

3‐32 Added a note on the size of the EJ log file;Added information on selecting INIT EJRL during an automatic initialisation


Revision Record

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide xi


3‐33 Added cross reference to the DIRECT EJ BACKUP option if initialisation fails due to insufficient hard disk

3‐34 Updated EJ log file information

3‐35 Updated the FILL ENV and INIT DEPOS options

3‐38 Updated the CLR BINS option

3‐38 Added information on the CHECK COIN option of the Replenish menu

3‐42 Added information about the DIRECT EJ BACKUP option on the Replenish menu

3‐42 Updated CLR BNA option

3‐46 Added DISPLAY COUNTS and PRINT COUNTS BNA and GBXX options

4‐3 to 4‐4 Updated DISP CONFIG option for seven cassette and coin support

4‐13 Updated SET PRINT option

4‐14 Updated SET CASH option for seven cassette types

4‐16 Added standard coin counts to the list of local configuration parameters automatically saved to persistent storage

4‐17 Updated the TRACE ON option of the Configure menu;Updated the TRACE OFF option of the Configure menu;Added information on SET COINS option of the Configure menu

4‐21 Added DISP EJ CONFIG option;Added that you must have multiple backups enabled to use the automatic initialisation features

4‐22 Added cross reference to the control of Enhanced Configuration Parameters Download to change the EJ backup mode

4‐24 Added Auto INIT options

4‐29 Added EJ file Compression option

4‐30 Added EJ maximum file size option


Revision Record

xii APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


4‐31 Added option to disable host control of EJ backup mode;Added EJ privacy options

4‐35 to 4‐37 Added Journal Level option

4‐39 Updated port number information

4‐43 Updated default for ReconnectOnClose TCP/IP attribute

4‐61 Added suppress cash low dial up option

4‐66 Updated dialup COPY ON/COPY OFF option

4‐68 Updated GBRU/GBNA CONFIGURATION option

4‐68 to 4‐71 Replaced Configure menu item 44 PD Options with Troubleshooting;Added Silent Debug information;Updated Max Statement Length default

5‐18 Updated the statement on secure key entry

6‐4 Added setting up standard coin counts to the steps for setting up the SST

7‐6 Updated the communications trace information

7‐6 Updated the SST messages set by option digit 5c

7‐7 Updated information on use of option 44 to control journalling

7‐10 Added information on alternative appearance of BNA note count journalling

7‐14 Updated the electronic journal information;Added information on the checksum validation utility

7‐23 Added ADD COINS to the exceptions requiring action after clearing state;Added information on GBRU error recovery

A‐3 Added action for note and coin dispense transaction with Option 2a

A‐5 Added action for note and coin dispense transaction with Option 4a


Revision Record

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide xiii


A‐7 Updated messages journalled with option digit 5c

B‐6 Added Silent Debug error message descriptions

B‐7 to B‐9 Added coin dispenser error message descriptions;Added enhanced EJ error message descriptions

B‐17 Added communications error message descriptions

AppendixC

Updated related documentation appendix

Glossary‐1 Added definition for Bin;Added definition for CD;Added definition for Coin Hopper

Glossary‐2 Added definition for Coin Hopper Type

Glossary‐4 Updated definition for Note Type

Glossary‐4 Added Pocket, with cross reference to Bin;Added definition for USB

May 06 New revision for APTRA Advance NDC 3.01

xxxvii Added information on using and navigating this publication

3‐2 Added messages for dual cash handlers

3‐17 Added information on entering separate counters for dual cash handlers

3‐22 Added dual cash handler message header for TEST CASH

3‐25 to 3‐26 SPVR TRANS section updated for cardless settlement screen customisation

3‐31 to 3‐34 Updated INIT EJRNL for multiple EJ backup and multiple destinations

3‐40 to 3‐43 Updated RCOPY for multiple EJ backup and multiple destinations

4‐9 Added note that changing the machine number will prevent any existing multiple EJ backup files from being accessed using RCOPY


Revision Record

xiv APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


4‐14 Added information on entering separate counters for dual dispense

4‐21 to 4‐37 Added EJ OPTIONS menu option for setting up the enhanced EJ options

4‐43 Extended information on TCP/IP advanced options

4‐43 Added DISP TCP/IP and PRNT TCP/IP menu options for displaying and printing the current TCP/IP settings

4‐59 to 4‐66 Added information on alphanumeric support for dial up

4‐68 Added GBRU/GBNA CONFIGURATION menu option for configuring a GBXX device

4‐71 Added MAX STATEMENT LENGTH menu option for setting the maximum length of a statement

4‐81 Added GBNA.INI CONFIG menu option allowing activation and deactivating of note reporting to the host for GBNA devices

5‐9 Corrected key modes that can use the Backup Communications Encryption Key

5‐135‐19

Clarified key mode 4 and its application and the use of secure key entry

5‐13B‐17

Clarified that changing the key mode only deletes DES keys

7‐4 Added details of security trace messages with dual cash handlers

7‐14 Added multiple destination as alternative to diskette

7‐20 Added note to say that there is no fault display for DASH readers

B‐2 to B‐9 Added new error messages for Enhanced EJ

Dec 05 New issue for APTRA Advance NDC 3.00.02

xxxv Added explanation of GBXX abbreviation

3‐8 to 3‐12 Expanded explanation of the BNA counters, and provided illustrative scenarios

4‐38 Updated valid IP addresses


Revision Record

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide xv


Glossary‐2 Added definitions of currency, denomination, GBNA, GBRU, and GBXX to the Glossary


Revision Record

xvi APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


Sept. 05 New issue for APTRA Advance NDC 3.00.01

3‐5 Clarified BNA retract and notes in transport information

3‐24 SPVR TRANS section updated to reflect cardless settlement customisationAdded note stating DAPI‐7 and rear settlement are not compatible

A‐1 Updated Option Digit2 valid values

A‐10 Added value 3 to Option Digit2 combinations

Jun. 05 New revision for APTRA Advance NDC 3.00.

All Windows XP supported on the development system; Windows NT not supported on development system or NCR SSTs; personaS SST Device Simulator for Windows NT not supported; ADI2 interface replaced by CEN‐XFS 3 or later for device access. Added screens and descriptions for dialup configuration, additional BNA functionality and secure key entry in manual mode. Added references to Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual for additional information about Supervisor mode on other vendors’ SSTs. Added table numbers and headings for lists of figures and tables.

xxxv Added reference to the Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual and removed reference to personaS SST Device Simulator For Windows NT.

1‐2 Added reference to the Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual.

2‐2 Added 38 Dialup Config option to Fig 2‐1 Standard Supervisor Menus.

3‐5 Updated DISP CASH details to say blanks are displayed when picked notes exceed set amount.

3‐8, 3‐11 Updated BNA for retract note movements and display of configured note configurations.


Revision Record

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide xvii


3‐16 Added note to Add Cash option referring to the Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual for additional options on other vendors’ SSTs.

3‐43 Updated screenshot to include RETRACTED and NOTES IN TRANSPORT counts.

3‐43 Updated option 54 INIT BNA for retract functionality.

4‐37 to 4‐66 Added details of dialup configuration menus.

5‐6 to 5‐9 Options to enter keys V, A and B updated for XFS environment; updated Clear key configuration.

5‐9 to 5‐10 Options to write keys A and B updated for EPP KVV display.

5‐10 Amended cross‐reference for security flags, to include the chapter, and added a reference to the Developer’s Guide for MAC handling.

5‐12 to 5‐18 Option 25, Key Entry, updated for secure key entry and Clear key configuration.

6‐1, 6‐2 Added references to the Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual.

6‐5 Added steps to view/change default settings for CCM VISA2 dialup communications.

A‐3 Amended description of option B for cash dispenser beeper behaviour when presenting notes.

B‐11 Added error message E0053.

C‐2 Added details of the Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual.

C‐6 Removed references to documentation for the personaS SST Device Simulator For Windows NT.

Glossary Added DAPI and NCR XFS Simulator; removed SST Device Simulator.


Revision Record

xviii APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


Oct. 04 Updated for APTRA Advance NDC 2.06.

All Page size increased to 8.5 x 11; duplicated information removed.Graphics updated.References to NVRAM removed as not supported; file‐based persistent storage is used instead.References to EPPB and EPPE removed.HALLMARK and EKC marked as not supported.Details of registry settings moved to Developer’s Guide.

1‐2 Removed reference to Developer’s Guide and restructured contents.

1‐6, 1‐7 FDKs are now used only for encryption key entry.

1‐9 Removed reference to FDK ‘H’ and AUX keys.

2‐8 Added new Select menu option ‘26 FAULT DISPLAY’.

4‐12 to 4‐12 Updated the number of custom (user) screens from 999 to 9999.

4‐18 to 4‐20 Updated the SET JRNL option with details of support for dual mode and the default settings for the electronic journal.

4‐20 Added a new option, DISBL JRNL, to the Configure menu.

4‐37 to 4‐43 Updated for TCP/IP configuration; TCP/IP Config menu ‐ option 2 removed; Advanced TCP/IP Config ‐ only 9 options available; options 5, 7, 8 and 9 changed.

4‐68 Added ‘44 PD OPTIONS’ (Problem Determination) to the Configure menu. Section includes descriptions of PD menu items 1 to 3.

5‐3 Added description of optional Promote functions on the Access menu.

6‐1 Removed reference to documentation for customised communications configuration.


Revision Record

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide xix


6‐2 Added new section “Additional Communications Configuration”, with reference to the Developer’s Guide for DNS and PCCM information.

6‐5 Updated the steps for TCP/IP configuration.

A‐8, A‐13 Details of Option digit 7 modified as Action B not an option.

A‐8 Updated MEI flash rate for XFS.

A‐11 Modified the table heading for Option Digit 4C and added reference to the Advance NDC Reference Manual for more information.

B‐2 Removed error messages E0004 and E0005.

B‐8 Added new error messages E0023 and E0025.

B‐11 Added new error message E0048.

B‐17 to B‐20

Removed error message E0117; added error messages for Problem Determination.

C‐1 Removed reference to developing an application and restructured the topic.

C‐3 Removed reference to the Advance ADE, Seed Application User’s Guide as the Seed application is not provided with Advance NDC.

C‐6 Added APTRA Communications Feature, User’s Guide and APTRA Promote User’s Guide.

Glossary Added CCM, CRT, DNS, MEI, PD, XFS.


Revision Record

xx APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


Contents

xxi



Table of Contents

Preface

About This Publication......................................................................xxxv

Why Should I Read this Publication? .......................................xxxv

Abbreviations Used in this Publication ....................................xxxv

What is in this Publication? ........................................................xxxv

How To Use This Guide.............................................................xxxvi

Support Information................................................................ xxxviii

Chapter 1Introduction to Supervisor Mode

What is Supervisor Mode? ...................................................................1‐2

How to Enter Supervisor Mode ..........................................................1‐3

PA/PCI‐DSS Compliance ...............................................................1‐3

Entering at a Front‐Access Terminal............................................1‐3

Entering at a Rear‐Access Terminal .............................................1‐4

What You See When Entering Supervisor Mode .......................1‐4

Moving Between the Rear and Front of the Terminal ...............1‐4

Resetting the System.......................................................................1‐5

Using the Operator Interface at the Rear ...........................................1‐6

Using the Facia Interface at the Front.................................................1‐7

Selecting Options from the Menus......................................................1‐9

Interpreting Error Messages ..............................................................1‐10

Setting Supervisor Reporting.............................................................1‐11

Chapter 2Introduction to the Supervisor Menus

Standard Menus Available in Supervisor Mode ..............................2‐2

Select Menu ............................................................................................2‐3

4 REPLENISH.................................................................................2‐3

5 CONFIGURE ...............................................................................2‐4

6 ACCESS........................................................................................2‐4

Table of Contents

xxii APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


Mini Self‐Service Assistant ............................................................2‐4

7 DIAGNOSTIC..............................................................................2‐5

8 TRANSFER ..................................................................................2‐5

9 EXIT...............................................................................................2‐6

26 FAULT DISPLAY.......................................................................2‐8

27 MV DIAG (MV Diagnostics) ....................................................2‐8

90 MISC FUNCS..............................................................................2‐8

Chapter 3Replenish Menu

Replenish Menu.....................................................................................3‐2

0 DISP SPPLY (Display Supplies Status) ....................................3‐2

1 PRNT SPPLY (Print Supplies Status) .......................................3‐4

2 DISP CASH (Display Supplies Counters ‐ Cash) ...................3‐5

3 DISP CNTRS (Display Supplies Counters) .............................3‐7

4 PRNT CNTRS (Print Supplies Counters) ..............................3‐12

5 CLR CASH (Clear Cash Supplies Counters).........................3‐14

6 CLR CARDS (Clear Cards Captured Counter).....................3‐15

7 CLR DEPOS (Clear Deposits Counter) ..................................3‐16

8 ADD CASH (Add to Cash Counters).....................................3‐16

9 INIT RECPT (Initialise Receipt) ..............................................3‐21

10 TEST CASH..............................................................................3‐22

12 STD CASH (Standard Cash)..................................................3‐23

13 INIT STMNT (Initialise Statement) ......................................3‐24

15 SPVR TRANS (Supervisor Transactions) ............................3‐24

18 DISP COINS (Display Coins) ................................................3‐27

19 CLR COINS (Clear Coins) .....................................................3‐29

20 ADD COINS ............................................................................3‐29

21 STD COINS (Standard Coins) ...............................................3‐31

40 INIT EJRNL (Initialise Electronic Journal) ..........................3‐31

41 FILL ENV (Fill Envelope) ......................................................3‐35

42 SECURITY CAMERA.............................................................3‐35

43 INIT DEPOS (Initialise Depository) .....................................3‐37

44 CLR BINS (Clear Bins)............................................................3‐38

45 CHECK COIN .........................................................................3‐38

47 DUMP IMAGES (Dump DPM Images) ...............................3‐39

48 DSP BNA RCNL (Display BNA Reconciliation List)..........3‐39

49 PRN BNA RCNL (Print BNA Reconciliation List)..............3‐40

50 RCOPY EJRNL (Recopy Electronic Journal) ........................3‐40

51 DIRECT EJ BACKUP ...............................................................3‐42

53 CLR BNA (Clear BNA)............................................................3‐42

Table of Contents

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide xxiii


54 INIT BNA (Initialise BNA) .....................................................3‐43

55 CREATE SIGS...........................................................................3‐44

56 EXTRACT SIGS ........................................................................3‐45

57 WRITE SIGS..............................................................................3‐45

58 DSP BNA CNTS (Display BNA Counts) ..............................3‐46

59 PRN BNA CNTS (Print BNA Counts) ..................................3‐47

99 MORE .......................................................................................3‐47

Chapter 4Configure Menu

Configure Menu.....................................................................................4‐2

0 DISP CONFIG (Display Configuration) ..................................4‐3

1 PRNT CONFIG (Print Configuration) .....................................4‐6

2 TRACK 1 ......................................................................................4‐7

3 ROLL WIDTH .............................................................................4‐8

4 MACHINE NO (Machine Number).........................................4‐9

5 DATE/TIME...............................................................................4‐10

6 MSG MODE (Message Mode).................................................4‐11

7 DISP SCRN (Display Screens).................................................4‐12

8 SET PRINT (Set Printer) ...........................................................4‐13

9 SET CASH..................................................................................4‐14

10 RST MODE (Restart Mode) ...................................................4‐15

11 SET DEFAULT.........................................................................4‐16

12 TRACE ON ..............................................................................4‐17

13 TRACE OFF .............................................................................4‐17

14 SET COINS...............................................................................4‐17

30 SET JRNL (Set Electronic Journal) ........................................4‐18

31 VOLUME SST, 32 VOLUME JACK...................................4‐20

33 DISBL JRNL (Disable Journal Option).................................4‐20

34 EJ OPTIONS..............................................................................4‐21

35 JOURNAL LEVEL....................................................................4‐35

37 TCP/IP CONFIG (TCP/IP Configuration menu) ................4‐37

38 DIALUP CONFIG (Dialup Configuration menu)...............4‐54

39 GBRU/GBNA CONFIGURATION........................................4‐68

44 TROUBLESHOOTING...........................................................4‐68

45 MAX STATEMENT LENGTH ...............................................4‐71

46 SELECT COMMS TYPE (Select Communications Type)...4‐72

47 EXTENDED ADD CASH........................................................4‐72

80 DISP CSH/ACC CONFIG ......................................................4‐80

81 PRNT CSH/ACC CONFIG ....................................................4‐80

82 GBNA.INI CONFIG.................................................................4‐81

Table of Contents

xxiv APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


84 POWERUP MSG ......................................................................4‐82

99 MORE .......................................................................................4‐82

Chapter 5Access Menu

Access Menu...........................................................................................5‐2

0 DISP ACCESS (Display Access)................................................5‐3

1 PRNT ACCESS (Print Access)...................................................5‐4

2 SET PASSWRD (Set Password).................................................5‐4

3 INIT ENTRY (Initial Entry) .......................................................5‐5

4 INIT DISPLY (Initial Display) ...................................................5‐5

5 EXIT MODE .................................................................................5‐6

6 ENTER V ......................................................................................5‐6

7 WRITE V.......................................................................................5‐7

8 ENTER A......................................................................................5‐8

9 WRITE A ......................................................................................5‐9

10 ENTER B.....................................................................................5‐9

11 WRITE B ...................................................................................5‐10

12 ENTER MAC ...........................................................................5‐10

13 SET ACCESS ............................................................................5‐11

14 HALLMARK............................................................................5‐12

25 KEY ENTRY..............................................................................5‐12

Chapter 6Setting up the Terminal

Performing an Initial Configuration...................................................6‐2

Additional Communications Configuration...............................6‐2

EPP Initialisation.............................................................................6‐2

Setting up the Terminal..................................................................6‐2

Chapter 7Error and Exception Reporting and Recovery

Local Journal Log...................................................................................7‐2

Device Status Messages..................................................................7‐2

Security Trace Messages ................................................................7‐4

Presenter Error Message ................................................................7‐5

Deposit Envelope Length Error Message ....................................7‐6

Communications Trace ..................................................................7‐6

Table of Contents

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide xxv


Card Capture Message...................................................................7‐6

SST Off‐Line/On‐Line Messages...................................................7‐6

BNA Journalling..............................................................................7‐7

Local Electronic Journal Log..............................................................7‐14

Validating the Checksum ............................................................7‐14

Journalling Serial Numbers and Failed Reads ............................................................................................7‐15

Journal Printer Backup Mode ............................................................7‐17

Power Failure/Restart...................................................................7‐19

Device Fault Reporting.......................................................................7‐20

Handling Device Failures...................................................................7‐22

Device Exception Recovery .........................................................7‐22

Error Recovery ..............................................................................7‐23

Capture of Media on Power‐Up .................................................7‐25

Appendix AOption Digits

Option Digits Table ..............................................................................A‐2

Option Digit Combinations...............................................................A‐10

Option Digit 1...............................................................................A‐10

Option Digit 2...............................................................................A‐10

Option Digit 3...............................................................................A‐11

Option Digit 4...............................................................................A‐11

Option Digit 5...............................................................................A‐12

Option Digit 6...............................................................................A‐12

Option Digit 7...............................................................................A‐13

Option Digit 0 Reporting Levels ......................................................A‐14

Messages for Values 2 or 3..........................................................A‐14

Messages for Value 1 ...................................................................A‐14

Option Digits Example ......................................................................A‐16

Selecting the Values to Enter......................................................A‐17

Appendix BError Messages

Error Messages...................................................................................... B‐2

PD Error Messages....................................................................... B‐17

GBXX Configuration Error Messages ....................................... B‐20

Table of Contents

xxvi APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


Appendix CRelated Documentation

Advance NDC Documentation ..........................................................C‐2

APTRA Author Documentation.........................................................C‐3

NDC+ Documentation .........................................................................C‐5

Other NCR Documentation ................................................................C‐6

CEN‐XFS Documentation....................................................................C‐7

Glossary

Glossary .................................................................................... Glossary‐1

Index

Index................................................................................................Index‐1

User Feedback Form

List of Figures

xxvii



List of Figures

Chapter 1Introduction to Supervisor Mode

Figure 1‐1 Operator Interface ..........................................................1‐6

Figure 1‐2 Facia Interface Screen ....................................................1‐7

Figure 1‐3 Touch Screen FDK Emulation ......................................1‐8

Chapter 2Introduction to the Supervisor Menus

Figure 2‐1 Standard Supervisor Menus .........................................2‐2

Figure 2‐2 Select Menu.....................................................................2‐3

Figure 2‐3 Miscellaneous Functions Menu....................................2‐8


Figure 3‐1 Replenish Menus............................................................3‐2

Figure 3‐2 DISP CASH Screen.........................................................3‐5

Figure 3‐3 DISP CASH Screen with Recycling .............................3‐6

Figure 3‐4 Second DISP CASH Screen...........................................3‐7

Figure 3‐5 DISP CNTRS Screen.......................................................3‐8

Figure 3‐6 Cheque Processor DISP CNTRS Screen ......................3‐8

Figure 3‐7 Bunch Note Acceptor Counters Screen.......................3‐9

Figure 3‐8 BNA CNTRS Totals Screen.........................................3‐11

Figure 3‐9 PRNT CNTRS Printout................................................3‐13

Figure 3‐10 CLR CASH Screen........................................................3‐14

Figure 3‐11 CLR CASH Screen for Extended Cassettes ..............3‐15

Figure 3‐12 CLR CARDS Screen .....................................................3‐15

Figure 3‐13 Cassette Mapping.........................................................3‐21

Figure 3‐14 DISP COINS Screen .....................................................3‐28

Figure 3‐15 Second DISP COINS Screen........................................3‐28

List of Figures

xxviii APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


Figure 3‐16 Security Camera Screen...............................................3‐35

Figure 3‐17 Copy Snapshots Screen ...............................................3‐36

Figure 3‐18 Clear Bins Screen ..........................................................3‐38

Figure 3‐19 Cleared BNA Counters Screen ...................................3‐43


Figure 4‐1 Configure Menus............................................................4‐3

Figure 4‐2 DISP CONFIG Screen ....................................................4‐3

Figure 4‐3 DISP Config Standard Note Counts Screen ...............4‐4

Figure 4‐4 DISP Config Extended Note Counts Screen...............4‐5

Figure 4‐5 DISP CONFIG Standard Coin Counts Screen............4‐5

Figure 4‐6 DISP CONFIG Extended Coin Counts Screen ...........4‐6

Figure 4‐7 PRNT CONFIG Printout ...............................................4‐6

Figure 4‐8 EJ configuration menu.................................................4‐21

Figure 4‐9 Example DISP EJ CONFIG screen .............................4‐21

Figure 4‐10 Example Multiple Destination Selection Screen......4‐23

Figure 4‐11 Auto INIT EJ Options Screen......................................4‐24

Figure 4‐12 Cutover Screen..............................................................4‐25

Figure 4‐13 Scheduled INIT Options Screen.................................4‐25

Figure 4‐14 Enable/Disable Scheduled INIT Screen.....................4‐26

Figure 4‐15 Scheduled INIT Pattern Screen ..................................4‐26

Figure 4‐16 Weekly Scheduled INIT Screen..................................4‐27

Figure 4‐17 Monthly Scheduled INIT Screen................................4‐27

Figure 4‐18 Example Automatic INIT Copy Drive screen ..........4‐28

Figure 4‐19 Compression screen .....................................................4‐29

Figure 4‐20 Max File Size screen .....................................................4‐30

Figure 4‐21 Disable Host Control of EJ Mode screen...................4‐31

Figure 4‐22 EJ Privacy Options Screen...........................................4‐31

Figure 4‐23 EJ Privacy Authentication Screen ..............................4‐34

Figure 4‐24 Set EJ Password screen ................................................4‐34

Figure 4‐25 TCP/IP CONFIG Menu................................................4‐37

Figure 4‐26 ADVANCED TCP/IP CONFIG Menu.......................4‐42

Figure 4‐27 DIALUP CONFIG Menu.............................................4‐55

Figure 4‐28 Example Alphanumeric screen ..................................4‐58

Figure 4‐29 Application Parameters Menu ...................................4‐59

Figure 4‐30 Modem Link Menu ......................................................4‐61

Figure 4‐31 Example PRIMARY NO screen..................................4‐63

Figure 4‐32 Serial Link Menu ..........................................................4‐63

Figure 4‐33 CCM VISA2 Menu .......................................................4‐64

List of Figures

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide xxix


Figure 4‐34 Dialup Network Address Menu ................................4‐66

Figure 4‐35 Troubleshooting Options Screen ...............................4‐69

Figure 4‐36 Add Cash Menu Options ............................................4‐72

Figure 4‐37 Cassette Mapping screen ............................................4‐73

Figure 4‐38 Update SP Currency ID...............................................4‐74

Figure 4‐39 Update SP Media Value ..............................................4‐74

Figure 4‐40 First Calibrate Cash Unit screen.................................4‐76

Figure 4‐41 Second Calibrate Cash Unit screen............................4‐77

Figure 4‐42 Update Currency ID ....................................................4‐78

Figure 4‐43 Update Media Type .....................................................4‐79

Figure 4‐44 Update Media Value....................................................4‐79

Figure 4‐45 Update Reject Bin Threshold......................................4‐80

Figure 4‐46 BNA Cash Configuration............................................4‐80

Figure 4‐47 GBNA.INI Config screen ............................................4‐81

Chapter 5Access Menu

Figure 5‐1 Access Menu ...................................................................5‐2

Figure 5‐2 DISP ACCESS Screen.....................................................5‐3

Figure 5‐3 MAC Access Data Screen............................................5‐11

Figure 5‐4 Key Entry Menu ...........................................................5‐12

Figure 5‐5 Changing Key Entry Mode.........................................5‐13

Figure 5‐6 Confirming Key Entry Mode......................................5‐14

Figure 5‐7 Entering Key A, Single Length without XOR ..........5‐15

Figure 5‐8 Entering Key A, Single Length with XOR ................5‐15

Figure 5‐9 Entering Part 1 of a Key ..............................................5‐16

Figure 5‐10 Confirming Part 1.........................................................5‐17

Figure 5‐11 PIN Pad Remapping for Secure Key Entry ..............5‐18


Figure 7‐1 Native Mode Printout....................................................7‐4

Figure 7‐2 Validate Checksum Utility..........................................7‐15

Figure 7‐3 Reprint Sequence Example .........................................7‐18

List of Figures

xxx APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


List of Tables

xxxi



List of Tables

Preface

Table Pref‐1 Navigation Elements ............................................... xxxvii


Table 3‐1 Cash Counters.................................................................3‐5

Table 3‐2 Recycling Counters ........................................................3‐6

Table 3‐3 Note Movements ..........................................................3‐11

Table 3‐4 Example Mappings ......................................................3‐19

Table 3‐5 DISP COINS Screen Description................................3‐29


Table 4‐1 Screen Ranges and Types............................................4‐12

Table 4‐2 Screen Sequence Navigation ......................................4‐12

Table 4‐3 Password Characters ...................................................4‐32

Table 4‐4 Journal Level Options..................................................4‐35

Table 4‐5 Advanced TCP/IP Option Attributes ........................4‐43

Table 4‐6 Option 0 Parameters ....................................................4‐43

Table 4‐7 Dialup Characters ........................................................4‐56

Table 4‐8 Application Parameters for Dialup Configuration .4‐59

Table 4‐9 Modem Link Configuration........................................4‐62

Table 4‐10 Serial Link Configuration............................................4‐64

Table 4‐11 CCM VISA2 Configuration.........................................4‐65

Table 4‐12 Network Address Configuration...............................4‐66

Table 4‐13 Dialup Diagnostics Options........................................4‐67

List of Tables

xxxii APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


Chapter 6Setting up the Terminal

Table 6‐1 Steps for Setting up the SST..........................................6‐3


Table 7‐1 Last Transaction Point .................................................7‐10

Table 7‐2 Retract Counts Journal Information ..........................7‐11

Table 7‐3 Reprint Sequence Example .........................................7‐18

Table 7‐4 Differences in System Application and Fault Display Reporting.....................................................................7‐21

Table 7‐5 Exceptions Requiring Action After Clearing State..7‐22

Table 7‐6 GBRU Journal Messages..............................................7‐24

Appendix AOption Digits

Table A‐1 Option Digits..................................................................A‐2

Table A‐2 Option Digit 1 Combinations ....................................A‐10







Table A‐9 Option Digit Example.................................................A‐16

Appendix BError Messages

Table B‐1 Causes of Failure in Diskette Copy .......................... B‐14

List of Tables

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide xxxiii


Appendix CRelated Documentation

Table C‐1 Advance NDC Documentation ...................................C‐2

Table C‐2 Provided Authoring Environment Documentation.C‐3

Table C‐3 Additional Authoring Environment Documentation............................................................C‐4

Table C‐4 Provided NDC+ Documentation ................................C‐5

Table C‐5 Additional NDC+ Documentation..............................C‐5

Table C‐6 Other NCR Documentation .........................................C‐6

Table C‐7 CEN‐XFS Documentation ............................................C‐7

List of Tables

xxxiv APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


About This Publication

xxxv



Preface

About This Publication

This publication describes how to use the Supervisor mode to configure or replenish an SST running APTRA Advance NDC. For information about any differences that apply on other vendors’ SSTs, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual.

Why Should I Read this Publication?

This publication is intended for you if you are responsible for setting up the terminal’s local configuration parameters, or if you are involved in carrying out routine replenishment of the terminal.

Abbreviations Used in this Publication

The following abbreviations are used in this publication.

What is in this Publication?The publication contains the following information:

Chapter 1, “Introduction to Supervisor Mode”

Describes Supervisor mode, how to enter it and use the Supervisor functions.

Chapter 2, “Introduction to the Supervisor Menus”

Introduces the menus available in Supervisor mode, and gives details of the Select menu. From this menu you can access the other Supervisor menus.

Full Form Abbreviation

APTRA Author Author

APTRA Advance NDC Advance NDC

APTRA Self‐Service Support Self‐Service Support

Microsoft Windows XP Professional

Windows XP

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HKLM

Global Bunch Note Acceptor (GBNA) and Global Bill Recycling Unit (GBRU)

GBXX

Cheque Processing Module (CPM) and bunch cheque acceptor

Cheque processor

PrefaceAbout This Publication

xxxvi APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


Chapter 3, “Replenish Menu”

Describes the options available to carry out the day‐to‐day management of the terminal.

Chapter 4, “Configure Menu”

Describes the options available to configure the terminal.

Chapter 5, “Access Menu”

Describes the options available to establish or change passwords and specify which menu is to appear first when you enter Supervisor mode.

Chapter 6, “Setting up the Terminal”

Provides step‐by‐step instructions on how to configure the terminal initially.

Chapter 7, “Error and Exception Reporting and Recovery”

Gives details of the messages that are recorded by the terminal on the local journal log, and of the information the APTRA Self‐Service Support System Application provides about replenishables and terminal devices. The chapter also provides information on the electronic journal.

Appendix A, “Option Digits”

Gives details of option digits that you can select when you configure local parameters. These options allow you to specify which additional events and terminal conditions are reported in status messages to Central.

Appendix B, “Error Messages”

Lists the error messages that can occur when you are in Supervisor mode, and provides definitions of their meanings and probable causes.

Appendix C, “Related Documentation”

Provides details of all related NCR documentation.

How To Use This GuideNCR recommends that you read Chapter 1, “Introduction to Supervisor Mode” first for a general introduction to Supervisor mode, and then Chapter 2, “Introduction to the Supervisor Menus” for an introduction to the available menus.

If you are responsible for setting up local configuration parameters, read Chapter 6, “Setting up the Terminal” for step‐by‐step instructions on how to add local configuration details to the


APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide xxxvii


terminal software. For details of the available Configure and Access menu options, see Chapter 4, “Configure Menu” and Chapter 5, “Access Menu” for details.

If you are responsible for the day‐to‐day management of the terminal, Chapter 3, “Replenish Menu” provides details of the available Replenish menu options, and instructions on how to carry them out.

If an error or device failure occurs, see Chapter 7, “Error and Exception Reporting and Recovery” for instructions on how to recover.

Using this Publication

This publication can be printed, or viewed electronically.

The electronic publication provides:

● Hyperlinked page references

● A hyperlinked content tree in the Bookmarks pane.

The following navigation and commenting elements are used in this publication:

Table Pref-1 Navigation Elements

Element Description

Revision Record Lists updates for supported releases in page order with page references. The most recent release is listed first.

Table of Contents List the first two heading levels in page order with page references.

Table of Contents for chapter or appendix

Lists the first three heading levels in page order with page references.

Glossary Provides an alphabetical list of terms, acronyms, and abbreviations with their meaning.

Index Provides an alphabetical list of topics, keywords, concepts, and data references with page references.

Feedback Allows you to comment on the publication by:

— Printing the form

— Selecting the Email link

— Selecting the Web link.


xxxviii APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


Support InformationIf you have a problem using Advance NDC, try the following steps to resolve the problem:

1 If an error or device failure occurs, see the following:

● Chapter 7, “Error and Exception Reporting and Recovery”

● Appendix B, “Error Messages”

2 Contact your internal support person for help.

3 Contact your local NCR representative.NCR provides a wide range of support programmes. For more information, contact your local Account Team.

If you have any problems using this guide, there is a “User Feedback Form” at the back of this guide, where you will find our email and postal addresses. Please take the time to reply; your comments are appreciated.

Table of ContentsIntroduction to Supervisor Mode



Chapter 1

Introduction to Supervisor Mode

What is Supervisor Mode? 1‐2

How to Enter Supervisor Mode 1‐3

PA/PCI‐DSS Compliance 1‐3

Access menu A‐3

Configure menu A‐3

Entering at a Front‐Access Terminal 1‐3

Entering at a Rear‐Access Terminal 1‐4

What You See When Entering Supervisor Mode 1‐4

Moving Between the Rear and Front of the Terminal 1‐4

Resetting the System 1‐5

Using the Operator Interface at the Rear 1‐6

Using the Facia Interface at the Front 1‐7

Selecting Options from the Menus 1‐9

Interpreting Error Messages 1‐10

Setting Supervisor Reporting 1‐11

Table of ContentsIntroduction to Supervisor Mode



Overview

-1


APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide 1

Introduction to Supervisor ModeA

Overview 1

This chapter is about Supervisor mode ‐ what it is, how to access it and how to use the available options. In this chapter we discuss the following topics:

● What is Supervisor mode?

● How to enter Supervisor mode

● Using the operator interface at the rear

● Using the facia interface at the front

● Moving between the front and rear of the terminal

● Selecting options from the menus

● Interpreting error messages

● Setting supervisor reporting.

Introduction to Supervisor ModeWhat is Supervisor Mode?

1-2 APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


What is Supervisor Mode? 1

Supervisor mode is the means of managing the terminal through a range of menus and options for configuring and replenishing the terminal as required, for example:

● Entering and changing the initial encryption keys

● Replenishing printer and cash supplies

● Printing and resetting totals.

This manual describes the use of the standard Supervisor options for an Advance NDC application. Your particular environment may have non‐standard supervisor options such as the following:

● The start‐up menu may have been customised.

● Additional menus may have been added.

● New functions may have been added to standard menus.

● Options on standard menus may have been customised.

If you are operating a terminal that has been customised in this way, refer to any supervisor documentation describing the customisations.

For additional information that applies to other vendors’ SSTs, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual.

Note: NCR advises you to use a printer or an electronic journal (EJ) to keep a permanent record of configuration details and replenishment actions. For information on how to configure a terminal to keep a hard copy or electronic log of menus and other displays, see Chapter 4, “Configure Menu”.

Chapter 2, “Introduction to the Supervisor Menus” introduces the menus. The following chapters cover each menu in detail:

● Chapter 3, “Replenish Menu”

● Chapter 4, “Configure Menu”

● Chapter 5, “Access Menu”

Introduction to Supervisor ModeHow to Enter Supervisor Mode

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide 1-3


How to Enter Supervisor Mode 1

The manner in which you enter Supervisor mode depends on the type of terminal you use.

PA/PCI‐DSS Compliance 1

If you are using a PA/PCI‐DSS compliant solution, Supervisor authentication is handled through group policy and Microsoft Windows local user accounts. This allows secure storage of passwords to be handled by the underlying operating system.

As the following options have the potential to access cardholder data, they are password protected if a user account is configured:

Access menu A

● SET PASSWRD

● ENTER V

● WRITE V

● ENTER A

● WRITE A

● ENTER B

● WRITE B

● ENTER MAC

● KEY ENTRY

● WRITE SIGS

Configure menu A

● TCP/IP CONFIG

● DIALUP CONFIG

Note: EJ options to copy files to removable media do not require password protection as the cardholder data is already masked.

For further information on PA/PCI‐DSS compliance and configuration, refer to Appendix E of the APTRA Advance NDC Developer’s Guide.

Entering at a Front‐Access Terminal 1

To enter Supervisor mode at a front‐access terminal, unlock and lift the facia until its supporting stay is fully extended. If the terminal is fitted with the Auto‐Supervisor facility, the terminal enters Supervisor mode automatically when you open the facia. If the terminal does not have the Auto‐Supervisor facility, you can access Supervisor mode by moving the mode switch to Supervisor.




Entering at a Rear‐Access Terminal 1

To enter Supervisor mode at a rear‐access terminal, unlock and open the rear cabinet door. If the terminal is fitted with the Auto‐Supervisor facility, the terminal enters Supervisor mode automatically when you open the door. If the terminal does not have the Auto‐Supervisor facility, you can access Supervisor mode by moving the mode switch on the operator panel to Supervisor.

What You See When Entering Supervisor Mode 1

The operator interface (at the rear) or the facia display (at the front) presents you with the Supervisor menus, as well as prompts and messages. The initial menu displayed is the Select menu, unless you have previously selected the option to go straight into the Replenish menu or an Exit menu. For details, see “3 INIT ENTRY (Initial Entry)” on page 5‐5. The operator interface is ready for you to select an option.

If you try to enter Supervisor mode while a transaction is in progress, there will be a delay while the transaction is completed.

Note: Sideways printing on the receipt is not supported in Supervisor mode.

Moving Between the Rear and Front of the Terminal 1

On a rear‐access terminal, you can choose to work at either the front or the rear of the terminal, by using the ‘Transfer’ option from the Select menu. For information on how to select where you want to work, see Chapter 2, “Introduction to the Supervisor Menus”.

The operator interface increases security by providing a complete menu display at the rear of the terminal. You still have the option to transfer control to the facia interface if you wish.




Resetting the System 1

If you need to reset the system, for example after you have installed a new version of software, you can do so by entering Supervisor mode before pressing the reset switch on the operator interface. This enables quick re‐entry to Supervisor mode. However, NCR recommends you use the Shutdown function on the System Application menu.

For more information on resetting the system, refer to the Self‐Service Support, System Application User Guide. You can access this PDF from the on‐line APTRA Documentation: select APTRA XFS | Runtime Maintenance.

Introduction to Supervisor ModeUsing the Operator Interface at the Rear



Using the Operator Interface at the Rear 1

The terminal displays prompts and messages in full on the operator interface.

When you need to enter data, a data entry prompt is displayed on the operator interface. You can enter data using the operator keypad. The Function Display Keys (FDKs) are used only for encryption key entry.

Figure 1-1 Operator Interface

1

4

7

2

5

8

0

3

6

9

CLR

CNL

ENT

AUX

In - Service

Supervisor

Power

Error

Comm

Supervisor

Normal

Reset

A

B

C

D

I

H

G

F

Introduction to Supervisor ModeUsing the Facia Interface at the Front



Using the Facia Interface at the Front 1

When you carry out Supervisor functions from the facia interface at the front of the terminal, you use the screen and enter data using the cardholder keyboard. The FDKs or the touch screen FDK emulation (where applicable) are used only for encryption key entry. The System Application is accessed through option 7, Diagnostic.

The following diagrams show the default NCR layouts for the facia interface screen and the touch‐screen FDK emulation respectively.

Figure 1-2 Facia Interface Screen

1QZ

4GHI

7PRS

2ABC

5JKL

8TUV

0

3DEF

6MNO

9WXY

CLEAR

CANCEL

ENTER

AUX

SELECT

4 REPLENISH 5 CONFIGURE

6 ACCESS 7 DIAGNOSTIC

8 TRANSFER 9 EXIT

26 FAULT DISPLAY

90 MISC FUNCS

SELECT FUNCTION-

Introduction to Supervisor ModeUsing the Facia Interface at the Front



Figure 1-3 Touch Screen FDK Emulation

ENCRYPTION KEY A<<A B>>

CURRENT DIGIT =

<<C D>>

<<E F>>

ENTER KEY PART 1-

Touch FDKarea

Touch FDKarea

9WXY

1QZ

4GHI

7PRS

2ABC

5JKL

8TUV

0

3DEF

6MNO

CLEAR

CANCEL

ENTER

AUX

Introduction to Supervisor ModeSelecting Options from the Menus



Selecting Options from the Menus 1

The terminal displays the options you can select in menu form.

To select a Supervisor option:

1 Key the option number.

2 Press the Enter key.

The following function keys are defined for the Select, Replenish, Configure and Access menus:

Press the Clear key (CLR) if you enter the wrong number. This will delete the number and allow you to enter the correct one.

Press the Cancel key (CNL) if you are in the Replenish, Configure or Access menu and want the Select menu to be redisplayed.

Press the Enter key (ENT) after using an option to return to the menu.

Some keys have other defined functions in lower‐level menus. See the relevant sections for details.

CLEAR

CANCEL

ENTER

Introduction to Supervisor ModeInterpreting Error Messages



Interpreting Error Messages 1

If you make a mistake when entering information or selecting an option, the terminal will display an error message.

The error message remains until you make a selection which causes another screen to be displayed.

See Appendix B, “Error Messages”, for details of all Supervisor error messages.

Introduction to Supervisor ModeSetting Supervisor Reporting



Setting Supervisor Reporting 1

Status messages are sent to Central which contain a record of the menu options you selected while in Supervisor mode. You have the following options, which you can set from the Configure menu:

● Transmit only the menu item selections from the Select menu (default)

● Transmit the menu number and menu item selections from all the menus. This is a local configuration option

● Transmit items selected from a sub‐menu

● Transmit items selected from component options.

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configure Menu”, and Appendix A, “Option Digits”, option digit 0.

Introduction to Supervisor ModeSetting Supervisor Reporting



Table of ContentsIntroduction to the Supervisor Menus



Chapter 2

Introduction to the Supervisor Menus

Standard Menus Available in Supervisor Mode 2‐2

Select Menu 2‐3

4 REPLENISH 2‐3

5 CONFIGURE 2‐4

6 ACCESS 2‐4

Mini Self‐Service Assistant 2‐4

7 DIAGNOSTIC 2‐5

8 TRANSFER 2‐5

Selecting Transfer from the Operator Interface 2‐5

Selecting Transfer from the Facia Interface 2‐6

9 EXIT 2‐6

Interlock Switch Opened During a Transaction 2‐7

26 FAULT DISPLAY 2‐8

27 MV DIAG (MV Diagnostics) 2‐8

90 MISC FUNCS 2‐8

0 PRNT CMPNT VERS 2‐8

1 PRNT SCRW VERS 2‐9

Table of ContentsIntroduction to the Supervisor Menus



Overview

-1



Introduction to the Supervisor MenusB

Overview 2

In this chapter we introduce the standard options and menus available from the first Supervisor menu, the Select menu.

Read this chapter if you are responsible for either setting up local configuration parameters or the day‐to‐day management of the NCR SSTs

For additional information about Supervisor mode on other vendors’ SSTs, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual.

Each menu available in Supervisor mode gives you access to a range of related options, as follows:

● Select Menu ‐ provides access to the other Supervisor menus

● Replenish Menu ‐ contains options for performing day‐to‐day terminal management

● Configure Menu ‐ contains options for setting local configuration parameters

● Access Menu ‐ contains security options.

Note: There may be other menus in addition to those shown in this manual, or some menus may have different options. Consult any third‐party guides to customised Supervisor functions that are installed on your terminal.

Introduction to the Supervisor MenusStandard Menus Available in Supervisor Mode



Standard Menus Available in Supervisor Mode 2

You carry out Supervisor functions by selecting options from a series of menus. The main menus available and the options associated with each one are shown in the following diagram.

Figure 2-1 Standard Supervisor Menus

For options marked with an asterisk (*), see the associated chapter.

Introduction to the Supervisor MenusSelect Menu



Select Menu 2

The Select menu is usually the first menu you see on entering Supervisor mode. From here you can do the following:

● Select other Supervisor menus

● Access the APTRA Self‐Service System Application through the Mini Self‐Service Assistant (MSSA). For details of the APTRA Self‐Service System Application, refer to the Self‐Service Support, System Application User Guide. You can access this PDF from the on‐line APTRA Documentation: select APTRA XFS | Runtime Maintenance.

● Enter the System Application, through option 7 “Diagnostic”

● Transfer between interfaces

● Exit from Supervisor mode.

Figure 2-2 Select Menu

Note 1: For information about selecting option 7 “Diagnostic” or the configurable option 27 “MV Diag” on other vendors’ SSTs, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual.

Note 2: The ‘90 MISC FUNCS’ option gives access to the smart card functions listed in the “90 MISC FUNCS” section. These are associated with the ‘EMV/CAM2 Exits for APTRA Advance NDC’ product. For more information, refer to the EMV Integrated Circuit Card (ICC) Reference Manual.

4 REPLENISH 2

The Replenish option gives access to the Replenish menu, which you use for maintaining the terminal supplies and the counters relating to them. For details, see Chapter 3, “Replenish Menu”.




5 CONFIGURE 2

The Configure option gives access to the Configure menu, once you have entered the correct password if it is set.

The Configure menu contains options for setting local configuration parameters. You will normally only need to use it for setting local configuration parameters when the terminal is first installed. For details, see Chapter 4, “Configure Menu”.

6 ACCESS 2

The Access option gives access to the Access menu, once you have entered the correct password if set. You use the Access menu for setting how the terminal will operate in Supervisor mode, and for entering encryption keys.

The Access menu also controls password protection to Level 2 Supervisor menus. For details, see Chapter 5, “Access Menu”.

Mini Self‐Service Assistant 2On NCR SSTs, if the Mini Self‐Service Assistant (MSSA) is installed, correctly configured and enabled, it displays the status of the SST and its devices as an icon. It also provides direct on‐screen access to VDM.

Advance NDC is configured by default to additionally allow entry to VDM through pressing FDK C on the Supervisor Select menu. The MSSA icon or the SERVICE ASSIST text is aligned to FDK C.

If the icon or text is selected during a transaction, the request is deferred until the transaction is completed, for example, when the current cardholder session is complete. VDM is automatically entered through Supervisor. When VDM is exited, Supervisor is also exited if the mode switch is in the Normal position.

The type of display in use determines whether an icon or text is shown, as follows:

● On a SelfServ graphical operator panel (GOP), the status icon is displayed at all times. Selecting the icon will start VDM.

● On an Enhanced Operator Panel, the text ʺSERVICE ASSISTʺ is displayed on the Select menu, aligned with FDK C. Selecting the FDK will start VDM.

● On the front interface, the icon (for SelfServ) or text (for Personas) is displayed aligned with FDK C on the Select menu. Selecting the icon on a SelfServ touchscreen, or FDK C if FDKs are used, starts the VDM.

For more information about configuring the MSSA, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Developer’s Guide.




7 DIAGNOSTIC 2

On NCR SSTs, the Diagnostic option gives access to the APTRA Self‐Service Support System Application. The System Application provides access to functions that are used to perform configuration and maintenance on an SST.

The following functions are available within the System Application:

● Maintenance

● Device Self Tests

● Device Status List

● Device Servicing

● Self Service Configuration

● Save NT Information to Disk

● Transfer System Application Interface between front and rear display

● System Shutdown.

Not all of the functions provided by the System Application are available to every user. Some functions are reserved for use by customer engineers (CEs) only.

If you exit Diagnostics by switching the mode switch to Normal and pressing either the Exit FDK or Cancel key, the following occur:

● Advance NDC returns to the appropriate mode, depending on the auto exit option and the mode from which Supervisor mode was entered

● A Supervisor exit unsolicited status message is sent to the host.

In this case, there is no need to exit Supervisor using the Exit menu option. For details, see “9 EXIT” on page 2‐6.

For details of the functions, refer to the Self‐Service Support, System Application User Guide. You can access this PDF from the on‐line APTRA Documentation: select APTRA XFS | Runtime Maintenance.

8 TRANSFER 2

The Transfer option enables you to switch control of Supervisor functions between the operator and facia interfaces. You can specify which panel is active whenever you enter Supervisor mode, by selecting the INIT DISPLY option from the Access menu.

Selecting Transfer from the Operator Interface 2

If you select the transfer option from the operator interface, control is passed to the facia interface.




To obtain the Select menu, complete the following:

1 The prompt ENTER PASSWORD appears.

2 Type your password (by default, this is ‘2468’) and press Enter.

3 The message FACIA appears on the operator display once you have entered the correct password.

Note: The System Application or other Vendor Dependent Mode (VDM) Supervisor display is only displayed on the front facia screen if the mode switch is set to Supervisor (not Normal). This is in accordance with the CEN‐XFS standard, which states that VDM Supervisor displays must only be displayed on the front screen in Supervisor (not Normal) mode.

Selecting Transfer from the Facia Interface 2

If you select the Transfer option from the facia interface, control is passed to the operator interface and the Supervisor screen is displayed on the operator display.

9 EXIT 2

The Exit option takes you out of Supervisor mode. When you select this option the following occur:

● The current operator display is blanked

● The keyboard is disabled

● When using the rear interface, the supply screen (‘C03’ or ‘003’) is displayed on the facia display

● If present, the Bunch Note Acceptor (BNA) and the cheque processor have their device fitness initialised ready for use by the transaction

● Cash handlers are cleared.

‘C03’ is a reserved screen and is displayed when the terminal is in Supervisor mode. If screen ‘C03’ is not downloaded, the display defaults to screen ‘003’, which is a customised screen.

If the mode switch is set to Normal, the terminal will go either in‐service or out‐of‐service. This depends on the ‘Supply and Ready’ configuration option selected in the Configuration Parameters or Enhanced Configuration Parameters load message, and the mode from which Supervisor was entered. For details of the Configuration/Enhanced Configuration Parameters Load message, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual.




If the mode switch is set to Supervisor, the terminal will remain in Supervisor mode, with the keyboards disabled and the display blanked, until the mode switch is returned to the Normal position.

If you exit Supervisor mode with the interlock switch open, the cash handler will not subsequently operate. Unless the circumstances described below apply, you must go back into Supervisor mode with the interlock switch closed and clear the faults using the standard replenishment functions. For more information, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual.

Interlock Switch Opened During a Transaction 2

If the interlock switch is opened during a dispense transaction, the transaction will fail with a message sent to Central to indicate the fatal condition caused by the interlock switch being open.

Advance NDC supports Enhanced Configuration Option 33, the Simulate Supervisor Mode Entry/Exit option, for the cash handler only in terminals fitted with a rocker switch for Supervisor mode. The default for this option is on (set to zero).

Once the terminal returns to the idle state and the interlock switch is closed, Supervisor Entry/Exit is simulated to ensure that the cash handler is cleared and in a good state to allow further transaction.

If the interlock switch is opened prior to a transaction taking place (for example, it is left open after Supervisor activity) it is only when an attempt is made to use the cash handler that the terminal will generate a fatal condition.

If Enhanced Configuration Option 33 is set to 001 (that is, do not simulate Supervisor Exit/Entry) and the above scenarios occur, the cash handler will not operate, but remain in a fatal condition. To rectify this, you must close the interlock switch, go back into Supervisor mode, and clear the faults using the standard replenishment functions. For more information, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual.

The best advice is as follows:

● Always close the interlock switch before you exit Supervisor mode

● Ensure that when opening the interlock switch, the terminal is in an idle state.

Note: A Clear Cash operation is performed on exit from Supervisor mode, to clear any bills (notes) which may be in the cash handler transport mechanism. If using a GBRU, the Clear Cash operation is performed only if there are notes in the transport mechanism.




26 FAULT DISPLAY 2

The Fault Display option lets you view the fault display on request using either the front or rear interface when in Supervisor mode. For details of the Fault Display, see “Device Fault Reporting” on page 7‐20.

27 MV DIAG (MV Diagnostics) 2

This option is only displayed if additional diagnostics screens are configured. NCR recommends that these options are used only on other vendors’ SSTs. For details, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual.

On NCR SSTs, use the Diagnostic option, described in “7 DIAGNOSTIC” on page 2‐5.

90 MISC FUNCS 2

The Misc Funcs option gives access to the Miscellaneous Functions menu, which you can use to journal the Smart Card application or SCRW hardware version numbers, if present.

The Miscellaneous Functions menu contains the smart card related options shown in the following figure:

Figure 2-3 Miscellaneous Functions Menu

When the ʹMISC FUNCSʹ menu is entered from the Select menu, the unsolicited supervisor keys message has field ʹe2ʹ set to ʹ90ʹ or ʹ090ʹ, depending on the value of message mode option digit number 0.

0 PRNT CMPNT VERS 2

When EMV smart cards (EMV/CAM2 Exits) are not being used and no EMV application is present, supervisor function ʹ0ʹ (ʹPRNT CMPNT VERSʹ) prints the following to the journal:

COMPONENT VERSIONSICC NOT INSTALLEDCAM NOT INSTALLEDINT NOT INSTALLED

If EMV smart cards are being used, supervisor function ʹ0ʹ (ʹPRNT CMPNT VERSʹ) prints the smart card processing application




component versions. In this case, refer to the EMV Integrated Circuit Card (ICC) Reference Manual.

If the printer or EJ is not available, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. If the printer is configured but the print operation fails, the error message ‘PRINT FAILURE’ is displayed.

For details of using the SET PRINT option in the Configure menu to configure a printer or the EJ, see “8 SET PRINT (Set Printer)” on page 4‐13.

When the ʹPRNT CMPNT VERSʹ function is selected from the ʹMISC FUNCSʹ menu, the unsolicited supervisor keys message has field ʹe2ʹ set to ʹ800ʹ or will not be sent, depending on the value of message mode option digit number 0.

1 PRNT SCRW VERS 2

With a Smart Card Reader/Writer (SCRW) present, supervisor function ʹ1ʹ (ʹPRNT SCRW VERSʹ) prints the SCRW firmware version information to the journal; for example:

SCRW VERSION009001621450000000


For details of using the SET PRINT option on the Configure menu to configure a printer or the EJ, see “8 SET PRINT (Set Printer)” on page 4‐13.

When the ʹPRNT SCRW VERSʹ function is selected from the ʹMISC FUNCSʹ menu, the unsolicited supervisor keys message has field ʹe2ʹ set to ʹ801ʹ or will not be sent, depending on the value of message mode option digit number 0.

Note 1: For information about this option on other vendors’ SSTs, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual.

Table of ContentsReplenish Menu



Chapter 3

Replenish Menu

Replenish Menu 3‐2

0 DISP SPPLY (Display Supplies Status) 3‐2

1 PRNT SPPLY (Print Supplies Status) 3‐4

2 DISP CASH (Display Supplies Counters ‐ Cash) 3‐5

Recycling 3‐6

Effects of Enhanced Configuration Option 76 3‐7

3 DISP CNTRS (Display Supplies Counters) 3‐7

Cheque Processor 3‐8

Bunch Note Acceptor 3‐8

4 PRNT CNTRS (Print Supplies Counters) 3‐12

5 CLR CASH (Clear Cash Supplies Counters) 3‐14

6 CLR CARDS (Clear Cards Captured Counter) 3‐15

7 CLR DEPOS (Clear Deposits Counter) 3‐16

8 ADD CASH (Add to Cash Counters) 3‐16

Cassette Mapping 3‐19

9 INIT RECPT (Initialise Receipt) 3‐21

10 TEST CASH 3‐22

12 STD CASH (Standard Cash) 3‐23

13 INIT STMNT (Initialise Statement) 3‐24

15 SPVR TRANS (Supervisor Transactions) 3‐24

Prompts Displayed During Supervisor Settlement 3‐25

Completion Of Data Entry 3‐26

Transaction Request Message 3‐26

Leaving Supervisor Mode 3‐27

18 DISP COINS (Display Coins) 3‐27

19 CLR COINS (Clear Coins) 3‐29

20 ADD COINS 3‐29

21 STD COINS (Standard Coins) 3‐31

40 INIT EJRNL (Initialise Electronic Journal) 3‐31

EJ Options 3‐31

Standard EJ Backup 3‐33

Multiple EJ Backup 3‐34

EJDATA.LOG File 3‐34

Recovering from a Power Failure 3‐34

41 FILL ENV (Fill Envelope) 3‐35

42 SECURITY CAMERA 3‐35

1 TEST CAMERA 3‐36

2 COPY SNAPSHOTS 3‐36

Table of ContentsReplenish Menu



3 DELETE SNAPSHOTS 3‐37

43 INIT DEPOS (Initialise Depository) 3‐37

44 CLR BINS (Clear Bins) 3‐38

45 CHECK COIN 3‐38

47 DUMP IMAGES (Dump DPM Images) 3‐39

48 DSP BNA RCNL (Display BNA Reconciliation List) 3‐39

49 PRN BNA RCNL (Print BNA Reconciliation List) 3‐40

50 RCOPY EJRNL (Recopy Electronic Journal) 3‐40

Using Standard EJ Backups 3‐41

Using Multiple EJ Backups 3‐41

51 DIRECT EJ BACKUP 3‐42

53 CLR BNA (Clear BNA) 3‐42

54 INIT BNA (Initialise BNA) 3‐43

55 CREATE SIGS 3‐44

56 EXTRACT SIGS 3‐45

57 WRITE SIGS 3‐45

58 DSP BNA CNTS (Display BNA Counts) 3‐46

59 PRN BNA CNTS (Print BNA Counts) 3‐47

99 MORE 3‐47

Overview

-1



Replenish MenuC

Overview 3

The Replenish menu contains options for maintaining the terminal supplies and the counters relating to them.

Note: Advance NDC does not support replenishment while the SST is In Service.

This chapter describes the standard options available in the Replenish menu, and how to use them.

NCR recommends that you refer to this chapter if you are responsible for the day‐to‐day management of the terminal.

Replenish MenuReplenish Menu



Replenish Menu 3

The Replenish menu contains the following options:

Figure 3-1 Replenish Menus

0 DISP SPPLY (Display Supplies Status) 3

The Display Supplies Status option displays the status of any of the terminal supplies and containers which require attention.

Note: If more than 12 faults occur, only the first 12 are listed.

Select this option to check the terminal’s devices, by displaying the status of any supplies requiring attention. Selecting the option displays a single screen with the following header:

*SUPPLIES STATUS*

followed by one or more of the following messages:

● TYPE x CASH LOW (x = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7) for single cash handlers

● Cn TYPE x CASH LOW (n = cash handler number, x = cassette type) for dual cash handlers

● TYPE x CASH EMPTY (x = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7) for single cash handlers

● Cn TYPE x CASH EMPTY (n = cash handler number, x = cassette type) for dual cash handlers




● Cn CASH REJECT BIN OVERFILL (n = cash handler number)

● Cn CASH REJECT BIN HIGH (n = cash handler number)● CARD BIN OVERFILL● DEPOSIT BIN OVERFILL● NIGHT DEPOSIT OVERFILL● STATEMENT BIN OVERFILL● RECEIPT PAPER EXHAUSTED● RECEIPT PAPER LOW● RECEIPT HEAD EXHAUSTED● RECEIPT HEAD LOW● RECEIPT RIBBON EXHAUSTED● RECEIPT RIBBON LOW● RECEIPT KNIFE LOW● JOURNAL RIBBON EXHAUSTED● JOURNAL RIBBON LOW● JOURNAL PAPER EXHAUSTED● JOURNAL PAPER LOW● JOURNAL HEAD EXHAUSTED● JOURNAL HEAD LOW● STATEMENT BIN OVERFILL● STATEMENT RIBBON EXHAUSTED● STATEMENT RIBBON LOW● STATEMENT HEAD EXHAUSTED● STATEMENT HEAD LOW● STATEMENT PAPER EXHAUSTED● STATEMENT PAPER LOW● STATEMENT KNIFE LOW● ENVELOPE DISPENSER LOW● ENVELOPE DISPENSER EXHAUSTED● BNA COUNTERFEIT BIN OVERFILL● BNA COUNTERFEIT BIN MISSING● BNA COUNTERFEIT BIN NEARLY FULL● BNA RETRACT BIN OVERFILL● BNA RETRACT BIN MISSING● BNA RETRACT BIN NEARLY FULL● BNA CASSETTE x MISSING (x = physical cassette

position number)● BNA CASSETTE x OVERFILL (x = physical cassette

position number)● BNA CASSETTE x NEARLY FULL (x = physical cassette

position number)● BNA REJECT BIN MISSING● BNA REJECT BIN OVERFILL● BNA REJECT BIN NEARLY FULL● ENDORSER RIBBON NEARLY EXHAUSTED




● ENDORSER RIBBON EXHAUSTED● CPM STAMP INK LOW● CPM STAMP INK EMPTY● CPM BIN n OVERFILL (n = cheque processor bin number)● CPM BIN n NEARLY FULL (n = cheque processor bin

number)● COIN HOPPER n OUT (n = coin hopper number)● COIN HOPPER n LOW (n = coin hopper number)

If all supplies are adequate the following message is displayed:

ALL SUPPLIES GOOD

1 PRNT SPPLY (Print Supplies Status) 3

The Print Supplies Status option is the same as the DISP SPPLY option, but with the following differences:

● Instead of displaying the supplies status, the terminal prints the information on the selected printer or writes it to the electronic journal (EJ).

● The supplies status is preceded by the terminal number (MACHINE NO) and the current date/time as follows:

MACHINE NO = NNNNN

DATE-TIME = YY/MM/DD HH:MM

If required, an optional pre‐header can be printed before the terminal number.

If you select this option, the following message is displayed after a successful print:

SUPPLY STATE PRINTD






2 DISP CASH (Display Supplies Counters ‐ Cash) 3

The Disp Cash option displays the cash counters shown in Table 3‐1.

Table 3-1 Cash Counters

Figure 3-2 DISP CASH Screen

In this example, and throughout this manual, X is used to represent the numbers that appear on the screen. For the Remaining and Total counters, spaces are displayed if the counter is less than zero (0) or no entry has been made.

Note 1: The date may appear in either of the formats MM/DD/YY or DD/MM/YY. The date format is set by means of an Enhanced Configuration Parameters Load message.

If a cash handler is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. See Appendix B, “Error Messages” for details.

Note Counts 3If more notes have been picked from a cassette type than it was originally set to contain, the counts for CASSETTE, REMAINING and TOTAL are displayed as blanks, indicating invalid amounts. In this situation, the REJECTED and DISPENSED counts provide the correct note counts. This is because the CASSETTE, REMAINING and TOTAL counts are decremented until they reach zero,

Count Description

CASSETTE The number of notes in the cassette type

REJECTED The number of notes rejected from the cassette type

REMAINING The number of notes remaining in the terminal for the cassette type; calculated using the notes in the cassette type plus the notes rejected for the cassette type

DISPENSED The number of notes dispensed from the cassette type

TOTAL The total number of the notes in the cassette type plus the notes rejected plus the notes dispensed




when they stop counting, but the REJECTED, and DISPENSED counts are incremented.

The value of each REMAINING counter is the sum of the CASSETTE and REJECTED counters.

The CASSETTE and REJECTED counters may not be accurate. This is because the counter can wrongly assume the position of a note. If one of these counts is under by any amount, the other is over by the same amount. Therefore, the following equation is accurate, even if there has been a power failure during a transaction:

REMAINING + DISPENSED = TOTAL

Recycling 3

If recycling is enabled, the Disp Cash option displays the recycling counters shown in Table 3‐2.

Table 3-2 Recycling Counters

Figure 3-3 DISP CASH Screen with Recycling

Note Counts with Recycling Enabled 3If recycling is enabled, the CASSETTE and TOTAL counts can increase as well as decrease. If these counts decrease below zero, CASSETTE and TOTAL are displayed as blanks, indicating invalid amounts. In this situation, the REJECTED, DISPENSED and DEPOSITED counts provide the correct note counts.

Count Description

CASSETTE The number of notes in the cassette type

REJECTED The number of notes rejected from the cassette type

DISPENSED The number of notes dispensed from the cassette type

DEPOSITED The number of notes deposited into the cassette type

TOTAL The total number of the notes in the cassette type plus the notes rejected plus the notes dispensed minus the notes deposited

TYPE 1 TYPE 2CASSETTE XXXXX XXXXX

+REJECTED XXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX

- XXXXX XXXXX=TOTAL XXXXX XXXXX

TYPE 3 TYPE 4

LAST CLEARED MM/DD/YY HH:MMSELECT FUNCTION-

+DISPENSEDDEPOSITED

CASSETTE XXXXX XXXXX+REJECTED XXXXX XXXXX+DISPENSED XXXXX XXXXX-DEPOSITED XXXXX XXXXX=TOTAL XXXXX XXXXX




Effects of Enhanced Configuration Option 76 3

If Enhanced Configuration option 76 is set to 000, only four cassettes are shown. If using dual cash handlers, counts are either combined or separated, as defined by the CountersEntryMode registry setting.

If Enhanced Configuration option 76 is set to 001, the following apply:

● A further screen, similar to that shown in Figure 3‐4, is displayed to show the same information for cassette types 5, 6, and 7.

Figure 3-4 Second DISP CASH Screen

● If dual cash handlers are used, seven cassette types are shown and counts are either combined or separated, as defined by the registry settings.

● If dual cash handlers are not used, seven cassette types are shown.

3 DISP CNTRS (Display Supplies Counters) 3

The Disp Cntrs option displays non‐cash counts as follows:

● CARDS CAPTURED/LAST CLEARED ‐ all cards captured since the count was last cleared and the date the count was last cleared

● DEPOSITS MADE/LAST CLEARED ‐ all envelope deposits made since the count was last cleared and the date the count was last cleared

● ACTIVITY COUNT ‐ total transactions since the terminal was installed.




Figure 3-5 DISP CNTRS Screen

Note 1: The Activity counter contains the total number of transactions since the machine was installed. The counter is incremented for each Transaction Reply message received from Central which contains a new transaction serial number. This counter cannot be cleared from Supervisor mode.

Note 2: On terminals with no depository, the DEPOSITS MADE and LAST CLEARED lines are blank.

Cheque Processor 3

If a cheque processor is present, the counts for bins (also known as pockets) 1, 2 and 3 are also displayed, together with the date and time they were last cleared. The following screen shows the format of this information. If a bin does not exist, a zero count is displayed.

Figure 3-6 Cheque Processor DISP CNTRS Screen

Bunch Note Acceptor 3

If a Bunch Note Acceptor (BNA or GBXX) is present, the following message is displayed at the bottom of the DISP CNTRS screen:

PRESS <ENT> FOR MORE

Select this to display successive Bunch Note Acceptor Counters screens, showing note movements for active note types. The




following screen shows the format of each of these successive screens:

Figure 3-7 Bunch Note Acceptor Counters Screen

The Bunch Note Acceptor Counters screen displays the deposited note movements as follows:

● TYPE X ‐ the number of notes of denomination X. There can be up to 50 denominations reported in this series of screens, with four denominations reported on each screen. If you use ECB 6, suspect and authentic notes are included along with good notes. Counterfeit notes are not included in this count.

● CASSETTE ‐ the total number of notes of that type in the deposit cassettes.

● RETRACT ‐ the total number of notes of that type sent to the retract bin. Notes are sent to the retract bin when the retract option is enabled and in the following situations:

— Notes are presented to the cardholder, but not removed within the time specified by Timer 78.

— INIT BNA is selected from the Replenish menu in Supervisor Mode, and notes are cleared from inside the device.

In both situations, the RETRACT count is updated to reflect note movement. If during a retract operation, a device error occurs or the cardholder inserts or removes notes, the note count cannot be guaranteed.

● RECYCLED ‐ if recycling is enabled, the number of notes deposited into the recycling cassettes.

● DEPOSITED ‐ the total number of notes in the deposit or recycling cassettes and the retract bin.

The following scenarios are provided as illustrations.

Scenario 1. 3The BNA or GBXX device is enabled and notes have been inserted until the escrow is full and the retract option is enabled. Any notes processed after the escrow limit is reached will




not be validated, and therefore not included in the count. In this scenario:

● If all the rejected notes are removed by the cardholder, no rejected counts are updated for the returned notes.

Note: In this case, the number of notes returned and taken will not be known.

● If any notes remain at the exit slot when Timer 78 expires, the notes are validated for a second time and the counts updated as follows:

— Validated notes are added to the RETRACT count.

— Notes that are not validated are included in the NOTES IN TRANSPORT count.

Note: Only notes successfully or unsuccessfully validated on the second pass will be included in these counts.

Scenario 2. 3Due to a device error, the BNA or GBXX is unable to validate inserted notes. These notes are returned to the cardholder. The notes are not taken by the cardholder and the retract option is enabled, so the notes are retracted. In this scenario:

● The notes are moved to the reject bin, and included in the NOTES IN TRANSPORT count. This count is displayed on the BNA CNTRS Totals screen. See “BNA CNTRS Totals Screen” on page 3‐11 for details of this screen.

Note: Any notes that were successfully validated on the retract are counted in the RETRACT count. However, it is not possible to identify the number of notes rejected in this situation.

● If the BNA or GBXX device reports a note error, caused for example by a retract operation, a double feed, or general transport errors during note validation, the RETRACT count may be incorrect. Advance NDC records a note error on the journal, and this can be used to assist with reconciliation.

The journal will include the message:

NOTE ERROR OCCURRED DURING RETRACT, RETRACT COUNTS MAY NOT BE CORRECT

The final BNA CNTRS screen shows the total number of notes encashed, rejected, retracted, in the transport, deposited in escrow,




and refunded from escrow with the date and time they were last cleared. The following screen shows the format of this information:

Figure 3-8 BNA CNTRS Totals Screen

The following table explains the different note movements:

Table 3-3 Note Movements

BNA CNTRS

LAST CLEARED : MM/DD/YY HH:MM

COUNTENCASHED XXXXXREJECTED XXXXXRETRACTED XXXXXNOTES IN TRANSPORT XXXXXESCRW DEPS XXXXX

<< CLR ENT >>

ESCRW RFND XXXXXTOTAL COUNTERFEIT XXXXX

TOTAL SUSPECT XXXXX

Note Movement Description

ENCASHED Number of notes deposited from anywhere in the device.This count is also updated and the notes moved to the deposit bin if the retract option is not enabled and the BNA or GBXX is initialised using INIT BNA in Supervisor Mode.If you use ECB 6, this count includes suspect and good notes.

REJECTED Number of notes returned by the BNA or GBXX during processing in the Cash Accept state.A note is rejected when it cannot be validated by the device and is returned to the customer.This count is not updated in the following situations:

● Notes are moved to the reject bin if treated as invalid on the second pass of validation. These notes are included in the NOTES IN TRANSPORT count.

● Notes are not validated because the escrow limit has been reached.

● A deposit failure occurs, resulting in notes being identified as invalid on the first pass of validation.




4 PRNT CNTRS (Print Supplies Counters) 3

The PRNT CNTRS option is similar to the DISP CASH option and also includes the information provided in the DISP CASH and DISP COINS options, but the information is printed on the receipt or journal printer. Where applicable, selecting this option causes supplies counters to be written to the EJ (electronic journal).

RETRACTED If the BNA or GBXX has retract functionality enabled, this is the total number of valid or invalid notes moved from both the exit slot and escrow to the retract bin. Notes are moved from escrow if the notes are treated as invalid on the second pass of validation.If the retract functionality is not enabled, this count will be zero unless INIT BNA is used when notes are left at the exit from a previous transaction.Retract occurs:

● During the cardholder timeout with the retract option enabled and notes at escrow. To enable the retract option, set option 45 in the Enhanced Configuration Parameters Download. For details of option 45, see the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual.

● If there are notes at escrow when INIT BNA is performed in Supervisor Mode.

● If the customer does not remove the returned notes from the exit slot within the time specified by Timer 78.

NOTES IN TRANSPORT

Cumulative total number of notes put into the reject bin if the notes are treated as invalid on the second pass of validation.

ESCRW DEPS Number of notes accepted to the escrow position.

ESCRW RFND Number of notes returned to the refund slot from the escrow position.

TOTAL COUNTERFEIT

Total number of notes identified as counterfeit.

TOTAL SUSPECT Total number of notes retained because they have been identified as suspect.This count is also included in the ENCASHED counts.

Note Movement Description




Select this option to print the following counters or write them to file:

Figure 3-9 PRNT CNTRS Printout

The following message is displayed after a successful print:

ALL COUNTERS PRINTD

Note 1: The notes on page 3‐5 and page 3‐5 applying to DISP CASH also apply to the PRNT CNTRS option.

Note 2: If there is no printer or electronic journal fitted, or if the required device is out of service, this option is invalid and the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. If the printer is configured but the print operation fails, the error message ‘PRINT FAILURE’ is displayed. See Appendix B, “Error Messages” for details.

Note 3: Details are recorded only on SSTs with the appropriate device installed. For example, cash counts are printed for SSTs with a cash handler, and DEPOSITS MADE and LAST CLEARED lines are printed for SSTs with a depository.

Note 4: If the coin dispenser is present, all the coin counters data is included in the printed output. The printed output contains the same information as is displayed when the DISP COINS function is selected. See “18 DISP COINS (Display Coins)” on page 3‐27. No coin information is included if no coin dispenser is present.




Note 5: If the BNA is present, all the BNA CNTRS data is included in the printed output. The printed output contains the same information as is displayed when the DISP CNTRS function is selected, except for the MORE option. (See Figure 3‐7 “Bunch Note Acceptor Counters Screen” on page 3‐9 and Figure 3‐8 “BNA CNTRS Totals Screen” on page 3‐11).

Note 6: If the cheque processor is present, the counts for bins 1, 2 and 3 are also printed, together with the date and time that they were last cleared, containing the same information as displayed on screen for the DISP CNTRS option (see Figure 3‐6 “Cheque Processor DISP CNTRS Screen” on page 3‐8).

5 CLR CASH (Clear Cash Supplies Counters) 3

The CLR CASH option is one of a set available from the Replenish menu that lets you manage the cash balance in the terminal.

This option clears the currency counters to zero. The date and time of clearing are set by the terminal clock.

If using a GBRU, and a cash‐in error has occurred, the ‘CASH IN ERROR’ is displayed. You must clear the device using the INIT BNA option before running CLR CASH. For details of the INIT BNA option, see “54 INIT BNA (Initialise BNA)” on page 3‐43.

Note: If the lower transport of a GBRU has been racked out, there is a delay before the device comes back online. If the GBRU is not online within 15 seconds, the ‘CASH UNITS ERROR’ is displayed.

If using a GBRU with recycling enabled, CLR BNA is run automatically after a successful CLR CASH. If CLR BNA is unsuccessful, the ‘INITIALISATION FAILURE’ error is displayed.

Select this option to display the zeroed counts in a screen similar to the following:

Note: If recycling is enabled, the following screens will include different counts as shown in “DISP CASH Screen with Recycling” on page 3‐6.

Figure 3-10 CLR CASH Screen




If Enhanced Configuration option 76 is set to 001, the following screen will also be displayed:

Figure 3-11 CLR CASH Screen for Extended Cassettes

A security trace message is printed on the local journal log or written to the EJ. It contains information on the amount of cash dispensed and the amount of cash remaining prior to clearing. See the passage “Security Trace Messages” on page 7‐4 for details.

If a cash handler is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. See Appendix B, “Error Messages” for details.

6 CLR CARDS (Clear Cards Captured Counter) 3

The CLR CARDS option clears the Cards Captured counter to zero and registers the date and time of clearing from the current terminal clock time.

When you select this option, the date and time of clearing are set from the terminal clock and the following zeroed count is displayed:

Figure 3-12 CLR CARDS Screen

Note: On terminals with no depository, the DEPOSITS MADE and LAST CLEARED lines are blank.

A security trace message is printed on the local journal log or written to the EJ containing information on the number of cards




captured prior to clearing. For details, see “Security Trace Messages” on page 7‐4.

7 CLR DEPOS (Clear Deposits Counter) 3

The CLR DEPOS option clears the deposits counter to zero and sets the date and time of clearing to the current terminal clock time.

If an envelope depository or a cheque processor is present, select this option to clear the deposits counter to zero. The date and time of clearing are set from the terminal clock.

Note: If you just wish to selectively clear bins 1, 2 or 3, rather than the total deposits count, use the ‘44 ‐ CLR BINS’ option instead.

A security trace message is printed on the local journal log or written to the EJ. It contains information on the number of deposits made prior to clearing. See the passage “Security Trace Messages” on page 7‐4 for details.

If the ImageMark Passport ATM Image Agent is enabled for the Supervisor options, an XML file is also produced to help in reconciling the physical cheques at the processing centre.

If a Depository or cheque processor is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. For details see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

8 ADD CASH (Add to Cash Counters) 3

The ADD CASH option lets you manage the cash balance in the terminal. Use this option to specify the number of notes newly added to cassettes and update the cash totals.

Depending on the setting of Enhanced Configuration option 76, there can be four or seven different cassette types. The value entered is added to the CASSETTE, REMAINING and TOTAL counters for that cassette type.

Each cassette type must only contain one note type, but more than one physical cassette can be mapped to a single cassette type. Example cassette mappings are provided in “Example Mappings” on page 3‐19.

Note: For recycle cassettes, if it is possible that multiple note types could be included, the cassette should be empty at Start of Day and Add Cash should not be performed.

Note: To allow mapping on other vendors’ SSTs, it may be necessary to change ANDC and/or SP settings. For details, refer to “47 EXTENDED ADD CASH” on page 4‐72.




To use this option, complete the following steps:

1 Press ‘8’ and Enter.

You are prompted to perform the replenishment and press the Enter key to continue.

The SELECT FUNCTION prompt is replaced with ENTER CASSETTE TYPE-.

If dual cash handlers are used, counters can be set as combined or separated. If combined counters are used, enter the total count for both cash handlers. If separated counters are used, enter the count for each cash handler individually, the prompt changes to CDMx ENTER CASSETTE TYPE-, where x identifies the cash handler as follows:

— 1 the primary cash handler

— 2 the secondary cash handler

When entering separate counts, enter the counts for the primary cash handler first. When finished, press Cancel to enter counters for the secondary cash handler. Press Cancel twice to cancel the operation.

2 Enter one digit in the range 1‐4 or 1‐7, depending on the setting of Enhanced Configuration option 76, and press Enter. If you enter an invalid value or the cassette count is negative, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed and the prompt ENTER CASSETTE TYPE reappears.

The prompt ENT NO. OF NOTES- appears.

3 Enter up to five digits, within the range 0‐65534, and press Enter. If using dual cash handlers with separated counts, the combined total must not exceed 65534. If you enter a value outside this range, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed.

Note: If using a GBRU, up to 9999 notes can be entered.

The DISP CASH screen is displayed along with the ENTER CASSETTE TYPE- prompt.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have entered all the data.

5 Press Cancel to return to the main menu.




When you press the Cancel key, a security trace message is printed on the local journal log or written to the EJ containing information on the amount of cash added. The following message is displayed:

FUNCTION EXITED

For more details, see “Security Trace Messages” on page 7‐4.

After counters entry is completed, one of the following is printed to journal:

— If extended cassette types are not supported:

If using dual cash handlers with separated counters, the note counts are displayed as follows:

Where XXXXXX gives the count for the primary cash handler and YYYYYY gives the count for the secondary cash handler.

— If extended cassette types are supported:

If using dual cash handlers with separated counters, the note counts are displayed as follows:

Where XXXXX gives the count for the primary cash handler and YYYYY gives the count for the secondary cash handler.

If you press the Enter key without entering data, no update occurs.

If you use ADD CASH to keep track of notes, you must select this option every time notes are added, before performing a device self test (using the APTRA Self‐Service Support System Application) or going in‐service.

CASH ADDED

TYPE 1 = % TYPE 2 = %

TYPE 3 = % TYPE 4 = %




The correct sequence for adding cash is as follows:

1 Use CLEAR CASH to clear the Currency counters to zero.

2 Use ADD CASH to specify the number of notes added to each cassette.

3 Use TEST CASH to check the operation of the cash handler.

If you perform step 3 before step 2, the counts will be blank. This indicates that a cassette has dispensed more notes than it was set to contain, such that the note count has become negative.

If using a GBRU, and a cash‐in error has occurred, the ‘CASH IN ERROR’ is displayed. You must clear the device using the INIT BNA option before running ADD CASH. For details of the INIT BNA option, see “54 INIT BNA (Initialise BNA)” on page 3‐43.


If a cash handler is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed.

For details of any errors, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

Cassette Mapping 3

The following scenarios provide some example cassette mappings.

Table 3-4 Example Mappings

Scenario Physical Cassette Cassette Type Note Type

Single cash handler Top 1 10 GBP

Four physical cassettes Second 2 20 GBP

Four cassette types Third 3 50 GBP

Bottom 4 100 GBP




Dual cash handler CH1 Top 1 10 GBP

Eight physical cassettes CH1 Second 3 50 GBP

Four cassette types CH1 Third 2 20 GBP

(this example mapping is illustrated in Figure 3‐13 on page 3‐21)

CH1 Bottom 2 20 GBP

CH2 Top 2 20 GBP

CH2 Second 3 50 GBP

CH2 Third 4 100 GBP

CH2 Bottom 4 100 GBP

Dual cash handler CH1 Top 1 10 GBP

Eight physical cassettes CH1 Second 2 20 GBP

Seven cassette types CH1 Third 3 50 GBP

CH1 Bottom 4 100 GBP

CH2 Top 5 10 Eur

CH2 Second 6 20 Eur

CH2 Third 7 50 Eur

CH2 Bottom 7 50 Eur

Scenario Physical Cassette Cassette Type Note Type




Figure 3-13 Cassette Mapping

9 INIT RECPT (Initialise Receipt) 3

The INIT RECPT option prints a test receipt as defined in the resrvd.def file, ejects it, and retracts it after 5 seconds if the hardware is capable and it has not been taken. If a receipt is already present in the transport, it is not retracted but it is pushed out by the test receipt.

Depending on the printer capabilities, the test receipt is printed in one of the following ways:

● Twice on the front

● Once on the front and again on the rear.

Select this option at the following times:

● Whenever a roll of paper has been fitted, to position it correctly for the first transaction

● After a receipt printer malfunction to return the device to service.

On successful initialisation, the following message is displayed:

PRINTER INITIALISED

If a receipt printer is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. If the printer fails to initialise successfully, the error message ‘INITIALISATION FAILURE’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

Physical Cassette 1

Physical Cassette 2

Physical Cassette 3

Physical Cassette 4

Physical Cassette 5

Physical Cassette 6

Physical Cassette 7

NDC CassetteType 1 (GBP 10)




XFS LogicalType 1 (GBP 20)




Physical Cassette 8




10 TEST CASH 3

The TEST CASH option tests the terminal’s ability to pick and deliver notes from each cassette. Selecting this option performs the following:

● Clears the state of the cash handler

● Tests the terminal’s capability to pick notes from each cash cassette

● Performs an exit shutter test

● Clears any outstanding faults caused by the currency dispenser purge bin. The purge bin tally count is reset to zero.

TEST CASH must be used to clear a fault on a GBRU following a cash‐out transaction. For more information, see “Error Recovery” on page 7‐23.

If using a GBRU, and a cash‐in error has occurred, the ‘CASH IN ERROR’ is displayed. You must clear the device using the INIT BNA option before running TEST CASH. For details of the INIT BNA option, see “54 INIT BNA (Initialise BNA)” on page 3‐43.


Select this option after a replenishment or any cash handler malfunction, so that previously faulty cassettes can be returned to service. A single note is moved from each cassette to the reject bin when TEST CASH is selected.

If you select this option, the header:

*CASH TEST*

is displayed.

If dual cash handlers are present, both modules will be tested and a second identifying header appended as follows:

MODULE = 1

MODULE = 2

is displayed.

Each header is followed by one or more of the following messages:

TOP CASSETTE GOODSECOND CASSETTE GOODTHIRD CASSETTE GOODBOTTOM CASSETTE GOOD




These messages define cassette positions rather than cassette types. If no cassettes are operational the following message is displayed:

NO GOOD CASSETTES

If an exit shutter/presenter fault is found, the cassettes are not checked and the following message is displayed:

DISPENSER FAULT

If a cash handler is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

12 STD CASH (Standard Cash) 3

The STD CASH option performs a set sequence of functions. Select this option to carry out the following functions in sequence:

If using a GBRU, and a cash‐in error has occurred, the ‘CASH IN ERROR’ is displayed. You must clear the device using the INIT BNA option before running STD CASH. For details of the INIT BNA option, see “54 INIT BNA (Initialise BNA)” on page 3‐43.

Note: If the lower transport of a GBRU has been racked out, there is a delay before the device comes back online. If the GBRU is not online within 15 seconds, the CASH UNITS ERROR is displayed.

If using a GBRU with recycling enabled, CLR BNA is run automatically before the counts are cleared. If CLR BNA is unsuccessful, the ‘INITIALISATION FAILURE’ error is displayed.

You can specify the number of notes for each cassette type by selecting the SET CASH option in the Configure menu. This makes it a convenient method of clearing, adding and testing cash when the cash added is always a fixed amount. See Chapter 4, “Configure Menu” for details. If you have not entered these values, no notes are added.

The displays associated with CLEAR CASH and ADD CASH are not given. The TEST CASH report is displayed, after the terminal’s ability to pick and deliver notes from each cassette has been tested.


PRNT CNTRSCLEAR BNA (if recycling is enabled)CLEAR CASHADD CASHTEST CASH




13 INIT STMNT (Initialise Statement) 3

The INIT STMNT option clears the fitness and initialises the statement printer. Select this option at the following times:

● Whenever a stack of paper has been loaded, to position it correctly for the first transaction

● After a statement printer malfunction to return the device to service.

When you select this option, a test statement is printed and the following acknowledgement message is displayed:

PRINTER INITIALISED

Depending on the printer capabilities, the test statement is printed in one of the following ways:

● Twice on the front

● Once on the front and again on the rear.

If this option is selected when a statement printer is not installed, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

15 SPVR TRANS (Supervisor Transactions) 3

The SPVR TRANS option allows you to perform cash settlement in the SST using the operator keyboard and without a Supervisor card.

The operator interface is enabled on the next entry to In‐Service mode before enabling the cardholder interface. This allows the operator to perform one or more predefined supervisor/settlement transactions.

When you select this option, Advance NDC checks for valid supervisor/settlement transaction data as follows:

● If several screens between C10 and C19 are present and valid, the operator is prompted to select the settlement screen to use

● If one screen between C10 and C19 is defined, that settlement screen is used

● If no screen between C10 and C19 is defined, settlement screen C09 is used.

If valid supervisor/ settlement transaction data is available, the message ‘FUNCTION DONE’ is displayed. If not, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed.




Prompts Displayed During Supervisor Settlement 3

During settlement, you will see at least one of the following prompts displayed on the operator interface.

The prompts given here are the default. The prompts may be customised on your system. If more than one function is required, the prompts will be displayed in the order shown:

1 PIN-

2 FUNC-

3 CASH-

4 ENTER BUFFER B-

5 ENTER BUFFER C-

Note: If you use DAPI‐7 and the settlement transaction requires PIN entry, PIN entry must be done through the cardholder keyboard. This is because the DAPI‐7 security level does not permit PIN entry on the rear keyboard.

PIN‐ 3The prompt PIN‐ is displayed.

1 Enter PIN data. Any numbers you enter will not be echoed on the operator display.

2 Press the Enter key.

Note: Only Remote PIN verification may be used. Local PIN checking is limited to the maximum number of PIN digits that can be entered, as defined by the matching FIT.

FUNC‐ 3The prompt FUNC- is displayed.

1 Enter a transaction number within the predefined list for the transaction required, and within the range 0‐9 inclusive.

2 Press Enter.

Depending on which number you enter, a prompt for Amount Entry, BUFFER B or BUFFER C is displayed, or the terminal goes in‐service.

CASH‐ 3The prompt CASH- is displayed.

1 Enter a cash amount. The maximum number of digits you can enter for this field is eight or twelve, depending on which was defined in the Configuration Parameters. For details, see the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual.




2 The amount is automatically accepted.

BUFFER B‐ 3The prompt Enter BUFFER B- is displayed.

1 Enter data for BUFFER B. The maximum number of digits you can enter is 32.

2 The data is automatically accepted.

BUFFER C‐ 3The prompt Enter BUFFER C- is displayed.

1 Enter data for BUFFER C. The maximum number of digits you can enter is 32.

2 The data is automatically accepted.

PLEASE WAIT 3The PLEASE WAIT screen is displayed during processing.

Completion Of Data Entry 3

Once you have entered the information, the FUNC- prompt is redisplayed.

CNL Key 3If you select the Cancel key at any stage of information entry (except at the FUNC- or PIN- prompt), the FUNC- prompt is redisplayed, allowing you to re‐enter data for that transaction. If you select the Cancel key at the FUNC- or PIN- prompt, the terminal will go In‐Service, unless the Supervisor mode switch is on, in which case the SEL- or REP- prompt is redisplayed. For further details see “15 SPVR TRANS (Supervisor Transactions)” on page 3‐24.

Note: If you do not respond to the FUNC- or PIN- prompt within three minutes, the settlement session is terminated.

CLR Key 3If you press the Clear key at any time while entering information, the display is cleared of any values you have entered. This enables you to re‐enter values for that particular field. Pressing the Clear key at the FUNC- prompt has no effect.

If you select a function and then press the Clear key, you are returned to the previous prompt. For example, if you select 1 from the FUNC- prompt, the CASH- prompt is displayed. If you then press the Clear key, you are returned to the FUNC- prompt.

Transaction Request Message 3

The Transaction Request message is created using the specified Transaction Request state, file and data entered, and sent to Central. See the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual for details.




If Central does not respond within the time‐out period, the Time‐Out next state from the Transaction Request state is used to compare against the next state table. The appropriate action is then taken.

Only Print Immediate and Next State and Print commands are acceptable. Any other commands are acted on as a Next State and Print command.

All printing associated with the receipt and journal is performed, and a status message sent. A Print Immediate with no next state will wait for a further command.

For any other command, the prompt for the next transaction will be displayed.

Leaving Supervisor Mode 3

You must exit from Supervisor mode and return the terminal to In‐Service mode before any transactions can be performed. When you exit Supervisor mode, the Cash Handler transport is cleared.

If no key is pressed at the Settlement prompt on exit from Supervisor mode, the prompt will time out after 180 seconds (three minutes).

Front‐replenishing terminals will automatically return to Normal mode when the facia is closed if the Access Menu option for auto‐exit and the Supply mode option in the Configuration Load are set. See Chapter 5, “Exit Mode” section, and the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual respectively for details.

18 DISP COINS (Display Coins) 3

The DISP COINS option displays counts for the coins remaining and coins dispensed for each of the hopper types in the coin dispenser. A coin is regarded as dispensed if it leaves the hopper. However, the cardholder might not receive it due, for example, to a jam.

Note: The coin dispenser empty threshold is set using the system application or registry settings at service provider level. These should never be set to zero, or jamming may occur.




When selected, the following screen is displayed:

Figure 3-14 DISP COINS Screen

This screen displays the information for four hopper types, if Enhanced Configuration option 79 is set to 001, the following prompt is also displayed:

PRESS <ENT> FOR MORE

Selecting Enter displays a second screen containing information on the additional hopper types.

Figure 3-15 Second DISP COINS Screen

The coin counts are displayed for the same number of hopper types that are reported through the Hardware Configuration message.

For each hopper type, the information provided is described in Table 3‐5.




Table 3-5 DISP COINS Screen Description

If a coin dispenser is not present, the ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ message is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”

19 CLR COINS (Clear Coins) 3

The CLR COINS option resets all the coin dispenser counters to zero (0) and records the local date and time of clearing.

A security trace message is journalled. The message contains information on the coins dispensed and remaining before clearing.

Once complete, the following acknowledgement screen is displayed:

COIN COUNTS CLEARED

If a coin dispenser is not present, the ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ message is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”

20 ADD COINS 3

The ADD COINS option lets you specify the number of coins added to each of the coin hopper types at replenishment time. The acceptable denominations are determined by your hardware.

NCR recommends that counters are initialised using CLR COINS before using ADD COINS. For information on initialising the counter, see “19 CLR COINS (Clear Coins)” on page 3‐29.

Display Description Notes

REMAINING The total number of coins remaining in the hopper type

DISPENSED The total number of coins dispensed from the hopper type

TOTAL The total number of coins originally in the hopper type, as defined by the 20 ADD COINS option

The TOTAL count is the sum of the REMAINING and DISPENSED counts

LAST CLEARED The last date and time that the coin dispenser counters were cleared

The date may appear in either of the formats MM/DD/YY or DD/MM/YY. The date format is set by means of an Enhanced Configuration Parameters Load message






The PLEASE WAIT prompt is replaced with ENTER COIN HOPPER TYPE, and the existing counts for hopper types 1 to 4 are displayed.

2 Enter one digit in the range 1 to 4 or 1 to 8, depending on the setting of Option 79 and press Enter.

You might see the following error messages:

NOT ENOUGH DIGITS, for details see “E0019 ‐ NOT ENOUGH DIGITS” on page B‐8

The ENTER No. OF COINS prompt is displayed. If the selected hopper type is between 5 and 8, the counts for hopper types 5 to 8 are also displayed.

3 Enter up to five digits, within the range 0 to 65534, and press Enter. Ensure you enter the same number of coins as you have added to the hopper.

You might see the following error messages:

COINS EXCEED LIMIT OF 65534, for details, see “E0026 ‐ COINS EXCEED LIMIT OF 65534” on page B‐9.



When you press Cancel a security trace message is journalled. The message contains information on the added coin counts. The following message is displayed:

FUNCTION EXITED

If no counts have been added when Cancel is selected, the FUNCTION CANCELLED message is displayed.

If a coin dispenser is not present, the ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ error message is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “E0022 ‐ DEVICE NOT PRESENT”.




21 STD COINS (Standard Coins) 3

The STD COINS option performs a set sequence of functions.Select this option to carry out the following functions in sequence:

The STD COINS option provides a convenient method of clearing and adding coin counts. When using STD COINS the following apply:

● PRNT CNTRS only includes the coin counts

● CLR COINS screens are not displayed

● ADD COINS screens are not displayed

ADD COINS is always a standard amount, as specified in the SET COINS option. For details see “14 SET COINS” on page 4‐17.

If a coin dispenser is not present, the ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ message is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “E0022 ‐ DEVICE NOT PRESENT”.

40 INIT EJRNL (Initialise Electronic Journal) 3

The INIT EJRNL option copies the EJ data from a log file on the terminal’s hard disk to the EJ folder on the hard disk and to the destination drive. The time, date and method of initialisation, and a checksum value is appended to the data.

If configured for multiple destinations, an extra prompt is displayed allowing the choice of network and removable destination drives (such as Compact Disc (CD), diskette or Universal Serial Bus (USB) drives) for the EJ backup file. The destination need not be blank, but must have enough space for the EJ file.

EJ Options 3

For details of all EJ configuration options, see “34 EJ OPTIONS” on page 4‐21. You can use the following EJ options with INIT EJRNL:

● EJ backup mode. This can be standard or multiple

● Compression

Note: If the log file is to be compressed, the initialisation takes a few seconds longer. The PLEASE WAIT screen is displayed during compression.

● Privacy. If privacy is enabled, the log file is password protected and compressed.

PRNT CNTRSCLR COINSADD COINSCHECK COIN




Whether standard or multiple EJ backup is used, the log file is copied to the destination drive and a backup file on the hard disk. If using a diskette, it must be a 1.44 MB diskette with at least 1.4 MB free space. The EJ data is also copied to a backup file named ejrcpy.log on the hard disk.

Note: If the EJ log file size is greater than 1.4 MB, the file will not fit on a diskette. If you have set a larger EJ log file size, ensure that multiple destinations are configured. For details, see “34 EJ OPTIONS” on page 4‐21.

Whether standard or multiple EJ backup is used, the EJ data is copied to a file named ‘ejnnnnnn.xxx’ on the destination drive. The ‘nnnnnn’ is the six‐digit machine number of the terminal. If the machine number is not present, then space characters will be indicated with an underscore (‘_’) in the filename.

The ‘xxx’ is a number that cycles from ‘000’ to ‘999’. It gives the sequence number of the file and is incremented each time a successful INIT EJRNL command is processed. This number is automatically saved to persistent storage, and hence is used on power failure recovery. The number can be reset to ‘000’ by deleting the pmdata file.

Note: Advance NDC can be configured to allow alternative EJ backup filenames using the EJFileDateFormat and EJShortFilename registry entries. For further information, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Developer’s Guide.

If you are copying large files, there may be a few minutes delay while the data is being copied.

All journalling is stopped while copying is in progress; activity is not logged or recovered when journalling restarts. On successful completion, the device status is cleared, a security trace message and a checksum are written at the beginning of the new file and logging restarts.

The following acknowledgement message is displayed on successful completion:

EJ LOG COPIED OK

This message is also logged to the next EJ log file.

If INIT EJRNL is selected while an automatic initialisation is in progress, the following message is displayed:

INVALID-AUTO EJ INIT IN PROGRESS

For details of the automatic initialisation options, see “4 AUTO INIT EJ OPTIONS” on page 4‐24.




If the destination drive, is write‐protected, not installed, or has insufficient space, or the EJ backup file is invalid, or any I/O error has occurred, one of the following error messages is displayed:

● INSUFFICIENT HARD DISK● COPY TO DRIVE FAILED● EJ BACKUP INVALID

Note: If the INSUFFICIENT HARD DISK message is displayed, you must reduce the maximum number of backups. For details, see “2 MAX NO OF BACKUPS” on page 4‐22. If you need to do an initialisation, see “51 DIRECT EJ BACKUP” on page 3‐42.

After a restart of the SST, a power failure during copying will be treated as a command failure and the INIT EJRNL command will have to be repeated. If the EJ is not fatal, the command will have terminated before the power failure.

If the EJ is not active, this command is rejected and the error message ‘EJ NOT PRESENT’ is displayed.

If the command is successful, the EJ data in ejdata.log is initialised similar to the EJ being activated.

The INIT EJRNL function must not be performed during EJ upload. As the EJ upload function clears the ejdata.log file of journal data, uploaded data will not be available to copy to diskette or back up. Similarly, data copied by an INIT EJRNL command will not be available for upload to the host.

If the INIT EJRNL option is selected when EJ upload has been previously initiated by the host (although EJ upload may not be active at the time), the following message is displayed:

EJ UPLOAD MAY BE IN PROGRESS. PRESS 1- CONTINUE 0-CANCEL

Pressing 1 could compromise the integrity of the EJ upload.

Note: If using EJ upload, INIT EJRNL must not be used.

Standard EJ Backup 3

In standard EJ backup there is a single log file, called ejrcpy.log.

The first time the INIT EJRNL command is run successfully, the backup file is created in the c:\program files\advance ndc\data directory. The backup file is overwritten with a copy of the latest log file each time the INIT EJRNL command completes successfully.




Multiple EJ Backup 3

In Multiple EJ backup, up to 1000 backup files can be retained, depending on the available disk space.

When INIT EJRNL command completes successfully the log file, ejrcpy.log is created.

The backup file is created on the selected media, and in the c:\program files\advance ndc\data\EJBackups directory.

If the maximum number of EJ backups is exceeded by the creation of the new file, the earliest file is deleted. For example, if the maximum number of EJ backups is set to 10, and files ejnnnnnn.000 to ejnnnnnn.009 exist, the new file will be named ejnnnnnn.010 and ejnnnnnn.000 will be deleted.

EJDATA.LOG File 3

Whether standard or multiple EJ backup is used, while electronic journalling is enabled journal data is automatically written to the ejdata.log file (EJ file) on the fixed disk. By default, the file size is 1.4 MB, however this can be changed. For details on setting the file size, see “6 MAX FILE SIZE” on page 4‐30. Once the maximum file size is reached, the EJ enters a fatal state and no more journal data can be written.

Any data generated while the EJ file is full will be lost. Once the copying process has been completed successfully, the EJ status is restored and logging resumes with a newly initialised ejdata.log file.

Warning Do not attempt to edit the ejdata.log file on the fixed disk, or manually install the ejdata.log file.

Recovering from a Power Failure 3

Once configured, the EJ will recover automatically from a power failure, unless the log was full at the time of failure.

If a power failure occurs during an initialisation operation, you must remove any diskette before the machine attempts to boot from diskette.

The EJ may have written to the diskette before the internal disk number has been incremented. This can be checked by inserting another diskette into the drive and re‐issuing the INIT EJRNL command. If no unique numbers have occurred be aware that you have two different log files with the same number.

For more general background information including details on viewing the ejnnnnnn.xxx file on a PC, see “Local Electronic Journal




Log” on page 7‐14. For details of activating the EJ, see “30 SET JRNL (Set Electronic Journal)” on page 4‐18.

Note: If your terminal has been running EJ using NDC+ and Advance NDC is to be installed, NCR recommends that you first purge the EJ log file using the INIT EJRNL option.

41 FILL ENV (Fill Envelope) 3

This option causes the terminal to present and retract an envelope and clears the device status associated with the envelope dispenser.

Note: The envelope presenter and the envelope depositor are both initialised.

Select this option to clear the device status after replenishing the envelope hopper or before returning the Terminal to In‐Service mode. The device fitness is cleared and an envelope is presented and retracted. For information on Device Status, see Chapter 7, “Error and Exception Reporting and Recovery”.

The following acknowledgement message is displayed on successful completion:

FUNCTION DONE

If the envelope is taken before it can be retracted, the following acknowledgement message is displayed:

ENVELOPE TAKEN

If the device is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. If the device fails to initialise properly, the error message ‘INITIALISATION FAILURE’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

42 SECURITY CAMERA 3

This option allows you to display the following replenishment options for the camera:

Figure 3-16 Security Camera Screen SECURITY CAMERA

1 TEST CAMERA

3 DELETE SNAPSHOTS

SELECT FUNCTION -

2 COPY SNAPSHOTS




To use one of the options on the SECURITY CAMERA menu, select the appropriate number.

If the device is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

1 TEST CAMERA 3

Use this option to clear the fitness of the camera. This option takes a single picture.

If you are working on the front interface and the clearing is successful, a sample picture from the first camera position is displayed followed by the message “CAMERA INITIALISED’.

If any camera fails to initialise successfully, the error message ‘INITIALISATION FAILURE’ is displayed.

2 COPY SNAPSHOTS 3

Use this option to copy image files from the local hard drive to removable media.

If no images are available when this option is selected, the error message ‘NO VALID DATA PRESENT’ is displayed.

If images are available when this option is selected, the following screen is displayed. Enter the start and end dates for the image files you want to copy.

Figure 3-17 Copy Snapshots Screen

After a valid date range is entered, a list of available destinations is displayed. Select the number representing the destination to use. If successful, the message ‘CAMERA SNAPSHOTS COPIED OK’ is displayed and the copy operation is journalled. If unsuccessful, the error message ‘COPY TO DRIVE FAILED’ is displayed.

If no usable destination is available, the error message ‘NO DRIVES AVAILABLE’ is displayed.




3 DELETE SNAPSHOTS 3

Use this option to delete picture files from the hard drive. When selected, the following message is displayed:

BACKUP FILES WILL BE DELETED

PRESS 1 TO DELETE, 0 TO RETAIN

Select 1 to delete all image files in the camera directory. The deletion of the files is journalled.

43 INIT DEPOS (Initialise Depository) 3

The INIT DEPOS option initialises the cheque processor and the envelope depository.

Note: Advance NDC supports only one cheque processor or envelope depository on the same SST.

Faults can also be cleared using the System Application. For details of using the System Application, refer to the APTRA Self‐Service Support, System Application User Guide.

Note: It is not necessary to use this option to initialise the cheque processor as this is done automatically when you exit Supervisor Mode.

Select this option to clear the device fitness after emptying the contents of the depository bin or before returning the Terminal to In Service mode.

If you select this option and the depository is present, the following acknowledgement message is displayed:

DEPOSIT INITIALISED

If a cheque processor is present, the following acknowledgement message is displayed:

CHEQUE PROCESSOR INITIALISED

A security trace message is also printed on the local journal log, or written to the Electronic Journal.

If the envelope depository is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. If the device fails to initialise properly, the error message ‘INITIALISATION FAILURE’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.




44 CLR BINS (Clear Bins) 3

The CLR BINS option resets one or more of the cheque processor or envelope depository pocket counters, if present.

The counts are displayed for pockets 1, 2 and 3. Select 0 to clear all the pockets, or 1, 2 or 3 to clear just the required pocket. The date and time of the last pocket clear is recorded.

Figure 3-18 Clear Bins Screen

A security trace message is also printed on the local journal log, or written to the electronic journal.

If the ImageMark Passport ATM Image Agent is enabled for Supervisor options, an XML file is also produced to help in synchronising the physical cheques at the processing centre. On a CPM, the XML file is created for each cleared bin. On a bunch cheque acceptor, an XML file is only created when the first bin with a non‐zero count is cleared.

If the selected pocket is not present, the error message ‘BIN NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. If the cheque processor is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

45 CHECK COIN 3

The CHECK COIN option displays and clears the device status for each of the coin hoppers. Select this option at the following times:

● You want to check the status of the coin dispenser

● The coin dispenser has been replenished without running the STD COINS option. See “21 STD COINS (Standard Coins)” on page 3‐31.

The screen provides information on the state of each of the hopper types, using one of the following messages:

● COIN HOPPER TYPE x GOOD● COIN HOPPER TYPE x JAM● COIN HOPPER TYPE x MISSING● COIN HOPPER TYPE x LOW




● COIN HOPPER TYPE x OUT

x is a number between 1 and 8 identifying the hopper type.

Information is also given for the transport chute using one of the following messages:

● TRANSPORT CHUTE GOOD● TRANSPORT CHUTE JAMMED

If the coin hopper low thresholds have not been set for the coin dispenser the ‘COIN THRESHOLD NOT SET’ message is displayed.

If the coin dispenser is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. For details, see “E0022 ‐ DEVICE NOT PRESENT” on page B‐8.

47 DUMP IMAGES (Dump DPM Images) 3

In NDC+, this option allowed you to copy the archived images produced by the DPM to diskette for external analysis.

In Advance NDC, this option is not supported because the DPM is not supported. If you select this option, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

48 DSP BNA RCNL (Display BNA Reconciliation List) 3

The DSP BNA RCNL option displays a screen, or series of screens, listing inserted notes. The screens provide a list of each denomination count for the following non‐zero totals:

● Deposited notes

● Retracted notes

● Retained notes.

Note: The retained notes count includes notes identified as counterfeit under ECB 6 regulations. If notes identified as suspect are to be retained, the retained notes count also includes the number of suspect notes. For details of configuring whether to retain suspect notes, refer to Chapter 5 of the APTRA Advance NDC, Developer’s Guide.

The last screen contains the totals for all notes. The totals screen includes all counts, including zero counts.

Only denominations that are active in the GBNA.ini configuration file are included in the list. For details of the GBNA.ini configuration file, see “82 GBNA.INI CONFIG” on page 4‐81.

If multiple currencies are supported, a report is produced for each currency.

If the BNA counts have been cleared, this report is not available, and the message ‘RCNL LIST EMPTY - CNTRS CLEARED’ is displayed.




49 PRN BNA RCNL (Print BNA Reconciliation List) 3

The DSP BNA RCNL option is the same as the DSP BNA RCNL option, but with a security trace time and date stamp at the start of the report.



50 RCOPY EJRNL (Recopy Electronic Journal) 3

The RCOPY EJRNL option copies a backup electronic journal file to ejnnnnnn.xxx. This option allows you to create second or multiple copies of the electronic journal file. This can be done in either of the following situations:

● As a routine action; for example, when an INIT EJRNL is executed, an RCOPY EJRNL is executed

● In the event that the media with the most recent journal log file becomes damaged after it leaves the SST.

If configured for multiple destinations, an extra prompt is displayed allowing the choice of network or removable destination drives (such as CDRW, diskette or USB drives) for the EJ backup file. For details of the backup types, see “34 EJ OPTIONS” on page 4‐21.

This command fails if the electronic journal is not active or the file cannot be copied to destination drive. This results in one of the following error messages being displayed:

● EJ NOT PRESENT● COPY TO DRIVE FAILED● INSUFFICIENT HARD DISK SPACE

For details of error messages, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

If the command is successful, a security trace message T83 - EJ LOG RECOPIED OK is logged in the electronic journal, and the following acknowledgement message is displayed:

EJ LOG RECOPIED OK

If the command is not successful, the security trace message T84 - RCOPY LOG FAIL is logged, and one of the above error messages is displayed.

During the command, logging to the electronic journal continues.

Note that if journal data is uploaded to the host by an EJ Upload message, that data is erased from the ejdata.log file, and so is not available to the INIT EJRNL command. Therefore there will be no




journal data backup on the terminal. It is the host’s responsibility to maintain a backup of the uploaded data.

Using Standard EJ Backups 3

The file copied to diskette, or selected network or removable destination drive (such as CDRW, Flex or USB drives), is the backup file ejrcpy.log created during a previous INIT EJRNL command.

Using Multiple EJ Backups 3

The file copied to diskette, or selected network or removable destination drive (such as CDRW, Flex or USB drives), is one of the ejnnnnnn.xxx files, created during a previous INIT EJRNL command.

Note: If changing the machine number of the terminal, any existing EJ backup files remain on the hard disk but cannot be accessed using RCOPY. If you switch to Standard EJ backups before changing the machine number, these files will be removed from the hard disk.

To use multiple EJ backups, complete the following steps:

1 Press 50 and Enter.

The following screen is displayed.

2 Select the option as follows:— DISPLAY EJ FILES

Displays the ten most recent EJ backup files in chronological order starting with the most recent. You can either select a file from the list, or search for an earlier file using the search by extension option. Press Enter to search for a file by extension.

— SEARCH EJ BY DATE (MM/DD/YY)




Prompts for a date in the format MM/DD/YY. Displays the file with the specified date followed by up to ten further files in chronological order. Select the file from the list.

Note: If more than 10 files exist for the specified date, only 10 files are listed. To search for a file that is not included in the list, use the search by extension option.

— SEARCH EJ BY EXTENSION

Prompts for the extension number. Displays the file with the specified extension number followed by up to ten further files in chronological order. Select the file from the list.

3 If a list of available destinations is displayed, select the destination for the file.

51 DIRECT EJ BACKUP 3

Use this option when INIT EJRL has failed due to disk space issues.

DIRECT EJ BACKUP copies the current ejdata.log file to diskette or selected removable media. No initialisation occurs and the original ejdata.log file is unaffected. For more information on initialisation, see “40 INIT EJRNL (Initialise Electronic Journal)” on page 3‐31.

If compression is enabled, the file is compressed. If privacy is enabled, the file is compressed and password protected. If the EJ file is compressed, the copy may take a couple of seconds longer than usual. For details of the EJ configuration options, see “34 EJ OPTIONS” on page 4‐21.

After successful completion, the trace message ‘DIRECT EJ INIT PERFORMED’ is journalled.

53 CLR BNA (Clear BNA) 3

If the BNA is present, the CLR BNA option clears the counters used to track note movement within the BNA device. The command also clears all deposit counters, and the fitness of the cash bin associated with the BNA.

The ‘PLEASE WAIT’ screen is displayed during processing.

Once the BNA is successfully cleared, a screen with the following format is displayed showing the cleared BNA counts.

If using a GBRU with recycling enabled, CLR CASH is run automatically after a successful CLR BNA. If CLR BNA is unsuccessful, the ‘INITIALISATION FAILURE’ error is displayed.




Figure 3-19 Cleared BNA Counters Screen

A security trace message is printed on the local journal log or written to the EJ. It contains information on the counts prior to clearing. See “Security Trace Messages” on page 7‐4 for details.

If the BNA does not have retract functionality or its retract functionality is not enabled, the RETRACTED count is always zero. For details of note movements, see “Note Movements” on page 3‐11. If the BNA is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.


54 INIT BNA (Initialise BNA) 3

If the BNA is present, this option initialises the BNA as follows:

1 If notes have been left at the escrow after a host timeout, the BNA transport is cleared, moving any contents either to the cash‐in cassettes or, if the device is capable of retracting notes, to the retract bin depending on the setting of option 45 in the Enhanced Configuration Parameters Download

2 Resets the device and the BNA fitness. If a jam has occurred on a BNA device, note counts may not be correct as there is no way to determine the location of the notes after the fault. Jammed notes are moved to the retract bin or the cash‐in cassette, or returned to the cardholder as defined in the configuration.

3 Calls Start/End Exchange to ensure that the cassettes are operating

4 Displays the following acknowledgement message:BUNCH NOTE ACCEPTOR INITIALISED

If the BNA is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. See Appendix B, “Error Messages” for details.

BNA CNTRS

LAST CLEARED : MM/DD/YY HH:MM

COUNTENCASHED XXXXXREJECTED XXXXXRETRACTED XXXXXNOTES IN TRANSPORT XXXXXESCRW DEPS XXXXX

<< CLR ENT >>

ESCRW RFND XXXXXTOTAL COUNTERFEIT XXXXX

TOTAL SUSPECT XXXXX




The ‘PLEASE WAIT’ screen is displayed during processing.

The INIT BNA journal entry includes a code to identify the last point in the transaction before initialisation was required. For details, see “BNA Journalling” on page 7‐7. When INIT BNA is selected, note counts are journalled as follows:

● If notes have been successfully moved to the cash‐in cassette or retract bin, the encashed note counts are journalled

● If the initialisation fails, any available escrow note counts are journalled

● If notes are detected following a device error, the note counts are journalled to indicate their position.

If the BNA initialisation fails, the error message ‘INITIALISATION FAILURE’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”. If configured, the out of service screen is displayed.

INIT BNA must be used to clear a fault on a GBRU following a cash‐in transaction. For more information, see “Error Recovery” on page 7‐23.

If using a GBRU, and a cash‐out error has occurred, the ‘CASH OUT ERROR’ is displayed. You must clear the device using the TEST CASH or STD CASH option before running INIT BNA. For details of these options, see “10 TEST CASH” on page 3‐22, and “12 STD CASH (Standard Cash)” on page 3‐23.


55 CREATE SIGS 3

If a BNA with retract capability or GBXX is present, this option creates signatures for notes that are identified as counterfeit under ECB 6. Four signatures are generated for each note, using four orientations.

This option displays a list of available drives. To create signatures for a note, complete the following steps:

1 Select the destination drive for the signatures.

2 A series of screens then prompts for the insertion of the note in the various orientations required.

If a note is inserted in the wrong orientation, the following error message is displayed:

UNKNOWN OR SAME ORIENTATION

PRESS ENTER TO INSERT NOTEOR CANCEL TO EXIT FUNCTION




After the four orientations have been captured, the signatures are stored in the selected destination.

If no note is inserted, a timeout occurs after one minute.

The signatures are stored in a folder hierarchy, as follows:

● The top‐level folder is named ECBNNNNNN, where NNNNNN is the machine number.

● Each signature, containing all four orientations, is stored in a separate sub‐folder named NoteMMM, where MMM is the next available note index.

● The filename for the signature is syyyymddhhnnssZZ.sig, where yyyymmddhhnnss is the date and time that the file was created and ZZ identifies the orientation as follows:

— FT front top

— FB front bottom

— BT back top

— BB back bottom

For example, the file s20050906102749FT.sig was created at 49 seconds past 10:27 on 6th September 2005 and contains the front top orientation.

56 EXTRACT SIGS 3

If a BNA or GBXX is present, this option writes a range of records from the ECB 6 transaction log to the hard drive.

This option displays prompts allowing you to specify the start and end dates for the period to extract from the ECB 6 log. Both dates are entered in MMDDYY format.

The records are extracted from the ECB 6 log and written to a file called ECB6Ext.cab on the hard disk.

Note: Now run option 57 to copy the log extract to removable media. If you run option 56 again before running option 57, the ECB6Ext.cab file will be overwritten.

57 WRITE SIGS 3

If a BNA or GBXX is present, this option copies the ECB6Ext.cab file from hard disk to a selected destination.

This option displays a list of available drives. Select the destination drive for the copied file.

The file is copied as to a folder named ECBNNNNNN, where NNNNNN is the machine number. If no machine number has been set, a default of 000000 is used.




One of the following error messages is displayed if the copy fails:

● NO DISK IN DRIVE● DISK I/O ERROR● FLOPPY PROTECTED

● FILE ON FLOPPY.

See Appendix B, “Error Messages” for details.

58 DSP BNA CNTS (Display BNA Counts) 3

If a BNA or GBXX is present, this option displays the counts for the physical cassettes within the device.

Note: Counts can only be provided for physical cassettes when a one‐to‐one mapping exists between physical and logical cassette types.

A series of screens displays the following information:

● Denomination counts for cassette type 1 and, if present, cassette type 2. If the device is a GBXX, denomination counts for cassette type 3 and cassette type 4

● Denomination counts for the reject and retract bins (if present)

● Denomination counts for the counterfeit bin if ECB 6 is enabled

● Value of each denomination for cassette type 1 and cassette type 2 (if present). If the device is a GBXX, number of notes for cassette type 3 and cassette type 4

● Number of notes for the reject and retract bins (if present)

Note: The retract counts can be incorrect if notes are not recognised during a retract operation. The retract counts do not include any notes retracted during a cash‐out transaction.

● Value of each denomination for the counterfeit bin if ECB 6 is enabled

● Total amount of denomination in the device, excluding notes identified as category 2 under the ECB 6 regulations

● Total amount of currency in the device, excluding notes identified as category 2 under the ECB 6 regulations.

If a hardware error has occurred, note counts may not be correct as there is no way to determine where the notes were left after the fault. In this case, manual reconciliation must be performed. The following are examples of situations that would result in incorrect note counts:

● If notes were being inserted when the error occurred, there is no count of notes that may have reached the escrow or are present in the transport




● If notes were being encashed when the error occurred, there is no indication of how many notes were encashed or how many are still in the escrow or present in the transport.

59 PRN BNA CNTS (Print BNA Counts) 3

The PRN BNA CNTS option is similar to the DSP BNA CNTS option, but the information is printed on the receipt or journal printer. Where applicable, selecting this option causes supplies counters to be written to the EJ (electronic journal).

The following message is displayed after a successful print:

ALL COUNTERS PRINTD

99 MORE 3

The MORE option allows you to switch between the two parts of the Replenish menu. You can select any menu option by number from either screen, regardless of whether it is currently displayed or not.

Table of ContentsConfigure Menu



Chapter 4

Configure Menu

Configure Menu 4‐2

0 DISP CONFIG (Display Configuration) 4‐3

1 PRNT CONFIG (Print Configuration) 4‐6

2 TRACK 1 4‐7

3 ROLL WIDTH 4‐8

4 MACHINE NO (Machine Number) 4‐9

5 DATE/TIME 4‐10

6 MSG MODE (Message Mode) 4‐11

7 DISP SCRN (Display Screens) 4‐12

8 SET PRINT (Set Printer) 4‐13

9 SET CASH 4‐14

10 RST MODE (Restart Mode) 4‐15

11 SET DEFAULT 4‐16

12 TRACE ON 4‐17

13 TRACE OFF 4‐17

14 SET COINS 4‐17

30 SET JRNL (Set Electronic Journal) 4‐18

Error Conditions 4‐19

31 VOLUME SST, 32 VOLUME JACK 4‐20

33 DISBL JRNL (Disable Journal Option) 4‐20

34 EJ OPTIONS 4‐21

0 DISP EJ CONFIG 4‐21

1 EJ BACKUP MODE 4‐21

2 MAX NO OF BACKUPS 4‐22

3 ENABLE MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS 4‐23

4 AUTO INIT EJ OPTIONS 4‐24

5 COMPRESSION 4‐29

6 MAX FILE SIZE 4‐30

7 DSBL HOST CNTRL OF EJ MODE 4‐31

8 EJ PRIVACY OPTIONS 4‐31

35 JOURNAL LEVEL 4‐35

37 TCP/IP CONFIG (TCP/IP Configuration menu) 4‐37

0 RMT ADDRESS (Remote IP Address) 4‐38

1 RMT PORT NO (Remote Port Number) 4‐39

2 LCL ADDRESS (Local IP Address) 4‐40

3 LCL PORT NO (Local Port Number) 4‐40

4 CONFIG AS SRV (Configure As Server) 4‐41

5 ADVANCED (Advanced TCP/IP Settings) 4‐42




6 DISP TCP/IP 4‐43

7 PRNT TCP/IP 4‐43

8 PING 4‐44

9 GATEWAY ADDRESS (Gateway IP Address) 4‐44

10 SUBNET MASK 4‐45

11 DNS ADDRESS (Domain Name Server Address) 4‐45

12 WINS ADDRESS (Windows Internet Name Service Address) 4‐47

13 COMP NAME (Computer Name) 4‐48

14 FIREWALL 4‐48

15 MULTI HOST IP (Multiple Host IP Address) 4‐51

16 NAMED RMT HOST 4‐52

17 XP KEEP ALIVE 4‐52

18 SSL CONFIG 4‐52

38 DIALUP CONFIG (Dialup Configuration menu) 4‐54

Permissible Characters 4‐55

Entering Characters 4‐58

Application Parameters Menu 4‐59

Modem Link Menu 4‐61

Serial Link Menu 4‐63

CCM VISA 2 Menu 4‐64

Network Address Menu 4‐66

Copy Dialup Configuration Menu 4‐66

Diagnostics 4‐67

39 GBRU/GBNA CONFIGURATION 4‐68

44 TROUBLESHOOTING 4‐68

PD Investigation Options 4‐69

Silent Debug Options 4‐70

45 MAX STATEMENT LENGTH 4‐71

46 SELECT COMMS TYPE (Select Communications Type) 4‐72

47 EXTENDED ADD CASH 4‐72

0 Exchange Cash Units 4‐72

1 Configure Cash Units 4‐73

2 Clear Cash 4‐75

3 Add Cash 4‐75

4 Calibrate Cash Units 4‐75

5 Test Cash 4‐77

6 Update Note Types 4‐77

7 Set Reject Threshold 4‐79

80 DISP CSH/ACC CONFIG 4‐80

81 PRNT CSH/ACC CONFIG 4‐80

82 GBNA.INI CONFIG 4‐81

84 POWERUP MSG 4‐82

99 MORE 4‐82

Overview

-1



Configure MenuD

Overview 4

This chapter describes the standard options available in the Configure menu, and how to use them. The options are used for customising the terminal after installation of Advance NDC.

If you are responsible for the initial setting up of the terminal, NCR recommends that you refer to this chapter.

Configure MenuConfigure Menu



Configure Menu 4

When Advance NDC is installed onto an SST, no Supervisor password or access information is present. Therefore, no password request is made when you select the Configure menu for the first time. For security reasons, you must establish a password immediately. This will consist of four numeric digits. For details of how to do this, see Chapter 5, “Access Menu”.

When you select this option on subsequent occasions, the following prompt is displayed:

ENTER PASSWORD -

To enter the password:

1 Enter the current password. Each digit is echoed as an asterisk (‘*’).

2 Press Enter.

The Configure menu is displayed if the password is correct.

You are allowed up to five attempts to enter the password from the facia, or one attempt from the operator interface, before the Select menu is redisplayed.

Once the maximum number of attempts has been used, a security trace message is recorded on the local journal log, either electronically or as hard copy. For details, see “Security Trace Messages” on page 7‐4.




The Configure menus contain the following options:

Figure 4-1 Configure Menus

0 DISP CONFIG (Display Configuration) 4

The DISP CONFIG option displays the terminal’s configuration data. The terminal clock provides a time stamp.



The following screen is displayed. The date may appear in either of the formats MM/DD/YY or DD/MM/YY. The date format is set using the Enhanced Configuration Parameters Load message. The date is shown here in the format MM/DD/YY.

Figure 4-2 DISP CONFIG Screen




Note 1: MESSAGE MODE will always be one and may be followed by a string of up to 16 option digits. See the passage “6 MSG MODE (Message Mode)” on page 4‐11 for details.

Note 2: If standard EJ backup is enabled, the screen displays N/A (not applicable) for NO. BKUPS.

Note 3: The Volume SST and Jack will always be zero as the Digital Audio Service is not supported in Advance NDC.

2 Press Enter to see the cash handler standard note counts. The note counts screen is displayed.

Figure 4-3 DISP Config Standard Note Counts Screen

Note: If separated counters are used, the standard note counts are displayed as follows:

XXXXXX gives the count for the primary cash handler and YYYYYY gives the count for the secondary cash handler




If Enhanced Configuration option 76 is set to 001, the following screen is displayed.

Figure 4-4 DISP Config Extended Note Counts Screen

Note: If dual cash handlers and separated counters are used, the extended note counts are displayed as follows:

XXXXXX gives the count for the primary cash handler and YYYYYY gives the count for the secondary cash handler.

3 Press Enter to see the coin dispenser counts. One of the following coin counts screens is displayed, depending on the setting of Enhanced Configuration option 79:

Figure 4-5 DISP CONFIG Standard Coin Counts Screen




Figure 4-6 DISP CONFIG Extended Coin Counts Screen

Note 1: If coin counters have not been set, the hopper values will be zero (0). If no coin dispenser is present, the hopper values will be blank.

1 PRNT CONFIG (Print Configuration) 4

The PRNT CONFIG option is the same as the DISP CONFIG option, but instead of displaying the terminal configuration, the terminal prints the information or writes it to the EJ (electronic journal):

Figure 4-7 PRNT CONFIG Printout

On successful completion, the following acknowledgement message is displayed:

CONFIG PRINTED

If there is no printer or EJ configured, selecting this option generates the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’. This error is also generated when the default printer to be used is the journal, but the journal device is inoperative and there is no journal backup running. If the required printer is configured but the print operation fails, the error message ‘PRINT FAILURE’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.





2 TRACK 1 4

The TRACK 1 option lets you specify how the cardholder’s name is coded on Track 1 of the card. You must set this option if you are using the Track 1 Name Control code to extract the cardholder’s name from the card and display it on screen.

If you use this feature without specifying an option, the ISO format is used as a default.

The options are:

● ISO (default)

● VISA

● AUTO‐B (automatic search backwards)

● AUTO‐F (automatic search forwards).



The prompt ENTER TRACK1 FORMAT - appears.

2 Enter one digit in the range 1‐4 and press Enter. The numbers represent the following options:

1 ‐ ISO

2 ‐ VISA

3 ‐ AUTO‐B

4 ‐ AUTO‐F

The following new configuration is displayed in the Configuration Data:

TRACK 1 TYPE = XXXXXX

If you require the ABA format, select VISA or either of the AUTO options.

If you enter an invalid value, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

In Advance NDC, the Track 1 settings are automatically saved persistent storage, and hence are used on power failure recovery. For details of the Track 1 name display feature, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual.




3 ROLL WIDTH 4

The ROLL WIDTH option lets you set the roll width and left margin for the journal and receipt printers. This local configuration option is provided if you do not wish to change the Central application.

The Enhanced Configuration Parameters Load message from Central fulfills the same function. For details, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual.

The ROLL WIDTH option permits alignment of text with pre‐printed stationery. You can use it to achieve compatibility with a Central application that was originally designed for a fixed roll width, such as Diebold 20 column.

Note: This option is not supported on the receipt printer in sideways printing mode.



The prompt ENTER NO. OF COLUMNS - appears.

2 Enter a number in the range 1‐40 and press Enter.

The prompt ENTER LEFT COLUMN - appears.

3 Enter a number in the range 1‐40 and press Enter.

If both entries are valid and their sum does not exceed 41, they are accepted. The Configuration data is displayed for you to verify the modifications.

Note: If an invalid value is entered, the entry is rejected and the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed. If the combination of ‘No. Of Columns’ and ‘Left Column’ is greater than 41, the entry is rejected and the error message ‘INVALID COMBINATION’ is displayed. In both cases you are prompted to re‐enter the values. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

If you select the Enter key without entering data, no update for the specified field takes place.

Using the Clear key within this option clears any data you have entered and redisplays the previous prompt.

If you select the Cancel key while executing this function, the entry is terminated and the Configure menu is redisplayed with the following message:

FUNCTION CANCELLED




If you select the Cancel key at the ‘Enter Left Column’ prompt, any data you have entered for ‘Enter No. Of Columns’ is also discarded.

If you select the Cancel key, the Configure menu prompt is redisplayed.

If you select option 1 when the Configure menu prompt is displayed, the configuration data is printed on the operator printer. This allows you to verify any modifications you have made.

In Advance NDC, the roll width and left margin settings are automatically saved to persistent storage, and hence are used on power failure recovery.

If neither a journal printer nor a receipt printer is present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

4 MACHINE NO (Machine Number) 4

The MACHINE NO option lets you assign a machine number to the terminal. It is also used in the EJ, and in the default print on the depository. This number is used to name the file when EJ data is copied.

Note: If changing the machine number of the terminal, any existing EJ backup files remain on the hard disk but cannot be accessed using RCOPY. If you switch to Standard EJ backups before changing the machine number, these files will be removed from the hard disk.



The prompt ENTER MACHINE NO. - appears.

2 Enter six digits and press Enter.

Once you have selected this option, the following new configuration is displayed in the Configuration Data:

MACHINE NO. = XXXXXX

This data is also used in the PPD default print message. For details, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual.

In Advance NDC, the machine number setting is automatically saved to persistent storage, and hence is used on power failure recovery.

If the data entered is less than six digits, the error message ‘INCOMPLETE DATA’ is displayed and you are prompted to re‐enter the machine number. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.




5 DATE/TIME 4

The DATE/TIME option lets you set the terminal date and time, as follows:


The prompt ENTER DATE (YYMMDD) - appears.

2 Enter six digits and press Enter.

The prompt ENTER TIME (HHMM) - appears.

3 Enter four digits and press Enter.

The data you enter is valid if it conforms to the following:

00 <= YY <= 99

01 <= MM <= 12

01 <= DD <= 31 if MM = 1, 3, 5, 7, 8, 10 or 12

01 <= DD <= 30 if MM = 4, 6, 9 or 11

01 <= DD <= 29 if MM = 2 and leap year

01 <= DD <= 28 if MM = 2 and not leap year

00 <= HH <= 23

00 <= MM <= 59

If 00 <= YY <= 89 the year is taken to be in the range 2000 <= YY <= 2089. If 90 <= YY <= 99 the year is taken to be in the range 1990 <= YY <= 1999.

A leap year is any year that can be evenly divided by four, unless it can also be evenly divided by 100. The exception to this is when the year can also be evenly divided by 400, in which case it is a leap year.

The seconds are always set to zero when the time and date are set.

If the date and time entries are valid, they are accepted and the configuration data is displayed for you to verify. If the data entered is an invalid length or an invalid value, the error message ‘INCOMPLETE DATA’ or ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed respectively and you are prompted to re‐enter the data. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

If you select the Enter key without entering any data, the field is not updated.




If you select the Clear key, any data you have entered is cleared and the prompt that was displayed when you selected Clear is redisplayed.

If you select the Cancel key, the entry is terminated and the following message is displayed:

FUNCTION CANCELLED

If you select the Cancel key at the ‘Enter Time (HHMM) ‐’ prompt, any data you have entered for ‘Enter Date (YYMMDD) ‐’ is also disregarded.

Note: A Date and Time security trace is logged on the electronic or hard copy journal, if available, when this option is successfully completed.

6 MSG MODE (Message Mode) 4

The MSG MODE option lets you customise the message mode with a string of option digits.

In Advance NDC, the message mode (that is, the type and format of status messages the terminal sends to Central) is always 1. However, you can use this option to customise the message mode with a string of option digits. These options permit additional local parameters to be set which cannot be included in download options. See Appendix A, “Option Digits” for details.

In Advance NDC, the message mode setting is automatically saved to persistent storage, and hence is used on power failure recovery.

Complete the following steps:


The following prompt is displayed:

ENTER MSG MODE -

2 Enter the digit 1 followed by the required option digits and press Enter.

You can enter up to 16 digits. A default value of ‘0’ is set for any digits not entered.


MESSAGE MODE = 1XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

If you select the Cancel key, the entry is terminated and no message is displayed. Any data you have entered is discarded.




7 DISP SCRN (Display Screens) 4

The DISP SCRN option lets you display the downloaded customised screens (user screens) and Cardholder reserved screens on the facia interface. This option is not available from the operator interface.

To use this option from the facia complete the following steps:

1 Press 7 and Enter

The following prompt appears:

CURRENT SCREEN = COO

ENTER SCREEN NO -

2 Enter a screen number in one of the following ranges and press Enter to display a screen in the selected range:

Table 4-1 Screen Ranges and Types

If the screen has not been loaded, the screen number appears at the top left of the display. Pressing Enter by itself causes the current screen to be displayed.

Using the Enter and 0 (zero) keys returns you to the prompt display and at the same time allows you to increment or decrement the current screen number. You can then select a further screen for display.

By repeatedly pressing the Enter key, you can step through some or all of the screens in a forward direction. By pressing the Enter and 0 keys alternately, you can step through the screens in a backwards direction.

The sequence of screens is:

Table 4-2 Screen Sequence Navigation

Use the Cancel key to terminate the function.

Range Screen Type

00—06 Reserved screens C00 to C06

0000—0010 Reserved screens D0000 to D0010

000—9999 User screens 000 to 9999

Forwards Backwards

C screens 00‐06 User screens 9999‐000

D screens 0000‐0010 D screens 0010‐0000

User screens 000‐9999 C screens 06‐00

C screens 00‐06 User screens 9999‐000




You cannot select this option from the operator interface. If you attempt to do so, the error message ‘INVALID SELECTION’ is displayed.

If you enter an invalid value, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

8 SET PRINT (Set Printer) 4

The SET PRINT option lets you define which configured device to use for the following:

● PRNT CMPNT VERS and PRNT SCRW VERS functions of the Select menu

● PRNT CNTRS and PRNT SPPLY functions of the Replenish menu

● PRNT CONFIG and PRNT TCP/IP functions of the Configure menu

● PRNT ACCESS function of the Access menu.

This overrides the default printers that are defined according to the operator interface in use (receipt printer for the facia interface and journal printer for the operator interface) for these functions.



The prompt ENTER PRINTER - appears.

2 Enter one digit in the range 0‐3 and press Enter. The numbers represent the following devices:

0 ‐ Use default printer

1 ‐ Use receipt printer

2 ‐ Use journal printer or electronic journal

3 ‐ Use both printers


COUNT PRNTR = XXXXXXX

The default may only be selected on a terminal that has both a receipt printer and a journal capability, which can be a printer and/or Electronic Journal (EJ).

In Advance NDC, the default printer setting is automatically saved to persistent storage, and hence is used on power failure recovery.

If neither a journal printer/EJ nor a receipt printer is present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. If an invalid




value is entered, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed and you are prompted to re‐enter the value. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

9 SET CASH 4

The SET CASH option lets you set the number of notes added to each cassette prior to performing a STD CASH option from the Replenish menu. When you use this option, the terminal prompts you to select the cassette type and then to enter the number of notes in that cassette.

The cash handlers can contain up to four or seven different cassette types, depending on whether extended cassette types are supported. For example, four cassette types could contain 10, 20, 50 and 100 dollar notes. Each cassette type can only contain notes of one value but more than one physical cassette may have notes of the same type. The values set here are used in the STD CASH replenishment option.



The prompt ENTER CASSETTE TYPE- appears.

If dual cash handlers are used, counters can be set as combined or separated. If combined counters are used, enter the total count for both cash handlers. If using separated counters, enter the count for each cash handler individually. If separate counters are to be set using SET CASH, the prompt changes to CDMx ENTER CASSETTE TYPE-, where x identifies the cash handler as follows:

— 1 the primary cash handler

— 2 the secondary cash handler

When entering separate counts for dual cash handlers, enter the counts for the primary cash handler first. When finished, press Cancel to enter counters for the secondary cash handler. To cancel the operation, press Cancel twice.

Note: DISP CASH and PRNT CNTRS display the combined total even if separate counters are entered in SET CASH.

2 Enter one digit in the range 1‐4 or 1‐7, depending on the setting of Enhanced Configuration option 76, and press Enter.

The prompt ENTER NO. OF NOTES- appears.




3 Enter up to five digits in the range 0‐65534 (or 0‐9999 for a GBRU) and press Enter. If using dual cash handlers with separated counts, the combined total must not exceed 65534 (or 0‐9999 for a GBRU). If you enter a value outside this range, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed.

4 Repeat steps 2 to 5 until you have entered all the data.


The new configuration is displayed in the Configuration Data, the following example shows the display for four cassette types:

Note 1: If Enhanced Configuration option 76 is set to 001, this display is extended to show seven cassette types, as shown in Figure 4‐3 on page 4‐4.

Note 2: If dual cash handlers are used with separated counts, the counts are shown as XXXXXX YYYYYY, where XXXXX gives the count for the primary cash handler and YYYYYY gives the count for the secondary cash handler, as shown in Figure 4‐4 on page 4‐5.

In Advance NDC, the standard note counts settings are automatically saved to persistent storage, and hence are retained to recover from a power failure.


10 RST MODE (Restart Mode) 4

The RST MODE option lets you set how the terminal will recover following a power failure or system reset. The following options are available:

● Default

● Diebold Equivalent

● Native Mode (NCR)

● Auto Recovery.



The prompt ENTER RESTART MODE - appears.

STANDARD NOTE COUNTS

T 1 = % T2 =%

T 3 = % T4 =%




2 Enter one digit in the range 0‐3 and press Enter. The numbers have the following meanings:

0 ‐ Default. A configuration data reload is attempted from disk if the configuration ID is present. Comms/MAC keys revert to B key. A power failure status is sent.

1 ‐ Diebold equivalent. No configuration data reload is attempted and the configuration ID is reset. Comms/MAC keys revert to B key. A power failure status is sent.

2 ‐ Native Mode (NCR). A configuration data reload is attempted from disk if the configuration ID is present. Comms/MAC keys retain their current value if the configuration data reload is successful, otherwise they revert to B key. A power failure status is sent.

3 ‐ Auto recovery. A configuration data reload is attempted if the configuration ID is present. If successful, Comms/MAC keys retain their current value, no power failure status is sent, and the previous operating mode is re‐entered. If configuration data is not reloaded, the configuration ID is reset. Comms/MAC keys revert to B key. A power failure status is sent.


RESTART MODE = XXXXXXX

In Advance NDC, the restart mode setting is automatically saved to persistent storage, and hence is used on power failure recovery.

If an invalid value is entered, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed and you are prompted to re‐enter the value. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

11 SET DEFAULT 4

This option lets you write the local configuration parameters, set by using the Configure and Access menus, to the hard disk. This provides a backup, enabling the terminal to reload the parameters from the disk if the pmdata file is missing or becomes corrupt.

In Advance NDC, the following local configuration parameters are automatically saved to persistent storage, and hence are used on power failure recovery. You need to use SET DEFAULT only if you wish to save the configuration parameters to hard disk.

● Receipt Width

● Left Margin

● Machine Number

● Track 1 Format

● Message Mode Option Digits




● Default Printer

● Standard Note Counts

● Standard Coin Counts

● Restart Mode

● Journal Mode

● MAC Number (entered via the Access Menu).

If you select the SET DEFAULT option, the following message is displayed:

DEFAULT SET

12 TRACE ON 4

The TRACE ON option sets the Communications Print Trace function on. When this is selected, and a journal printer is present, all incoming and outgoing communication messages are traced.

Note: Using this option will consume paper and/or file space. NCR recommends that you use it only for diagnostic purposes.

The journal writes 40 characters to a line. The first 5 characters identify whether the message is incoming (RECV:) or outgoing (SEND:). If the message is longer than 35 characters, it is truncated. Any field separators are represented by the backslash characters (‘\’), and any other non‐printable character by the question mark character (‘?’).

If any C‐Exit message interceptors (Virtual Controllers) are used, intercepted messages are written to the journal as described above, and then written again with the first five characters identifying the messages as using a Virtual Controller and incoming (VCRC:) or outgoing (VCSD:).

13 TRACE OFF 4

The TRACE OFF option sets the Communications Print Trace function off (the default setting).

14 SET COINS 4

The SET COINS option lets you set the number of coins added to each hopper type when performing a STD COINS option from the Replenish menu.



The SELECT FUNCTION prompt is replaced with ENTER COIN HOPPER TYPE.

2 Enter one digit in the range 1 to 4 or 1 to 8, depending on the setting of Enhanced Configuration option 79, and press Enter.




You may see the following error messages:

INVALID VALUE. For details see “E0020 ‐ INVALID VALUE” on page B‐8

NOT ENOUGH DIGITS. For details see “E0019 ‐ NOT ENOUGH DIGITS” on page B‐8

COINS EXCEED LIMIT OF 65534. For details see “E0026 ‐ COINS EXCEED LIMIT OF 65534” on page B‐9

The ENTER NO. OF COINS prompt is displayed.

3 Enter up to 5 digits in the range 0 to 65534, and press Enter.

You may see the following error messages:

TOO MANY DIGITS. For details see “E0018 ‐ TOO MANY DIGITS” on page B‐7

COINS EXCEED LIMIT OF 65534. For details, see “E0026 ‐ COINS EXCEED LIMIT OF 65534” on page B‐9.


5 Press Cancel to display the configuration data screen. For details of this screen see Figure 4‐5 on page 4‐5. The following message is displayed:

FUNCTION EXITED

If no counts have been added when Cancel is selected, the FUNCTION CANCELLED message is displayed.

If a coin dispenser is not present, the ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ error message is displayed. For details, see “E0022 ‐ DEVICE NOT PRESENT” on page B‐8.

30 SET JRNL (Set Electronic Journal) 4

The SET JRNL option lets you select either dual mode printing or the EJ function only, as appropriate for the SST. The electronic journal (EJ) must be set after the following and before any host activity commences:

● When Advance NDC is first installed

● Whenever persistent storage is cleared

When Advance NDC is first installed, the default setting for the journal is Paper, or None if no physical journal printer is present. If persistent storage is cleared, the journal mode reverts to the default setting.




To set the electronic journal, complete the following steps:


The prompt SET JOURNAL OPTION- appears.

2 Enter one digit, either 1 or 2, as follows, and press Enter.

1 ‐ activate the EJ in the absence of the configured physical journal printer. (The physical device is not connected or it is in a fatal state. For more information, see “Error Conditions”.)

Note: If you enable the EJ alone, it cannot be deactivated by a Supervisor mode command for security reasons.

2 ‐ activate the EJ to operate concurrently with the journal printer. (The physical printer is configured and in a good state.) This option automatically activates the hardcopy backup.

Note: If you enable the EJ in dual mode, you can disable it as described in “33 DISBL JRNL (Disable Journal Option)” on page 4‐20.

To cancel the operation and return to the Configure menu, press the Cancel key.

If you enter 1 and the command is accepted, data normally printed on the journal printer is logged to the system disk instead.

If you enter 2 and the command is accepted, data is both printed on the journal printer and logged to the system disk.

In Advance NDC, the journal mode setting is held in persistent storage, and so is used on power failure recovery.

If the physical journal fails while dual mode is active, the hardcopy backup starts automatically.

Error Conditions 4

The SET JRNL options will fail in the following conditions:

● If you select the function while the EJ is active, the error message ‘COMMAND NOT ALLOWED’ will be displayed.

You can verify the device status by entering the DISP CONFIG command. The PRNT CONFIG command will be successful at the rear interface if the electronic journal is active.

● If you press Enter without entering 1 or 2, the error message ‘NOT ENOUGH DIGITS’ is displayed. If you enter any digit other than 1 or 2, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed.




● If you enter 1 and the physical journal printer is configured and in a good state, the command will be rejected with a ‘JRNL PRNTR PRESENT’ message.

● If you enter 2 and the physical journal printer is either disconnected or not in a good state, the message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ will be displayed.

● If an error occurs during electronic journal activation, the likely cause for this is that there is insufficient disk space available to build the electronic journal log file on the system disk drive. On a request for first activation of the electronic journal, an attempt is made to create a log file, with file size dependent on the required data. If the available disk space is insufficient, the journal will remain inactive and the terminal will return the error message ‘DISK I/O ERROR’.

For more information about the error messages, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

If the SET JRNL command succeeds, but the electronic journal subsequently returns an error, check the device status by issuing the DISP SPPLY command from the Replenish menu. For details of using the INIT EJRNL command when the journal is full, see Chapter 3, “Replenish Menu”.

31 VOLUME SST, 32 VOLUME JACK 4

In NDC+, these options allowed you to adjust the default volume of the terminal loudspeaker and audio jack to suit local conditions.

In Advance NDC, these options are not supported.

If you select one of these options on the operator interface, the error message ‘FRONT FEATURE ONLY’ is displayed. If you select one of the options on the facia interface, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

33 DISBL JRNL (Disable Journal Option) 4

Use this option to return from dual mode to paper only by pressing 33 and Enter. If you select this option when dual mode is not operative, the message COMMAND NOT ALLOWED is displayed. If the command is accepted, the mode is set to PAPER and the message FUNCTION DONE is displayed.

Note: When you select this option, the print logs are deleted; therefore, if you want a back‐up of the current logs, use the INIT EJRNL option on the Replenish menu to copy the logs to diskette before selecting this option. For details, see the section “40 INIT EJRNL (Initialise Electronic Journal)” on page 3‐31.




34 EJ OPTIONS 4

Use this option to display the EJ configuration menu by pressing 34 and Enter. If you select this option when the EJ is not operative, the message EJ NOT PRESENT is displayed. For information on activating the EJ, see “30 SET JRNL (Set Electronic Journal)” on page 4‐18.

The EJ configuration menu contains the following options:

Figure 4-8 EJ configuration menu

To view and modify one of the options on the EJ configuration menu, enter the appropriate number.

0 DISP EJ CONFIG 4

Use this option to display the current EJ configuration information on screen, as shown in the following example screen:

Figure 4-9 Example DISP EJ CONFIG screen

1 EJ BACKUP MODE 4

Use this option to switch between standard and multiple EJ backup.

Note: You must have multiple EJ backup enabled if you wish to use any of the automatic initialisation options. For details of the these options, see “4 AUTO INIT EJ OPTIONS” on page 4‐24.




To view or modify the current EJ backup settings, complete the following steps:


The current mode is displayed. The SELECT FUNCTION prompt is also displayed.

2 Select the required backup mode, as follows:

— 0 for Standard EJ backup. This is the default, and allows a single copy of the EJ log file to be retained.

— 1 for Multiple EJ backup. This allows multiple EJ backup files to be retained, as defined in MAX NO OF BACKUPS.

Changing Modes 4If changing the current mode, the following warning is displayed:

BACKUP FILES WILL BE DELETED.

PRESS 1 TO DELETE, 0 TO RETAIN

Note: No files will be deleted if the Enhanced Configuration Parameters Download is used to change the mode. This method can be disabled, for details see “7 DSBL HOST CNTRL OF EJ MODE” on page 4‐31.

Pressing 1 deletes all backup files except for the latest.

If a value other than 0 or 1 is entered, the INVALID VALUE error is displayed

If changing from multiple to standard EJ backup, the currently stored maximum number of backups can no longer be changed through Supervisor. If the mode is subsequently changed back to multiple EJ backup the value is reinstated.

2 MAX NO OF BACKUPS 4

Use this option to configure the maximum number of EJ backup files stored. The default is 10 files, however, this can be set to any value between 2 and 1000, depending on the available disk space.

To view or modify the maximum EJ backups, complete the following steps:


The ENTER MAX EJ BACKUPS prompt is displayed.

If the EJ backup mode is currently set to 0 standard EJ backup, the INVALID SELECTION, EJ MODE IS STANDARD error message is displayed.




2 Enter the number of EJ backups you want to allow. Valid values are any number between 2 and 1000 inclusive.

The first time the maximum number of backups is set, the maximum number of EJ backup files that can be held on the available disk space is calculated. The available space is checked again each time a backup is created.

Note: The maximum number of backup files configured may change if the available disk space increases or decreases.

If the number of backups specified exceeds the available disk space, the following message is displayed, where X is the maximum number of backups that can be held on the available disk space:

INVALID; MAX POSSIBLE VALUE = X

If the maximum number of backups is reduced and more backup files exist than this change allows, the following message is displayed.

SOME BACKUPS MAY BE DELETED

If you continue, any files above the new limit will be deleted. For example, if the current setting is 200 and 120 backup files exist, and the maximum limit is changed to 100, the earliest 20 files are deleted to comply with the new lowered limit.

3 ENABLE MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS 4

Use this option to allow or prevent the display of a selectable list of available destination drives when INIT EJRNL (see “40 INIT EJRNL (Initialise Electronic Journal)” on page 3‐31) or RCOPY EJRNL (see “40 INIT EJRNL (Initialise Electronic Journal)” on page 3‐31) is selected. When enabled, all available drives are listed on the screen for selection, as illustrated in Figure 4‐10.

Figure 4-10 Example Multiple Destination Selection Screen




To modify the multiple destination setting, complete the following steps:


The multiple destinations screen is displayed with the SELECT FUNCTION prompt displayed.

2 Enter the appropriate number as follows:

— 0 to disable multiple destinations. This is the default, and allows back‐up to diskette only.

The MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS DISABLED confirmation message is displayed.

— 1 to activate multiple destinations.

The MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS ENABLED confirmation message is displayed.

4 AUTO INIT EJ OPTIONS 4

Automatic initialisation provides the ability to perform an EJ initialisation operation without the presence of an attendant.

Multiple EJ backup must be enabled for all automatic initialisation features. For details of EJ backup modes, see “1 EJ BACKUP MODE” on page 4‐21.

Like the manual INIT EJRNL option, the backup file is created in the c:\program files\advance ndc\data\EJBackups directory. Unlike the manual INIT EJRNL option, the automatic initialisation features do not copy the EJ log file to removable media. If required, you can set a destination to copy EJ log file to immediately after the automatic initialisation. For details of setting the destination for the copy of the EJ log file, see “4 AUTOMATIC INIT COPY DRIVE” on page 4‐28. For details of the INIT EJRNL option, see “40 INIT EJRNL (Initialise Electronic Journal)” on page 3‐31.

Figure 4-11 Auto INIT EJ Options Screen




The available automatic initialisation features are as follows:

● Cutover. Takes an automatic initialisation when the EJ file reaches 90% of the maximum size. For details, see “1 CUTOVER”

● Scheduled INIT. Takes an automatic initialisation at a specified interval. For details, see “2 SCHEDULED INIT OPTIONS”

● Agent. Allows an automatic initialisation to be taken using third‐party software or batch file. For details, see “3 AGENT”

1 CUTOVER 4Use this option to enable or disable automatic initialisation when the EJ reaches 90% of the maximum size.

When using this option the unsolicited messages reported when the EJ file is 90% and 100% full will not be seen. For details, see “Local Electronic Journal Log” on page 7‐14.

Figure 4-12 Cutover Screen

2 SCHEDULED INIT OPTIONS 4The Scheduled INIT Options screen contains the following options:

Figure 4-13 Scheduled INIT Options Screen




1 ENABLE/DISABLE SCHEDULED INIT 4Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) automatic initialisation by a specified schedule, known as a pattern.

Figure 4-14 Enable/Disable Scheduled INIT Screen

2 SCHEDULED INIT PATTERN 4Use this option to specify the schedule. No change is applied until all parts of the schedule are set and any changes to the schedule are journalled.

Note: The schedule is only applied if the automatic initialisation using scheduled initialisation is enabled. For details of enabling scheduled initialisation, see “1 ENABLE/DISABLE SCHEDULED INIT” on page 4‐26.

You can choose from the following schedules:

● Daily. This runs every day at the specified time

● Weekly. This runs on the specified day of the week at the specified time

● Monthly. This runs on the specified date of the month at the specified time.

By default, the scheduled initialisation pattern is daily at 4:00am local time.

Figure 4-15 Scheduled INIT Pattern Screen




● Select 1 to set the interval to daily. Do one of the following to specify the local time to run the automatic initialisation each day:

— Press Enter to retain the current local time

— Enter four digits in 24‐hour format with no delimiter and press Enter.

● Select 2 to set the interval to weekly. By default, the weekly scheduled initialisation pattern is Sunday at 4:00am.

You are prompted to enter the day of the week to run the automatic initialisation, with the current day and time displayed, as follows:

Figure 4-16 Weekly Scheduled INIT Screen

Enter a number between 0 (Sunday) and 6 (Saturday) for the day to run the automatic initialisation. After entering the day, you are prompted to enter the time, as described above, at which to take the automatic initialisation.

● Select 3 to set the interval to monthly. By default, the monthly scheduled initialisation pattern is the first day of the month at 4:00am.

You are prompted to enter the day of the month to run the automatic initialisation, with the current day and time displayed, as follows:

Figure 4-17 Monthly Scheduled INIT Screen




Enter a number between 1 (the first day of the month) and 31 (the thirty‐first day of the month) on which to take the automatic initialisation. After entering the day, you are prompted to enter the time, as described above, at which to take the automatic initialisation.

Note: If the current month is shorter than specified in the schedule, the initialisation is run on the last day of the month.

3 AGENT 4Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) automatic initialisation using third‐party software or batch file.

Note: To use the Agent method of automatic initialisation, you must have the third‐party software or batch file installed on the SST and this option enabled. Advance NDC must also be running when the third‐party software or batch file runs the initialisation operation.

For more information on automatic initialisation by agent, and an example batch file, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Developer’s Guide.

4 AUTOMATIC INIT COPY DRIVE 4Use this option, if required, to set the destination of the copy of the EJ file on automatic initialisation.

The destination can be a network or fixed hard drive, or any removable media excluding diskettes. It must be writable and have enough space available for the EJ file.

Note: The management of the copy made to the second destination is the responsibility of the financial institution.

On selecting this option, all available destinations are listed, as illustrated in the following screen example.

Figure 4-18 Example Automatic INIT Copy Drive screen

SELECT FUNCTION-

2 NETWORK DRIVE (Z:)

1 FIXED (C:)0 NONE

SELECT DRIVE




If 1 is selected, the following is displayed:

● If automatic initialisation is enabled, AUTO INIT COPY DRIVE SET TO C:\

● If automatic initialisation is not enabled, AUTO INIT COPY DRIVE SET TO N/A.

Up to 7 drives can be listed. The currently selected drive is also displayed or is blank if no drive is currently selected.

A path can also be defined using the EJFiles\Backups registry entry. This entry has no effect if the selected drive is either the C drive or a CD drive.

If the automatic initialisation copy fails, this is journalled, but the automatic initialisation is not affected.

5 COMPRESSION 4

Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) compression of the EJ file. If compression is enabled, the size of the EJ file is reduced in both manual and automatic initialisation operations.

The EJ file is compressed in a .zip file format, however, the file extension does not change. The size of the EJ file is reduced in either manual or automatic initialisation operations.

If compression fails, the initialisation is still performed.

To decompress the compressed EJ file, you must change the extension from the sequence number to zip. The file can then be decompressed using any utility that supports ZIP 2.0 compression. If your compression utility does not recognise the EJ file format, check the currently active journal for a compression failure message.

Figure 4-19 Compression screen

Note: If EJ privacy is enabled, compression is also enabled by default and cannot be disabled. For details of EJ privacy, see “8 EJ PRIVACY OPTIONS” on page 4‐31.




6 MAX FILE SIZE 4

Use this option to set the maximum size of the EJ file. Enter the maximum EJ file size in kilobytes (KBs).

Figure 4-20 Max File Size screen

The default file size is 1411000 bytes for backward compatibility. The minimum file size is 1 KB and the maximum depends on the available disk space. This means that the maximum file size can increase or decrease if more applications or files are saved to or removed from the SST.

Advance NDC calculates the maximum file size as follows:

available disk space / (maximum number of backups + 4)

For example, if the available disk space is 1 GB (1024 MB) and 28 is the current maximum number of backups, the maximum file size is 32 MB.

Note: If the maximum file size is greater than the default, the file will not fit on diskette. If you have set a larger file size, ensure that multiple destinations are configured. For details, see “3 ENABLE MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS” on page 4‐23.




7 DSBL HOST CNTRL OF EJ MODE 4

Use this option to prevent or allow host changes to the EJ backup mode described on page 4‐21.

Figure 4-21 Disable Host Control of EJ Mode screen

Select 1 to enable, or 0 to disable host changes to the EJ backup mode.

8 EJ PRIVACY OPTIONS 4

EJ privacy compresses and applies password protection to the EJ file.

Note: The security of the EJ password is the responsibility of the financial institution. If a password is forgotten, you must deinstall Advance NDC, delete the UCDI persistent file, and re‐install Advance NDC to remove password protection from future EJ files. Any uploaded or copied EJ files that use the forgotten password will not be accessible. For more information, refer to the Advance NDC, Developer’s Guide.

The Privacy Options screen contains the following options:

Figure 4-22 EJ Privacy Options Screen




Entering the Password 4The password can be between four and 20 characters, inclusive. NCR recommends using six characters for the password. When entering the password, you use the keys to enter the associated characters described in Table 4‐3:

Table 4-3 Password Characters

Key Associated Character

1 1

A

B

C

2 2

D

E

F

3 3

G

H

I

4 4

J

K

L

5 5

M

N

O

6 6

P

Q

R




Characters are entered using numeric keys as illustrated in Figure 4‐23. To enter a particular character, press the related key repeatedly until you reach the character you require, then press Enter.

For example, to enter (HELLO) do the following:

1 Press the 0 key twice for the opening bracket, (, then Enter

2 Press the 3 key three times for the H, then Enter

3 Press the 2 key three times for the E, then Enter

4 Press the 4 key four times for the L, then Enter


6 Press the 5 key four times for the O, then Enter

7 Press the 0 key four times for the closing bracket, ), then Enter

7 7

S

T

U

8 8

V

W

X

9 9

Y

Z

*

0 0

(

#

)

Key Associated Character




Note: If you enter an incorrect character, you must cancel the operation and start entering the password again.

1 DISABLE EJ PRIVACY 4Use this option to disable EJ privacy. The following screen prompts for the current password:

Figure 4-23 EJ Privacy Authentication Screen

Enter the password as described in “Entering the Password” on page 4‐32. If the password is valid, EJ privacy is disabled.

2 SET EJ PASSWORD 4Use this option to set or change the password used for EJ privacy.

Figure 4-24 Set EJ Password screen

If a password already exists, you are first prompted for the current password. Enter the password as described in “Entering the Password” on page 4‐32. If the password is valid, you continue to the ENTER NEW PASSWORD prompt.

If no password exists, you are immediately presented with the ENTER NEW PASSWORD prompt.

After entering a valid password, you are asked to confirm the password. Re‐enter the password to enable EJ privacy and set the password.




35 JOURNAL LEVEL 4

Enter 0, 1, 2 or 3 to define the level of journalling as described in Table 4‐4.

Table 4-4 Journal Level Options

Level Description Example Journal Entry

0 Cardholder transaction dataThis journal level is compatible with NDC+

See Note 1:

1 The first three digits are an automatically generated security trace number in the range 000 to 999.Date of transaction start in DD/MM/YY formatTime of transaction start in HH:MM format

*123*23/05/07 01:10**TRANSACTION START*

See Note 2:

Cardholder transaction data See Note 1: and Note 6:

Time of transaction end in HH:MM:SS format

01:12:05 TRANSACTION END

2 The first three digits are an automatically‐generated security trace number in the range 000 to 999.Date of transaction start in DD/MM/YY formatTime of transaction start in HH:MM format

*123*23/05/07 01:10**TRANSACTION START*CARD INSERTED

See Note 2:

Time that the card was taken in HH:MM:SS format

01:11:03 CARD TAKEN

Time of dispense in HH:MM:SS formatThe number of notes taken from each cassette

01:12:00 NOTES PRESENTED 0, 4, 0 0See Note 3:







Note 1: Cardholder transaction data is variable and depends on the transaction reply and status messages, and the occurrence of presenter errors. The following is an example of the information that can be journalled:

CASH WITHDRAWALAMOUNT $5

PRESENTER ERROR

Note 2: If the cardholder initiates a cardless transaction, the journal entry begins CARDLESS TRANSACTION START for all journal levels. If the cardholder uses a card to initiate the transaction, the journal entry begins TRANSACTION START, and for journal levels 2 and 3 also includes the CARD INSERTED entry.

Note 3: The example given in Table 4‐4 shows the journal entry when Enhanced Configuration option 76 is set to 000. The following is an example of this entry when this option is set to 001:

01:12:55 NOTES PRESENTED 0, 4, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0

3 The first three digits are an automatically‐generated security trace number in the range 000 to 999.Date of transaction start in DD/MM/YY formatTime of transaction start in HH:MM format

*123*23/05/07 01:10**TRANSACTION START*CARD INSERTED

See Note 2:

Time of PIN Entry in HH:MM:SS format 01:11:03 PIN ENTERED

Time that the notes were stacked in HH:MM:SS format

01:11:40 NOTES STACKED

Time that the card was taken in HH:MM:SS format

01:12:10 CARD TAKENSee Note 5:

Time of dispense in HH:MM:SS format 01:12:55 NOTES PRESENTED 0, 4, 0, 0See Note 3:

Time that the notes were taken in HH:MM:SS format

01:13:15 NOTES TAKENSee Note 4:




Level Description Example Journal Entry




After a successful change of the journalling level, the following message is displayed:

FUNCTION DONE

Card readers such as MCRW, IMCRW and Smart are supported for all journal levels.

Note 4: Journalling of notes taken always occurs regardless of the retract option setting, and can take place during a transaction or after it. This text may appear interleaved with Cardholder transaction data if more than one printer data field is sent in transaction replies.

Note 5: DIP, DASH and SWIPE card readers do not support journalling of the time that the card was taken. If this is supported, this text may appear interleaved with Cardholder transaction data if more than one printer data field is sent in transaction replies.

Note 6: If a camera is present, the security trace number and the name of the image file (without extension) is journalled.The number of pictures taken is not journalled.

37 TCP/IP CONFIG (TCP/IP Configuration menu) 4

Use this option to display the TCP/IP configuration menu by pressing 37 and Enter. This option requires the TCP/IP protocol to have been installed and configured during the operating system installation.

The TCP/IP configuration menu contains the following options:

Figure 4-25 TCP/IP CONFIG Menu

To view and modify one of the options on the TCP/IP configuration menu, enter the appropriate number. Select 5 only if you wish to use the Advanced TCP/IP configuration menu.

If you enter a number other than one of those displayed on the screen, the error message ‘INVALID FUNCTION’ is displayed and the prompt to select a function is redisplayed.




If the CCM TCPIP configuration file (XML) cannot be found, the error message ‘XML FILE ERROR’ is displayed and the prompt to select a function is redisplayed.

To redisplay the menu, press the Cancel key.

If you are using TCP/IP communications with Central, as a minimum, the following must be specified:

● Remote IP Address

● Remote Port Number

● Local Port Number.

The Communications Connection Manager (CCM) automatically picks up the local IP address from the registry. Other settings must be configured for your communications link.

Note: The local IP address can also be modified using the “2 LCL ADDRESS (Local IP Address)” option described on page 4‐40.

The TCP/IP configuration settings are automatically saved to file, and hence are used on power failure recovery.

The following subsections detail how to view and modify the TCP/IP configuration options. It is assumed that you are already familiar with using the TCP/IP protocol.

Note: Once you have finished configuring TCP/IP, you must restart the SST for your changes to take effect.

0 RMT ADDRESS (Remote IP Address) 4

This option lets you specify the IP address of the remote host to which the SST will establish a TCP/IP connection.

Note: In CCM TCPIP, entering data using this option overwrites any entry made using the “16 NAMED RMT HOST” option described on page 4‐52.

To view and modify the parameter defining which Remote IP Address is used, complete the following steps:


The current configuration for the remote IP address is displayed. If there is no entry for the IP Address, ‘NOT CONFIGURED’ is displayed as well as the ENTER IP ADDRESS - prompt.




2 Enter the 12‐digit IP address of the remote host and press Enter, or press the Cancel key to redisplay the TCP/IP configuration menu.

Valid IP addresses must be of the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, as follows:

● aaa is a byte containing three digits in the range 001‐225

● bbb is a byte containing three digits in the range 000‐255

● ccc is a byte containing three digits in the range 000‐255

● ddd is a byte containing three digits in the range 000‐255.

If the Enter key is pressed with no data entry, no update occurs. If fewer than 12 digits are entered or one of the four bytes is out of the specified range, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed, and the prompt to enter an IP Address is redisplayed.

1 RMT PORT NO (Remote Port Number) 4

This field contains the number of the remote port used when sending and receiving TCP/IP data.

To view and modify the remote port number, complete the following steps:


The current configuration for the remote port number is displayed. If there is no entry for the port number, ‘NOT CONFIGURED’ is displayed.

The ‘ENTER PORT NO - ’ prompt is also displayed.

2 Enter a new port number in the range 0‐65535 and press Enter; or press the Cancel key to redisplay the TCP/IP Configuration menu.

Note 1: When the SST is configured as a client (CONFIG AS SRV = 0), this port number is also the destination port in the SST’s connection attempts (the remote hostʹs ‘Listening Port’).

Note 2: When the SST is configured as a server (CONFIG AS SRV = 1), this field cannot be updated and the error message ‘COMMSLINK CONFIGURED AS SERVER’ is displayed.

If the Enter key is pressed with no data entry, no update occurs. If the number entered is not within the specified range, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed and the prompt to enter a Port Number is redisplayed. No more than five digits can be entered.




2 LCL ADDRESS (Local IP Address) 4

This option lets you specify the IP address of the SST on the network.

To view and modify the parameter defining which Local IP Address is used, complete the following steps:


The current configuration for the local IP address displayed. If there is no entry for the IP Address, ‘NOT CONFIGURED’ is displayed as well as the ENTER IP ADDRESS - prompt. If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled, it is disabled when this option is selected.

2 Enter the 12‐digit IP address of the SST and press Enter, or press the Cancel key to redisplay the TCP/IP configuration menu.

Valid IP addresses are as described in “0 RMT ADDRESS (Remote IP Address)” on page 4‐38.


3 LCL PORT NO (Local Port Number) 4

This field contains the number of the local port used when sending and receiving TCP/IP data.

To view and modify the local port number, complete the following steps:


The current configuration for the local port number is read from the TCP/IP configuration (XML) file and displayed. If there is no entry for the port number, ‘NOT CONFIGURED’ is displayed.

The ‘ENTER PORT NO - ’ prompt is also displayed.

2 Enter a new port number in the range 0‐65535 and press Enter; or press the Cancel key to redisplay the TCP/IP Configuration menu.

Note 1: Use port numbers below 1025 with care as they can be used for standard services.

Note 2: When the SST is configured as a client and the local port number is set to 0, then for each connection attempt the SST will choose a different port that is available (not in use).




Note 3: When the SST is configured as a client and the local port number is set to a non‐zero value, then for each connection attempt the SST will use the same local port. This may delay the successful completion of a new connection, because the host system may have to wait for expiration of a TCP TIMED_WAIT state on its end, before it will accept a new connection from the SST.

Note 4: When the SST is configured as a server (CONFIG AS SRV = 1), this port number is the SSTʹs ‘Listening Port’ and also the remote hostʹs destination port in its connection attempts to the SST.

If the Enter key is pressed with no data entry, no update occurs. If the number entered is not within the specified range, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed and the prompt to enter a port number is redisplayed. No more than five digits can be entered.

4 CONFIG AS SRV (Configure As Server) 4

To view and modify the current TCP/IP configuration for the ʹConfigure As Serverʹ entry, complete the following steps:


The current configuration is displayed. If the SST is not configured as a server, the default value of 0 (client configuration) is displayed.

The ENTER NEW CONFIG - prompt is also displayed.

2 Enter either 1 for server configuration or 0 for client configuration, and press Enter, or press the Cancel key to redisplay the TCP/IP Configuration menu.

If the Enter key is pressed with no data entry, no update occurs. If the input is not 0 or 1, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed and the prompt to enter a new configuration is redisplayed.

Changing the TCP/IP configuration requires the SST to be shut down and restarted. Once you have finished configuring TCP/IP and exit the TCP/IP CONFIG menu, the following screen is displayed:

RESTART REQUIRED

PRESS ENTER TO RESTART ATM

PRESS CANCEL TO RESTART LATER




5 ADVANCED (Advanced TCP/IP Settings) 4

Press 5 and Enter to display the Advanced TCP/IP Configuration menu.

The Advanced TCP/IP configuration menu contains the following options:

Figure 4-26 ADVANCED TCP/IP CONFIG Menu

To view and modify one of the options on the Advanced TCP/IP Configuration menu, enter the appropriate number for the required option.

If you enter a number other than one of those displayed on the screen, the error message ‘INVALID FUNCTION’ is displayed and the prompt to select a function is redisplayed.

Pressing the Cancel key at the Advanced TCP/IP Configuration menu redisplays the TCP/IP Configuration menu. Pressing Cancel while entering an Advanced TCP/IP configuration option redisplays the Advanced TCP/IP Configuration menu.

Selection of each menu item (for example, 1 LEN SIZE) causes the relevant prompt to be displayed (in this case, ‘ENTER LEN SIZE -’). If the Enter key is pressed at this prompt with no data entry, no update occurs.

The following table lists the attribute that each option modifies, and lists Advance NDC default settings. For full details, refer to the on‐line help, APTRA Documentation, CCM TCPIP for the following elements:

● <MessageDelimiter>

● <TCPIPCommsLink>




Table 4-5 Advanced TCP/IP Option Attributes

Option 0 — Message Format 4Advance NDC supports values of 0 and 3 for this parameter, as follows:

Table 4-6 Option 0 Parameters

Note: If the value of this parameter is 0, advanced TCP/IP options 1 to 6 cannot be configured.

6 DISP TCP/IP 4

Press 6 and Enter to display the current TCP/IP configuration information.

Additional options are displayed by entering 99.

7 PRNT TCP/IP 4

Press 7 and Enter to print the current TCP/IP configuration information to the default printer for the operator interface in use (receipt printer for the front facia interface and journal printer for the rear operator interface).

Option Attribute Modified Advance NDC Default

0 MSG FORMAT — 3

1 LEN SIZE LengthSize 2

2 LEN FORMAT LengthFormat 1

3 LEN ADJUST LengthAdjust 0

4 LEN OFFSET LengthOffset 0

5 LEN EMBED LengthEmbedded 0

6 RCV TIMEOUT RCVTimeout 30000 (milliseconds)

7 RETRY TIMER RetryTimer 3000 (milliseconds)

8 KEEP ALIVE KeepAlive 1

9 RECON CLOSE ReconnectOnClose 1

Value Meaning

0 Neither received nor transmitted messages will be formatted. A received message will be passed directly to the SST. A transmitted message will be passed directly to the connection service.

3 Both received and transmitted messages will be formatted. The SST and server software must be written in such a way that the values chosen for the parameters are compatible for both transmitted and received messages.





8 PING 4

Press 8 and Enter to list the addresses on the communication network.

To test the communication using a ping request, enter the appropriate number for the required address.

For option 8 (Other IP), you are prompted to enter the IP address to which to send the request.



9 GATEWAY ADDRESS (Gateway IP Address) 4

This option lets you specify the IP address of the gateway of the SST.

To view and modify the parameter defining which gateway IP Address is used, complete the following steps:


The current configuration for the gateway IP address is displayed. If there is no entry for the IP Address, ‘NOT CONFIGURED’ is displayed as well as the ENTER IP ADDRESS - prompt.

2 Enter the 12‐digit IP address of the gateway and press Enter, or press the Cancel key to redisplay the TCP/IP configuration menu.






10 SUBNET MASK 4

This option lets you specify the IP address of the subnet mask of the SST.

To view and modify the parameter defining which subnet mask is used, complete the following steps:


The current configuration for the subnet mask is displayed. If there is no entry for the subnet mask, ‘NOT CONFIGURED’ is displayed as well as the ENTER IP ADDRESS - prompt.

2 Enter the 12‐digit IP address of the subnet mask and press Enter, or press the Cancel key to redisplay the TCP/IP configuration menu.



11 DNS ADDRESS (Domain Name Server Address) 4

Press 11 and Enter to display the DNS menu.

The DNS menu contains the following options:

● “1 ENTER PRIMARY DNS”

● “2 ENTER SECONDARY DNS”

● “3 COPY DNS SUFIX FROM DISK”

● “4 MANUAL DNS SUFFIX”

To view and modify one of the options on the DNS menu, enter the appropriate number for the required option.

1 ENTER PRIMARY DNS 4This option lets you specify the primary DNS of the SST.

To view and modify the parameter defining which DNS is used, complete the following steps:


The current configuration for the primary DNS is displayed. If there is no entry for the IP Address, ‘NOT CONFIGURED’ is displayed as well as the ENTER IP ADDRESS - prompt. If DHCP is enabled, the error message ‘DHCP ENABLED’ is displayed.




2 Enter the 12‐digit IP address of the primary DNS and press Enter, or press the Cancel key to redisplay the TCP/IP configuration menu.



2 ENTER SECONDARY DNS 4This option lets you specify the secondary DNS of the SST.

To view and modify the parameter defining which DNS is used, complete the following steps:


The current configuration for the secondary DNS is displayed. If there is no entry for the IP Address, ‘NOT CONFIGURED’ is displayed as well as the ENTER IP ADDRESS - prompt. If DHCP is enabled, the error message ‘DHCP ENABLED’ is displayed.

2 Enter the 12‐digit IP address of the secondary DNS and press Enter, or press the Cancel key to redisplay the TCP/IP configuration menu.



3 COPY DNS SUFIX FROM DISK 4This option lets you import the alphanumeric DNS suffix from a removable destination drive (such as DVD, diskette or USB drives).

To select and import a DNS suffix from a removable destination drive, press 3 and Enter.

All present removable destination drives are searched for the DNSSuffix.txt file, which contains a single line entry providing the DNS suffix. If only one DNSSuffix.txt file is found, the DNS suffix is updated using the entry in that file. If more than one DNSSuffix.txtfile is found, all removable destination drives with a DNSSuffix.txtfile are listed. To select the file to use, enter the appropriate number for the required removable destination drive.




A confirmation screen displays the new value following a successful DNS suffix update. If the update fails, an error is displayed. The update can fail for the following reasons:

● The file has more than one line

● The file is empty

● The file is not found

● The data in the file contains invalid characters

● The data in the file is longer than 29 characters.

4 MANUAL DNS SUFFIX 4This option lets you manually enter the alphanumeric DNS suffix.

To manually enter a DNS suffix, press 4 and Enter. Enter the value of the DNS suffix using no more than 29 characters.

A confirmation screen displays the new value following a successful DNS suffix update. If the update fails, the error message ‘INVALID DNS SUFFIX’ is displayed.

12 WINS ADDRESS (Windows Internet Name Service Address) 4

Press 12 and Enter to display the WINS Address menu.

The WINS Address menu contains the following options:

● “1 ENTER PRIMARY WINS”

● “2 ENTER SECONDARY WINS”.

To view and modify one of the options on the WINS Address menu, enter the appropriate number for the required option.

1 ENTER PRIMARY WINS 4This option lets you specify the primary WINS of the SST.

To view and modify the parameter defining which WINS Address is used, complete the following steps:


The current configuration for the primary WINS Address is displayed. If there is no entry for the IP Address, ‘NOT CONFIGURED’ is displayed as well as the ENTER IP ADDRESS - prompt. If DHCP is enabled, it is disabled when this option is selected.

2 Enter the 12‐digit IP address of the primary WINS Address and press Enter, or press the Cancel key to redisplay the TCP/IP configuration menu.






2 ENTER SECONDARY WINS 4This option lets you specify the secondary WINS Address of the SST.

To view and modify the parameter defining which WINS Address is used, complete the following steps:


The current configuration for the secondary WINS is displayed. If there is no entry for the IP Address, ‘NOT CONFIGURED’ is displayed as well as the ENTER IP ADDRESS - prompt. If DHCP is enabled, it is disabled on selection of this option.

2 Enter the 12‐digit IP address of the secondary WINS and press Enter, or press the Cancel key to redisplay the TCP/IP configuration menu.



13 COMP NAME (Computer Name) 4

This option displays the current computer name and prompts for a new name.



2 Enter a new computer name of up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

A system restart is required before the computer name is updated.

14 FIREWALL 4

Press 14 and Enter to display the FIREWALL menu.

The FIREWALL menu contains the following options:

● “1 ENABLE FIREWALL”

● “2 DISABLE FIREWALL”

● “3 ADD FIREWALL ADV SETTINGS”




● “4 DELETE FIREWALL ADV SETTINGS”

● “5 ENABLE ICMP ECHO”

● “6 DISABLE ICMP ECHO”

● “7 ADD PROGRAM”

● “8 DELETE PROGRAM”

● “9 DISPLAY CONFIG”

● “10 PRINT CONFIG”

To view and modify one of the options on the FIREWALL menu, enter the appropriate number for the required option.

If the Windows firewall service is not running and an option is selected from this menu, the error message ‘FIREWALL SERVICE NOT RUNNING’ is displayed.

1 ENABLE FIREWALL 4This option lets you enable the firewall if it is disabled.

To enable the firewall, press 1 and Enter. If the firewall is already enabled, the message ‘FIREWALL IS ENABLED’ is displayed. If the firewall is currently disabled, you are prompted to press Enter to enable it.

2 DISABLE FIREWALL 4This option lets you disable the firewall if it is enabled.

To disable the firewall, press 2 and Enter. If the firewall is already disabled, the message ‘FIREWALL IS DISABLED’ is displayed. If the firewall is currently enabled, you are prompted to press Enter to disable it.

3 ADD FIREWALL ADV SETTINGS 4This option lets you specify which ports can be used to communicate with specific services.

A series of screens prompts for the details required to specify a port for a service. To specify a port for a service, complete the following steps:

1 Press 3 and Enter

2 Select the protocol type. This is either TCP/IP or UDP

3 Enter the port number for the internal port. This must be a number between 0 and 65535

4 Enter the port number for the external port. This must be a number between 0 and 65535

5 Enter a name for the service




6 Select whether to identify the target type using a name or an IP address

7 Enter the name or IP address.

If successful, the message ‘FIREWALL ADDED SUCCESSFULLY’ is displayed. If the setting already exists, the message ‘FIREWALL CONFIG ALREADY EXISTS’ is displayed.

4 DELETE FIREWALL ADV SETTINGS 4This option lets you remove ports that have previously been granted communications access.

A series of screens prompts for the details required to remove a port for a service. To remove a port for a service, complete the following steps:

1 Press 4 and Enter

2 Select the protocol type. This is either TCP/IP or UDP

3 Enter the port number for the internal port. This must be a number between 0 and 65535

4 Enter the port number for the external port. This must be a number between 0 and 65535.

If successful, the message ‘FIREWALL REMOVED SUCCESSFULLY’ is displayed. If the setting does not exist, the message ‘FIREWALL CONFIG NOT FOUND’ is displayed.

5 ENABLE ICMP ECHO 4This option enables inbound echo requests. This means that if this SST receives a ping request, it echoes the response back.

6 DISABLE ICMP ECHO 4This option disables inbound echo requests. This means that if this SST receives a ping request, it does not echo the response back.

7 ADD PROGRAM 4This option lets you add a program to the exception list to allow communication with the program.

The program must reside in one of the following paths, or subfolders of these paths:

● C:\Program Files\NCR APTRA\

● C:\Program Files\Common Files\NCR\

● C:\SSDS

Note: the C:\SSDS path is included for legacy purposes only.




To add a program, complete the following steps:

1 Enter 7 and Enter

2 Enter the name of the program you want to add

A confirmation screen names the program added to the exception list. If the program is not found, the error message ‘PROGRAM NOT FOUND’ is displayed.

8 DELETE PROGRAM 4This option lets you remove a program from the exception list to prevent communication with the program.

To add a program, complete the following steps:

1 Enter 8 and Enter

2 Enter the name of the program you want to remove

A confirmation screen names the program removed from the exception list. If the program is not found, the error message ‘PROGRAM NOT FOUND’ is displayed.

9 DISPLAY CONFIG 4This option displays the current firewall configuration.

10 PRINT CONFIG 4This option prints the current firewall configuration information to the default printer for the operator interface in use (receipt printer for the front facia interface and journal printer for the rear operator interface).


Note: The configuration information is not journalled in the EJ.

15 MULTI HOST IP (Multiple Host IP Address) 4

If the SST is configured as Server, this option allows the addition or removal of the IP address of the remote host to which a TCP/IP connection is established.

If the SST is configured as a Client, selecting this option displays the error message ‘INVALID COMMS LINK ID’.

The MULTI HOST IP menu contains the following options:

● “1 ADD REMOTE HOST IP”

● “2 REMOVE REMOTE HOST IP”




1 ADD REMOTE HOST IP 4This option lets you add an IP address for a remote host.


2 REMOVE REMOTE HOST IP 4This option lets you select an IP address to remove from a list of previously added remote host IP addresses.

16 NAMED RMT HOST 4

This option allows a named server to be specified as the remote host address, for example www.ncr.com. This name can be up to 29 characters in length.

Note: In CCM TCPIP, entering data using this option overwrites any entry made using the “0 RMT ADDRESS (Remote IP Address)” option described on page 4‐52.

17 XP KEEP ALIVE 4

This option lets you update the time in milliseconds used for the KeepAlive Time and Interval for TCP/IP.

By default this is set to 10,000 milliseconds.

18 SSL CONFIG 4

This option lets you enable or disable and configure SSL (secure sockets layer). SSL supports the encryption of transmitted data and the decryption of received data.

The SSL CONFIGURATION menu contains the following options:

● “1 ENABLE/DISABLE SSL”

● “2 CONFIGURE SSL”

To view and modify one of the options on the SSL configuration menu, enter the appropriate number for the required option.

1 ENABLE/DISABLE SSL 4This option lets you enable or disable SSL for a TPA connection.

Press Enter to toggle between enabled and disabled, or Cancel to return to the previous menu.

2 CONFIGURE SSL 4This option lets you configure SSL attributes used in the encryption and decryption of data.

The CONFIGURE SSL menu contains the following options:

● “1 KEY RENEGOTIATION INTRVL”

● “2 CHECK CRL FOR RECEIVED CERT”




● “3 CIPHER SUIT ALGORITHM”

● “4 RECEIVED CERT ISSUER”

● “5 RECEIVED CERT SUBJECT”

● “6 SECURE HANDSHAKE TIMEOUT”

● “7 SECURE PROTOCOL TYPE”

● “8 SESSION RENEGOTIATION INTRVL”

● “9 SUPPLIED CERT ID”

● “10 SUPPLIED CERT SUB”

● “11 CLOSE NOTIFICATION TOKEN”

● “12 VALIDATION ON CHAIN POLICY”

Selecting an option displays a screen containing the current setting and giving the option to update the value. After a new value is entered, a confirmation screen either confirms the successful update or gives an error if the update fails.

1 KEY RENEGOTIATION INTRVL 4This optional attribute specifies the period in seconds before which the SST requests a new encryption key.

The default setting is 0 seconds. The valid range is between 0 and 32767 seconds.

2 CHECK CRL FOR RECEIVED CERT 4This optional attribute specifies whether the received certificate must be validated against the Certificate Revoked List (CRL). The default is not to validate against the CRL.

3 CIPHER SUIT ALGORITHM 4This optional attribute specifies the cryptographic algorithm to use during SSL and transport layer security (TLS) operations. By default this is blank, the setting must be based on the certificate in use.

4 RECEIVED CERT ISSUER 4This optional attribute is used to validate the Issuer field of a received certificate. By default this is blank, the setting must be based on the certificate in use.

5 RECEIVED CERT SUBJECT 4This optional attribute is used to validate the Subject field of a received certificate. By default this is blank, the setting must be based on the certificate in use.

6 SECURE HANDSHAKE TIMEOUT 4This optional attribute specifies the period in milliseconds before which the initial handshake is considered to have failed.

The default setting is 0 milliseconds. The valid range is between 0 and 60000 milliseconds (one minute).




7 SECURE PROTOCOL TYPE 4This mandatory attribute specifies the secure protocol to use.

The default is SSL3TLS1 for PCI DSS compliance. Select from the following protocols:

● PCT1

● SSL2

● SSL3

● TLS1

● SSL3TLS1

● ALL.

8 SESSION RENEGOTIATION INTRVL 4This optional attribute specifies the period after which the SST requests a new SSL session.

The default setting is 6000 seconds. The valid range is between 0 and 32767 seconds.

9 SUPPLIED CERT ID 4This optional attribute specifies the Issuer field of a certificate that must be located.

10 SUPPLIED CERT SUB 4This optional attribute specifies the Subject field of a certificate that must be located.

11 CLOSE NOTIFICATION TOKEN 4This optional attribute specifies whether the SSL CLOSE_NOTIFY token is sent before terminating an SSL session or connection.

12 VALIDATION ON CHAIN POLICY 4This optional attribute enables or disables the validation of the certificate chain attached to a certificate. The default is to validate the certificate chain.

38 DIALUP CONFIG (Dialup Configuration menu) 4

Use this option to display the Dialup configuration menu by pressing 38 and Enter. This option requires the CCM VISA2 component to be installed. It can be configured through option 4 VISA 2. For more information about the CCM VISA2 component, refer to the online APTRA Documentation.

For dialup communications with Central, NCR provides default settings, which can be reconfigured through Supervisor if required.




The Dialup configuration menu contains the following options:

Figure 4-27 DIALUP CONFIG Menu

To view a submenu on the Dialup menu, enter the appropriate number. If you enter a number other than one of those displayed on the screen, the error message ‘INVALID FUNCTION’ is displayed and the prompt to select a function is redisplayed.

To redisplay the Dialup menu, press the CNL (Cancel) key.

Pressing the Cancel key while viewing a submenu redisplays the Dialup menu. Pressing Cancel when entering a submenu configuration option redisplays the submenu.

Selection of each menu item shows the current configuration with a prompt for the new configuration. If the Enter key is pressed at the prompt with no data entry, no update occurs.

Permissible Characters 4

When entering the following, you can use the characters described in Table 4‐7:

● Application Parameters menu options:

— BIN

— TID

● Modem Link menu options:

— MODEM INI STR

Note: The PRIMARY NO and SECONDARY NO menu options only accept the comma (,) as a special character.

● Network Address menu options:

— N/A STRING




Table 4-7 Dialup Characters

Associated Key Character Name

1 1 numeric ʹ1ʹ

A character ʹAʹ

B character ʹBʹ

C character ʹCʹ

2 2 numeric ʹ2ʹ

D character ʹDʹ

E character ʹEʹ

F character ʹFʹ

3 3 numeric ʹ3ʹ

G character ʹGʹ

H character ʹHʹ

I character ʹIʹ

4 4 numeric ʹ4ʹ

J character ʹJʹ

K character ʹKʹ

L character ʹLʹ

5 5 numeric ʹ5ʹ

M character ʹMʹ

N character ʹNʹ

O character ʹOʹ

6 6 numeric ʹ6ʹ

P character ʹPʹ

Q character ʹQʹ

R character ʹRʹ

7 7 numeric ʹ7ʹ

S character ʹSʹ

T character ʹTʹ

U character ʹUʹ




8 8 numeric ʹ8ʹ

V character ʹVʹ

W character ʹWʹ

X character ʹXʹ

9 9 numeric ʹ9ʹ

Y character ʹYʹ

Z character ʹZʹ

. full stop (period)

0 0 numeric ʹ0ʹ

‐ hyphen

space

: colon

FDK A ! exclamation mark

ʺ double quotation mark

# number sign (hash)

$ dollar sign

% percent sign

& ampersand

FDK B = equal sign

> greater‐than sign

? question mark

@ at sign

[ left square bracket

\ backslash

FDK I ʹ apostrophe

( left parenthesis

) right parenthesis

* asterisk

+ plus sign

, comma





Entering Characters 4

Alphanumeric characters are entered using numeric and FDK keys as shown on the screen. Screens allowing alphanumeric characters will be similar to that illustrated in Figure 4‐28.

Figure 4-28 Example Alphanumeric screen

To enter a particular character, press the related key repeatedly until you reach the character you require, then press Enter.

For example, to enter (HELLO) for the BIN option do the following:

1 Press the FDK I key twice for the opening bracket, (, then Enter

2 Press the 3 key three times for the H, then Enter

3 Press the 2 key three times for the E, then Enter



6 Press the 5 key four times for the O, then Enter

7 Press the FDK I key three times for the closing bracket, ), then Enter

FDK G / forward slash

; semi colon

< less‐than sign

] right square bracket

^ caret

‐ hyphen





Application Parameters Menu 4

The Application Parameters menu contains the following options:

Figure 4-29 Application Parameters Menu

The options have the following functions:

Table 4-8 Application Parameters for Dialup Configuration

Option Description

1 BIN Communications access routing information, part of the dialup header message.6 or 7 characters can be entered; if 6 characters are entered, the Supervisor application inserts a leading stop (for example, .123456).The characters are entered as described in “Entering Characters” on page 4‐58.To enter 6 characters, press Enter twice after the final character. When entering 7 characters, the final Enter press completes the entry.The keys are stored and you are returned to the previous menu.The default value is 0000000.

2 TID Terminal identification information, part of the dialup header.6 characters The characters are entered as described in “Entering Characters” on page 4‐58.The default value is 000000.




3 TRAN CMP MSG Transaction completion message: option to determine whether a message will be sent to indicate the transaction is complete, and control the message type values sent in the dialup header for all SST‐to‐host messages. Boolean value: 0 for no transaction completion message, and ʹEQʹ, ʹECʹ and ʹEPʹ for the message type values; 1 for a transaction completion message, and ʹRQʹ, ʹCCʹ and ʹCPʹ for the message type values. The default is 1.

4 HOST MSG HEAD Host message header: option to determine whether a host to SST message will have a header; Boolean value: 0 for no host message header; 1 for a header. The default is 0.

5 ACT TIMER Activity timer: number of seconds (0‐25,500) the application will wait before redialling and sending an I’m Alive message; if 0 is entered, the application will wait indefinitely. The default value is 3000 seconds.

6 MSG SUPPRESS Message suppression: option to suppress SST‐ to‐host messages for Alarms and Supervisor key presses; journal update messages will still be sent. Boolean value: 0 to send the messages; 1 to suppress the messages. The default value is 0.

7 MSG ON CP Message on completion: option to determine whether the connection will remain up for the duration of the CP timer after sending a complete message (CP or EP), to allow Central time to send an additional message. Boolean value: 0 to drop the connection after a complete message sent; 1 to maintain the connection for the duration of the timer. The default value is 0.

8 CP MSG TIMER Number of seconds (0‐255) the SST will wait for an additional message from Central after sending a transaction complete message, before ending the transaction and disconnecting. The default is 30 seconds.

Option Description




Modem Link Menu 4

The Modem Link menu contains the following options:

Figure 4-30 Modem Link Menu

9 ERR REDIAL Number of seconds (0‐2550) the SST will wait before redialling, following an unsuccessful attempt to dial up to send the power fail message. Also used for the re‐transmission of the Iʹm Alive message after a connection failure or time‐out waiting for a host message. The default is 300 seconds.

10 SUPP CASH LOW Suppression of status messages with a supplies status of ‘2’ ‐ notes low for each cassette.The default is no suppression of the messages (0).Alternatively, enter the number of consecutive messages that can be sent to Central (1‐9) before messages are suppressed. This setting applies to each cassette individually.

Option Description





Table 4-9 Modem Link Configuration

Entering Primary and Secondary Numbers 4Numeric characters are entered using the numeric keys. A comma can be entered using

Option Description

1 PRIMARY NO Primary telephone number: used first when dialling; up to 25 characters can be entered; mandatory. The default value is provided by the CCM VISA2 component.Characters are entered as described in “Entering Primary and Secondary Numbers.”

2 SECONDARY NO Secondary telephone number: used if connection to the primary number fails; up to 25 characters can be entered; optional. The default value is provided by the CCM VISA2 component.Characters are entered as described in “Entering Primary and Secondary Numbers.”

3 CONNECT TMR Modem connect timer: number of seconds (0‐255) to continue dialling; mandatory. The default is 35 seconds.

4 DIAL MODE Modem dialling mode, pulse or tone: Boolean value, 0 for pulse, 1 for tone; mandatory.The default value is tone.

5 CMD RSP TMR Modem command response timer: number of seconds (1‐20) to respond to a command; mandatory.The default is 15 seconds.

6 MODEM INI STR Modem initialisation string: up to 64 characters can be entered. The characters are entered as described in “Entering Characters” on page 4‐58.The default value is provided by the CCM VISA2 component.




FDK B. The PRIMARY NO screen will be similar to that illustrated in Figure 4‐31.

Figure 4-31 Example PRIMARY NO screen

To enter a number, press the related key. To enter a comma, press FDK B. When you have finished, press Enter.

Serial Link Menu 4

The Serial Link menu contains the following options:

Figure 4-32 Serial Link Menu





Table 4-10 Serial Link Configuration

CCM VISA 2 Menu 4

The VISA2 menu contains the following options:

Figure 4-33 CCM VISA2 Menu

Option Description

1 COM PORT Communications port number to assign to the modem; must be the COM port the modem is connected to; only values in the range 1‐9999 are valid. The default is 1.

2 BAUD RATE Baud setting options as follows. 1 = 300 baud2 = 1200 baud3 = 2400 baud4 = 4800 baud5 = 9600 baud6 = 14400 baudThe default baud rate is 1200.

3 DATA BITS Number of data bit options as follows:7 = 7 data bits8 = 8 data bitsThe default value is 8.

4 PARITY Parity setting options as follows:1 = none2 = odd3 = even4 = mark5 = spaceThe default value is none.

5 STOP BITS Number of stop bit options as follows: 1 = one stop bit2 = two stop bitsThe default value is one stop bit.





Table 4-11 CCM VISA2 Configuration

Option Description

1 ENQ TMR Enquiry timer: number of seconds (0‐255) to wait for the ENQ character before terminating the call; mandatory.The default is 55 seconds.

2 MSG RETRIES Message retries: number of times (0‐9) to try sending the message again.The default is 2 retries.

3 ACK TIMER Acknowledge timer: number of seconds (0‐255) to wait for an acknowledgement; mandatory.The default is 60 seconds.

4 ENQ AFTR ACK Enquiry after acknowledgement: option to send an enquiry after receiving an acknowledgement; Boolean value, 0 to disable, 1 to send; mandatory.The default value is 0.

5 CNT LIFE TIME Connect life time: point at which to start the timers for the duration of the connection; mandatory. Options are:1 = NORMAL (in transaction)2 = PREDIAL (in session).The default is NORMAL.

6 DIAL SND TIMER Dial on sending a message timer: number of seconds (0‐255) to wait; mandatory. The default is 20 seconds.

7 BACKOFF TMR Backoff timer to support CCM VISA2 error recovery: number of milliseconds (100‐10000) between connection attempts to allow the modem, telephone line and other hardware to return to a stable state before the next attempt to establish a connection; mandatory. The default is 5000 milliseconds.




Network Address Menu 4

The Network Address menu contains the following options:

Figure 4-34 Dialup Network Address Menu


Table 4-12 Network Address Configuration

Copy Dialup Configuration Menu 4

Selecting option 6, COPY ON/OFF, displays a menu with two options. These two options allow the SST dialup and application configuration details to be copied to or from removable media, as described below. This option can be used for the following:

● To back up current settings

● To configure settings without using the Dialup menus

● To configure Diagnostics.

Option Description

1 N/A OPTION Network address option: enables or disables the transmission of the network address. Boolean value: 0 to disable network address transmission, 1 to enable it.The default value is 0.

2 N/A DLY TMR Network address delay timer: number of milliseconds (0‐1000) to wait before sending the network address; optional.The default is 0 milliseconds.

3 N/A RSP TMR Network address response timer: number of milliseconds (0‐5000) to wait for a response; optional.The default is 0 milliseconds.

4 N/A STRING Network address string: up to 32 characters. The characters are entered as described in “Entering Characters” on page 4‐58.The default value is NULL.




Dialup Configuration 4The dialup configuration details are held in an XML file, visa2communicationserviceconfig.xml. Select option 1, COPY ON, to copy the file from the removable media to c:\program files\ncr aptra\bin\config on the SST. Select option 2, COPY OFF, to copy this file from the SST to the removable media.

Application Configuration 4The application configuration details are held in the SST registry. Select option 3, COPY ON, to update the registry with details from the XML file in the removable media. Select option 4, COPY OFF, to create a new XML file from the registry configuration and transfer it to the removable media.

Diagnostics 4

Selecting option 7, Diagnostics, lets you view the current configuration of the modem, and run tests. For each test, a “Please wait...” screen is displayed, followed by the test output. The following tests are available:

Table 4-13 Dialup Diagnostics Options

Note 1: If this test succeeds, it restores the modem to the last saved configuration then re‐initialises it with the XML‐configured INIT string.

Note 2: As dial tones can vary depending on the country or exchange being used, failure of this test may indicate that the modem has failed to recognise the dial tone received, rather than failing to detect a dial tone.

For more information about modem configuration refer to the APTRA on‐line documentation for the CCM VISA2 component.

Option Description

1 Reset Modem Attempts to reset the modem, and displays the status returned by the modem. See Note 1:

2 Dial Tone Test Checks whether a dial tone is available, and displays the status returned by the modem. See Note 2:

3 Good Number Dial Test

Displays a screen requesting the number to be used in the test; attempts to dial the number; displays the call status returned by the modem.

4 Query Modem Configuration

Displays the current active modem configuration.




39 GBRU/GBNA CONFIGURATION 4

This option initiates the GBXX cassette configuration based on an XML file. For more information on GBXX configuration, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Developer’s Guide.

Once in progress, the following message is displayed:

PLEASE WAIT

THIS PROCEDURE MAY TAKE

UP TO 5 MINUTES

If the cassette configuration completes successfully without changes required to registry settings, the following message is displayed:

CONFIGURATION SUCCESSFUL

PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

If registry settings have been changed, the following message is displayed:

RESTART REQUIRED

PRESS ENTER TO RESTART ATM

PRESS CANCEL TO RESTART LATER

Caution: This option must be run again immediately after the restart.

The registry settings are changed, and applied on the reboot. When the SST restarts, select this option again to complete the GBXX cassette configuration. You must ensure that the second reboot occurs.

For details of error messages, see “GBXX Configuration Error Messages” on page B‐20.

44 TROUBLESHOOTING 4

Use this option to display the Troubleshooting menu by pressing 44 and Enter.

If Problem Determination (PD) is installed on your SST, you can use options 1, 2 and 3 to run PD from Supervisor.

Silent Debug is installed with Advance NDC, you can use options 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 to control Silent Debug from Supervisor.

For details of error messages that may occur, see sections “PD Error Messages” and “Error Messages” in Appendix B, “Error Messages”.




Figure 4-35 Troubleshooting Options Screen

PD Investigation Options 4

If Problem Determination (PD) is installed on the SST, you can use the following options to run PD from Supervisor to carry out an investigation.

1 START 4Press 1 and Enter to start a new investigation.

The message ‘INVESTIGATION STARTED’ is displayed when this option is selected.

A new investigation can be started only after any earlier investigation has been stopped and its log file exported to removable media.

2 STOP 4Press 2 and Enter to stop the active investigation.

The message ‘INVESTIGATION STOPPED’ is displayed when this option is selected.

An investigation must be stopped before it can be exported to removable media.

3 COPY LOGS 4Press 3 and Enter to copy the PD investigation log files to removable media.

Note: Before attempting to copy logs, you must ensure that removable media is present and that any necessary formatting has been carried out.

The investigation log file contains the messages that relate to ʹMessageinʹ, ʹMessageoutʹ and debug information. If you want to view the investigation log file using the Problem Determination Analysis utility, do so before copying the file as it is deleted once the copy is complete.




Selecting option 3 COPY LOGS performs the following sequence of actions:

1 Copies the investigation log file to an intermediate folder on the SST, <drive>:\Program Files\NCR APTRA\Advance NDC\Investigations

2 Compresses the log file

3 Copies the compressed file to removable media as cab1.cab

4 Deletes the investigation log files from the PD Investigations folder and the intermediate folder on the SST.

Once the file has been successfully transferred to removable media, displays the message ‘EXPORT COMPLETE’.

For details of error messages that may occur, see “PD Error Messages”.

Silent Debug Options 4

4 START 4Press 4 and Enter to start Silent Debug logging.

When Silent Debug is successfully started, ‘SILENTDEBUG STARTED’ is displayed. If Silent Debug fails to start, ‘SILENTDEBUG NOT STARTED’ is displayed.

If the SST is automatically shut down while Silent Debug is running, Silent Debug will start automatically when the SST reboots.

5 STOP 4Press 5 and Enter to stop Silent Debug logging.

When Silent Debug logging is successfully stopped, ‘SILENTDEBUG STOPPED’ is displayed. If Silent Debug fails to stop, ‘SILENTDEBUG NOT STOPPED’ is displayed.

6 RECONFIGURE 4Press 6 and Enter to reconfigure Silent Debug by replacing the SilentDebug.ini file.

You must have a new configuration file, named SilentDebug.ini, stored in the root directory of the selected drive. A screen listing the available drives is displayed to allow selection of the drive. The new configuration file is copied from the selected drive to the SST.

Note: Silent Debug must be stopped before running this function.

If the new file is successfully validated, ‘SILENTDEBUG CONFIGURED’ is displayed.

The current SilentDebug.ini file is backed up in case the new file is not successfully validated. If the new file is not successfully




validated, the back up is reinstated and ‘NOT CONFIGURED’ is displayed.

7 COPY LOGS 4Press 7 and Enter to copy the Silent Debug log files to removable media.

Removable media can be a diskette, DVD, USB, CD or network drive (if supported by the SST). If removable drives with sufficient memory are identified, they are listed in the drive selection screen.

Enter the number associated with the drive to copy the log file to the selected destination.

8 DELETE LOGS 4Press 8 and Enter to delete all files with an extension .log from the C:\Program Files\NCR APTRA\Advance NDC\Debug directory.

NCR recommends that the COPY LOGS option is run before the DELETE LOGS option.

Note: Silent Debug must be stopped before running this function.

45 MAX STATEMENT LENGTH 4

This option lets you specify the maximum number of lines to be printed on the statement printer before an automatic form feed. The default is 20.

This option ensures that the statement will be cut when the black mark is not used. If the black mark is used, multiple cuts may occur.

To use this option, press 45 and Enter. The following prompt is displayed:

ENTER MAXIMUM STATEMENT LENGTH-

Enter a number between 12 and 92, for the maximum number of lines to be printed. Ensure that you statement printer supports the number of lines that you have entered. For example, the NCR USB statement printer supports a maximum of 88 lines.

If successful, the replenish values are redisplayed. Otherwise, the following error message is displayed:

INVALID VALUE




46 SELECT COMMS TYPE (Select Communications Type) 4

This option lets you select the type of communication that is configured on the SST.

Enter the number associated with the type of communications you want to configure on the SST. You can select from the following communication types:

● TCP/IP

● PCCM

● DIALUP VISA2.

After changing the communications type, you must restart the SST to update the communications configuration.

47 EXTENDED ADD CASH 4

The Extended Add Cash option displays the Add Cash menu. This allows you to set up cassettes for first time use on other vendors’ SSTs.

Figure 4-36 Add Cash Menu Options

These options enable cash replenishment functions to be carried out, if required.

The sequence of the menu options ensures correct operation of the replenished units. If you need to use these menu options, the sequence must be followed to ensure correct configuration.

0 Exchange Cash Units 4

This option supports SSTs with cassettes that are physically locked until Exchange Mode is explicitly started.

Selecting this option displays a screen informing you that Exchange mode has begun and cassettes can now be physically changed.

After re‐inserting all cassettes, press Enter to continue.

SELECT FUNCTION-

7 SET REJECT THRESHOLD6 UPDATE NOTE TYPES5 TEST CASH4 CALIBRATE CASH UNITS3 ADD CASH2 CLEAR CASH1 CONFIGURE CASH UNITS0 EXCHANGE CASH UNITS

ADD CASH




Caution If cassettes are removed outside Exchange mode, the cassettes will enter a fatal state. To restore the fitness of the cassettes, use option 0 EXCHANGE CASH UNITS to pass through Exchange mode.

Note: Using this option may result in cash counts being cleared for some cassette types. See “4 Calibrate Cash Units” on page 4‐75 for further information.

1 Configure Cash Units 4

This option allows you to update the service provider settings of currency and value for each position in the cash handler device.

The following illustration shows the current cassette mapping.

Figure 4-37 Cassette Mapping screen

If the NDC type configuration is not correct and does not match the host, use the Update Note Types option to correct it.

Each cassette position is identified in the cassette mapping screen as follows:

● Physical position; for example, TOP

● Currency; for example, GBP

● Value; for example 10

If a cassette is not installed in any position, that position will be blank.

To reconfigure a cassette, do the following:

1 Select the number identifying the cassette.

The Update SP Currency ID screen, illustrated below, allows you to update the currency of the cassette.




Figure 4-38 Update SP Currency ID

2 Select the relevant number from the option list to change the currency currently displayed,

Pressing Enter without selecting a new currency maintains the current currency for this cassette position.

The cassette position is shown as the current setting, as shown in the following illustration.

Figure 4-39 Update SP Media Value

3 Enter the new value at the prompt to change the value for the current cassette.

If changes have been made to either the currency or value, the PLEASE WAIT screen is displayed while the update is processed.

After an update, you are returned to the Cassette Mapping screen. Successfully updated information is shown on the Cassette Mapping screen.




4 You must clear the counts and add them to the new configuration. This is because the cassette mapping has changed, and the ANDC cash counters will therefore be invalid.

A successful update is traced to the journal. An example trace is shown below:

SP UPDATE - NEW VALUE FOR

BOTTOM CASS

CURRENCYID= GBP

VALUE= 5

If no updates are made, you are returned to the Cassette Mapping menu.

Note 1. Successful configuration through this option may cause a tamper trace. This is due to ANDC detecting cash unit changed events. Tamper traces come in pairs, and indicate that the updated cassette has been removed and re‐added to the system list of cassettes.

2 Clear Cash 4

Is included in this menu for your convenience. It duplicates the function of the “CLR CASH” option on the Replenish Menu described in the APTRA Advance NDC, Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual.

3 Add Cash 4

Is included in this menu for your convenience. It duplicates the function of the “ADD CASH” option on the Replenish Menu, see page page 3‐16. This option allows you to update note counts on all four types. It also adjusts the Cash-Unit-Info value maintained by the CDM service provider. For details of this value, refer to the Extensions for Financial Services (XFS) interface specification (CWA 14050).

4 Calibrate Cash Units 4

This option allows you to calibrate physical cassettes based on their position. When this option is selected, the following screen is displayed:




Figure 4-40 First Calibrate Cash Unit screen

To use this option, sufficient notes must be present in the cash dispenser and the logical type in the service provider must have a positive note count. This means that calibration can only be performed when cassettes are inserted and configured with the correct types and note counts.

The purpose of calibration at this point is to clear errors from cassette units that have recently been reconfigured. To fully verify calibration, the number of notes purged during calibration must match the requested notes. If there is a difference in the note requested and those purged, it indicates adjustment may be required to the cash handler or the cassette loading procedure.

Note: Cassettes requiring calibration can be identified using the fault display. Cassettes with a NOTE ERR require calibration.

To calibrate the cash unit, do the following:

1 Select the number identifying the cassette position to recalibrate.

The second Calibrate Cash Unit screen is displayed, as illustrated below.




Figure 4-41 Second Calibrate Cash Unit screen

2 Enter the number of notes at the prompt.

Note: Calibration may not require all the notes specified. Any that are used are put into the reject bin.

The PLEASE WAIT screen is displayed while the calibration is performed.

If calibration fails, you must use the Vendors’ Native Diagnostics application. This is available as option “7 DIAGNOSTIC” on the “Select Menu” and allows you to check the status of the cassette and try to resolve the issue. If no vendor diagnostics application is available, you can use the “27 MV DIAG (MV Diagnostics)” option on the “Select Menu”.

Calibration may not be supported by the SP. In this situation, use Test Cash to determine whether the cassettes are correctly configured.

5 Test Cash 4

Is included in this menu for your convenience. It duplicates the function of the Replenish Menu option, see “10 TEST CASH” on page 3‐22 for further information.

6 Update Note Types 4

This option allows you to maintain the mapping between logical cassette units and Advance NDC cassette types. For details of the mapping table, see Currency Cassette Types Registry Settings in the APTRA Advance NDC, Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual.

The registry settings are displayed to assist you. The display also shows whether the SP can dispense cash from each cassette setting (OK if correct or NO DISP if not). If the SP cannot dispense cash, you must either enter the correct setting to match the Cash Handler




SP or reconfigure the Cash Handler SP using the “1 Configure Cash Units” option. Any attempt to dispense, add cash or clear cash from a cassette that is not mapped will fail, as follows:

● An attempt to dispense causes a stack error with journal trace and status message.

● An attempt to add or clear cash has no effect, that is, the operation is not performed and no journal trace or status message is generated.

When Update Note Types is selected, you are prompted for the Advance NDC cassette type requiring update. Then a sequence of screens is displayed allowing you to see and update the current settings for currency ID, media type and media value. If the Cancel key is pressed at any time, the current setting is retained and the next screen is displayed.

Update Currency ID 4The first screen is Update Currency ID and enables the currency cassette mapping table to be updated with the new currency for the selected cassette type. The current setting is displayed with four available currencies for you to choose from. Select a number corresponding to the required currency. If Enter is pressed, the Currency ID remains unchanged, otherwise the currency cassette mapping table will be updated with the selected ISO code once all selections are completed. The default currencies are shown in the following illustration.

Figure 4-42 Update Currency ID

Update Media Type 4The second screen is Update Media Type. The current setting for the selected cassette is displayed, with three settings for you to choose from. If Enter is pressed, the media value will remain unchanged, otherwise the currency cassette mapping table will be updated with the number of the selected media type once all selections are completed.

UPDATE CURRENCY ID

CURRENT SETTINGCASSETTE 1CURRENCY = GBP

1. USD2. GBP3. EUR4. INR

ENTER CURRENCY ID -




Figure 4-43 Update Media Type

Update Media Value 4The third screen is Update Media Value. The current setting for the selected cassette is displayed and a prompt is offered to modify the setting. The currency cassette mapping table will be updated with the entered value once all selections are completed. If Enter is pressed, the media value will remain unchanged.

Figure 4-44 Update Media Value

After you have responded to the third screen, the application checks whether any setting has changed. If not, the display returns to the Add Cash menu and FUNCTION CANCELLED is reported.

If any setting is changed, the registry settings for the Advance NDC cassette type are also updated.

It is important that the combination of settings is valid. If the cassette configuration is invalid, an entry is placed in the Application event log. For details of the invalid settings, see “Cassette Mapping Limitations” in the APTRA Advance NDC, Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual.

7 Set Reject Threshold 4

This option accommodates the different capacities of other vendors’ hardware. You can specify the threshold for notes deposited in the reject bin to trigger a device status of high.

UPDATE MEDIA TYPE

CURRENT SETTINGCASSETTE 1MEDIA = CASH

1. CASH2. COUPON\VOUCHER3. DOCUMENT

ENTER MEDIA TYPE -

UPDATE MEDIA VALUE

CURRENT SETTINGCASSETTE 1VALUE = 5

ENTER MEDIA VALUE -




Figure 4-45 Update Reject Bin Threshold

If a valid figure is entered, the cash unit for the reject bin is updated with the new threshold on either the next CLR CASH operation or reboot of the SST. In the event of a system restart, the value is re‐applied to the reject bin.

80 DISP CSH/ACC CONFIG 4

If the Bunch Note Acceptor (BNA) is present, this option displays the BNA configuration settings.

Fifty note denominations are displayed on successive screens, showing the country code and the denomination in the DmXX column, and whether the notes are active or inactive.

Figure 4-46 BNA Cash Configuration

For example, a BNA configured to accept US ten‐dollar notes will display the setting ‘US10’ followed by the number of notes of that denomination, followed by whether the note is active or inactive.

If the BNA is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. See Appendix B, “Error Messages” for details.

81 PRNT CSH/ACC CONFIG 4

If the Bunch Note Acceptor (BNA) is present, this option prints the information displayed by the BNA configuration screen. On print completion, the message ‘CONFIG PRINTD’ is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

UPDATE REJECT BINTHRESHOLD

CURRENT SETTING

= 100

ENTER NEW THRESHOLD -

THRESHOLD




If the BNA or printer is not present, the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. See Appendix B, “Error Messages” for details.

82 GBNA.INI CONFIG 4

If the GBNA is present, this option allows you to select (activate), the denominations accepted by the GBXX during a transaction and reported to the host.

The GBNA.ini file is automatically created if a GBNA is detected. This menu option can then be used to select or deselect (deactivate) the denominations to be accepted and reported.

Available denominations are shown in the screen, as illustrated in Figure 4‐47.

Figure 4-47 GBNA.INI Config screen

More denominations can be displayed by pressing Next or, on subsequent screens, Previous.

Entering the number toggles the setting of that denomination between selected (activated) and deselected (deactivated).

Selected denominations are shown with a hyphen (‐). These denominations are accepted by the GBXX and reported to the host in the order defined in the GBNA.ini file.

Deselected denominations are shown with a hash (#). These denominations are rejected by the GBXX and are not reported to the host.

In the illustration above, only EUR5, EUR10 and EUR50 notes are accepted and included in the host message

For example, if you enter 1 and the associated denomination is currently selected, it is deselected and no longer included in the report. If you enter 3 and the associated denomination is currently deselected, it is selected and will be included in the next report.

When you have finished selecting and deselected denominations, press Confirm.




84 POWERUP MSG 4

The POWERUP MSG option allows you to select whether to send a power up message to indicate that communications have been restored after a loss of connection. When this option is selected, you can choose to enable (1) or disable (0) this behaviour. The default value is 0.

99 MORE 4

The MORE option allows you to switch between the two parts of the Configure menu. You can select any menu option by number from either screen, regardless of whether it is currently displayed or not.

Table of ContentsAccess Menu



Chapter 5

Access Menu

Access Menu 5‐2

0 DISP ACCESS (Display Access) 5‐3

1 PRNT ACCESS (Print Access) 5‐4

2 SET PASSWRD (Set Password) 5‐4

3 INIT ENTRY (Initial Entry) 5‐5

4 INIT DISPLY (Initial Display) 5‐5

5 EXIT MODE 5‐6

6 ENTER V 5‐6

7 WRITE V 5‐7

8 ENTER A 5‐8

9 WRITE A 5‐9

10 ENTER B 5‐9

11 WRITE B 5‐10

12 ENTER MAC 5‐10

13 SET ACCESS 5‐11

14 HALLMARK 5‐12

25 KEY ENTRY 5‐12

Key Entry Mode 5‐13

Changing the Key Entry Mode 5‐13

Entering a New Key 5‐14

Key Mode 1: Single‐Length Key Entry without XOR 5‐15

Key Mode 2: Single‐Length Key Entry with XOR 5‐15

Key Mode 3: Double‐Length Key Entry with XOR 5‐17

Key Mode 4: Double‐Length Key Entry with XOR Restricted5‐18

Table of ContentsAccess Menu



Overview

-1



Access MenuE

Overview 5

This chapter describes the standard options available in the Access menu, and how to use them.

Use the Access menu options to set or change passwords, to enter encryption keys or to specify which menu is to appear when you enter Supervisor mode.

If you are responsible for the initial setting‐up of the terminal, NCR recommends that you read this chapter.

Access MenuAccess Menu



Access Menu 5

When Advance NDC is loaded onto the terminal, no Supervisor password or access information is present. Therefore no password request is made when you select the Access menu for the first time. For security reasons, establish a password immediately. This will consist of four numeric digits. For details of how to do this, see “2 SET PASSWRD (Set Password)” on page 5‐4.

When you select this option on subsequent occasions, the following prompt is displayed:

ENTER PASSWORD -

To enter the password, complete the following steps:

1 Enter the current password. Each digit is echoed as an asterisk ‘*’.

2 Press Enter.

The Access menu is displayed if the password is correct.

You are allowed up to five attempts to enter the password from the facia, or one attempt from the operator interface, before the Select menu is redisplayed.

Once the maximum number of attempts has been used, a security trace message is recorded on the local journal log, either electronically or as hard copy. See the passage “Security Trace Messages” on page 7‐4 for details.

The following figure shows the options available from the standard Access menu.

Figure 5-1 Access Menu




Note 1: Options 6 to 11 can be used only when the key entry mode (key mode) is the default of 1 for single‐length keys without XOR. You can use option 25, Key Entry to change the key mode or enter any type of key, single or double‐length, with or without XOR. However, you can enter double‐length keys only when an EPP is configured.

Note 2: Selecting option ‘14’ HALLMARK will cause an error to be displayed.

Note 3: If APTRA Promote is installed on the SST, the Access menu will include the following additional options:

● 15 COPYFILE

● 20 PROMOTE

For details of APTRA Promote, refer to the APTRA Promote User’s Guide.

0 DISP ACCESS (Display Access) 5

The DISP ACCESS option displays the Access data configuration on the screen. The screen is defined by reserved screen ‘I10’.

Select this option to display the following access data:

Figure 5-2 DISP ACCESS Screen

If an EPP has been configured, a Key Verification Value (KVV) is displayed for each key entered, next to the specific key. If the first four digits of any key are zeros, KEY LOADED is displayed next to the specific key. If a key has not been entered, no value is displayed. If no EPP is configured, the KVVs are not available and N/A is displayed for all the KVV values.

If a BAPE has been configured, a checksum is displayed on the DISP ACCESS screen.




You can return to the Access menu by pressing the Cancel key or you can select another function by entering its Access menu option number.

1 PRNT ACCESS (Print Access) 5

The PRNT ACCESS option prints the Access data configuration on the operator printer or writes it to the EJ (electronic journal).

This option is equivalent to DISP ACCESS, except that the information is printed on the receipt or journal printer, or written to the EJ file. If there is no printer or EJ configured, this option is invalid and generates the error message ‘DEVICE NOT PRESENT’. This error is also generated when the default printer to be used is the journal and the journal device is inoperable and there is no journal backup running. If the required printer is configured but the print operation fails, the error message ‘PRINT FAILURE’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.


When you select this option, successful completion is confirmed with the following message:

ACCESS DATA PRINTED

2 SET PASSWRD (Set Password) 5

The SET PASSWRD option lets you set the password that controls entry to the Access and Configure menus. A security message will be logged on the journal to register that the password has been changed.

Use this option as follows:

1 Press 2 and the Enter key.

The prompt ENTER NEW PASSWORD - appears.

2 Enter a four digit number and press Enter.

The prompt ENTER PASSWORD - appears.

3 Enter the old password and press Enter. If the password has not already been set, just press Enter.

The prompt ENTER NEW PASSWORD - appears.

4 Enter the new password again and press Enter.

If you have followed the prompts correctly, the new password is established as the current password. If the sequence is incorrect, you are returned to the Access menu.




You must use the new password on all subsequent entries to the Access and Configuration menus.

A security trace message is sent to the local journal log to indicate that a password change has been completed. For details, see the passage “Security Trace Messages” on page 7‐4.

If you enter an invalid value, or the passwords do not match, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

The password is automatically saved to disk when SET PASSWRD successfully completes; there is no need to perform a separate SET ACCESS function.

In Advance NDC, the password is also automatically saved to persistent storage, and hence is used on power failure recovery.

3 INIT ENTRY (Initial Entry) 5

The INIT ENTRY option lets you select the menu that is first displayed on entering Supervisor mode. This can be either the Select menu, which is the default, the Replenish menu or an Exit Supervisor.

When you select this option the following prompt is displayed:

ENTER INITIAL MENU -

Enter one digit and press the Enter key. The following values are available:

● 0 ‐ Select menu

● 1 ‐ Replenish menu

● 2 ‐ Exit Supervisor

The Select menu is the default.

In Advance NDC, the Initial Entry setting is automatically saved to persistent storage, and hence is used on power failure recovery.

If you enter an invalid value, the error message ‘INVALID VALUE’ is displayed and you are prompted to re‐enter the data. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

4 INIT DISPLY (Initial Display) 5

The INIT DISPLY option lets you select the interface to be used on entering Supervisor mode. This can be either the operator interface, which is the default, or the facia interface.

When you select this option the following prompt is displayed:

ENTER INITIAL DISPLAY -




Enter one digit and press the Enter key. The following values are available:

● 0 ‐ Operator interface/default

● 1 ‐ Facia interface.

The default interface is defined by the hardware configuration.

In Advance NDC, the Initial Display setting is automatically saved to persistent storage, and hence is used on power failure recovery.


5 EXIT MODE 5

The EXIT MODE option lets you set how the terminal leaves Supervisor mode. The following options exist:

● Automatic exit—the terminal will leave Supervisor mode automatically when the Supervisor mode switch is set to Normal, and the terminal is waiting for an option to be selected on any menu.

● No automatic exit—exit must be through the Select menu. This is the default setting. You select the Exit menu option and press Enter; then move the mode switch to Normal.

When you select this option, the following prompt is displayed:

ENTER EXIT TYPE -

Enter a digit and press the Enter key. The following values are available:

● 0 ‐ No automatic exit (Key/Switch)

● 1 ‐ Automatic exit (Auto).

In Advance NDC, the Exit Mode setting is automatically saved to file, and hence is used on power failure recovery.


6 ENTER V 5

The ENTER V option is used to enter the initial Visa Master Encryption Key, also known as the V key. This option is available only when the current Key Mode is 1(single length, no XOR).

The 16 hexadecimal digits that make up the V key can be entered independently by different operators as single digits during this option, to increase the security of this feature by reducing the possibility of any one person knowing the key.




If you select this option when the Key Mode is not 1, the error message ‘INVALID MODE’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

The entries are stored until you select the WRITE V function, when the encryption key is written to the encryptor.

When you select ENTER V, key legends for the FDKs to be used for digits A‐F are displayed, together with the following messages:

ENCRYPTION KEY V

CURRENT DIGIT = 01

ENTER KEY V-

If you make a mistake with a digit or change your mind, you must select the Cancel key and re‐enter the whole key. An XFS keyboard restriction does not allow a single digit to be cleared.

If you press the Enter key, a zero digit is accepted and the Current Digit counter is incremented.

Once you have entered a complete key the Access menu is redisplayed with following message:

KEY V ENTERED

If you select Cancel, the Access menu is redisplayed and the following message is displayed:

FUNCTION CANCELLED

Any data that you entered before pressing Cancel is ignored.

7 WRITE V 5

The WRITE V option writes the value you have entered using the option ENTER V to the Master Encryption key store of the encryptor.

When you select this option and press Enter, the following message is displayed:

KEY V STORED

If a journal printer or EJ is configured, the message KEY V STORED is written to the local journal log.

The key is written only if you have entered valid data for the entire key since the previous ‘WRITE V’ operation. If you select this option when the current key mode is not 1, or if insufficient or no key data is present, the error message ‘KEY DATA NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.




If an error occurs when storing the data in the encryptor, the error message ‘FAILED TO STORE KEY V’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

8 ENTER A 5

The ENTER A option is used to enter the initial Master Encryption Key, Key A. This option can be selected only when the key entry mode is 1 (single length, no XOR). If you want to enter Key A for mode 2 (single length, XOR), mode 3 (double length, XOR), or mode 4 (double length, XOR restricted) see “25 KEY ENTRY” on page 5‐12.

The 16 hexadecimal digits that make up the A Key can be entered independently by different operators as single digits to increase the security of this feature by reducing the possibility of any one person knowing the key.

If you select this option when the Key Mode is not 1, the error message ‘INVALID MODE’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

The entries are held until you select the WRITE A function, when the encryption key is stored in the encryptor.

When you select ENTER A, key legends for the FDKs to be used for digits A‐F are displayed, together with the following messages:

ENCRYPTION KEY A

CURRENT DIGIT = 01

ENTER KEY A-



Once you have entered a complete key the following message is displayed:

KEY A ENTERED

If you select Cancel, the Access menu is redisplayed and the following message is displayed:

FUNCTION CANCELLED





9 WRITE A 5

This option works in a similar way as the WRITE V key option but is used to store the Master Encryption Key, Key A, in the encryptor. This option is available only when the key entry mode is 1.

When the key is successfully stored, the confirmation message ‘KEY A STORED’ is displayed. If the terminal does not have an EPP configured, a checksum result of encrypted known data is also displayed. This can be used to confirm the correct key has been entered.

If a journal printer or EJ is configured, the message KEY A STORED is written to the local journal log.

The key is stored in the encryptor only if you have entered valid data for the entire key since the previous ‘WRITE A’ operation. If you select this option when the key mode is not 1, or insufficient or no key data is present, the error message ‘KEY DATA NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

If an error occurs when storing the data in the encryptor, the error message ‘FAILED TO STORE KEY A’ is displayed. See Appendix B, “Error Messages” for details.

10 ENTER B 5

This option is used to enter the Backup Communications Encryption Key, Key B. This option is available only when the key mode is 1 (single length, no XOR). If you want to enter Key B for mode 2 (single length, XOR), or mode 3 (double length, XOR) see “25 KEY ENTRY” on page 5‐12.

The 16 hexadecimal digits that make up Key B can be entered independently by different operators as single digits during this option, to increase the security of this feature by reducing the possibility of any one person knowing the key.



Once you have entered a complete key the following message is displayed:

KEY B ENTERED

If you select this option when the key mode is not 1, the error message ‘INVALID MODE’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.




If you select Cancel while entering the key, the Access menu is redisplayed and the following message is displayed:

FUNCTION CANCELLED


The entries are held until you select the WRITE B function, when the encryption key is stored in the encryptor.

11 WRITE B 5

This option works in the same way as the WRITE V key option but is used to write Key B to the encryptor.

When the key is successfully stored, a confirmation message is displayed. If you have a non‐EPP configured, a checksum result of encrypted known data is also displayed. This can be used to confirm the correct key has been entered.

If a journal printer or EJ is configured, the message KEY B STORED is written to the local journal log.

The key is stored only if you have entered valid data for the entire key since the previous ‘WRITE B’ operation. If you select this option when the key mode is not 1, or insufficient or no key data is present, the error message ‘KEY DATA NOT PRESENT’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

If an error occurs when storing the data in the encryptor, the error message ‘FAILED TO STORE KEY B’ is displayed. For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

12 ENTER MAC 5

The ENTER MAC option lets you enter the Message Authentication Code (MAC) number. The MAC number consists of a six‐digit machine number followed by ten one‐digit flags.

The flag settings indicate if Message Authentication is to be used and specify variations on how it is to be performed. For example:

● Include the Time Variant Number

● Include the Security Terminal Number

● MAC the whole message

● Use selective MACing.

For details of the flag settings, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual, Chapter 11, “Security Features”. For more information about MACing in Advance NDC, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Developer’s Guide.





1 Press 12 and the Enter key.

The prompt ENTER MAC - appears.

2 Enter up to 16 digits and press Enter.

If an incomplete machine number has been entered, the error message ‘INCOMPLETE DATA’ is displayed and you are prompted to re‐enter the data.

If fewer than ten flags are entered, the trailing flags are each set to zero.

Once you have entered the MAC number the following access data is displayed:

Figure 5-3 MAC Access Data Screen

If you press Enter without entering any data, message authentication is disabled, and the MAC NUMBER will appear blank on the above screen.

If you press Cancel, the message FUNCTION CANCELLED is displayed. This message appears above the SELECT FUNCTION- prompt on the Access menu.

In Advance NDC, the MAC number setting is automatically saved to persistent storage, and hence is used on power failure recovery.

13 SET ACCESS 5

The SET ACCESS option lets you write the following access settings to the hard disk:

● INIT DISPLY

● INIT ENTRY

● EXIT MODE.




This provides an additional backup, enabling the terminal to reload the access settings from the disk if the pmdata file is missing or becomes corrupt.

In Advance NDC, the access settings are automatically saved and hence are used on power failure recovery. You only need to use SET ACCESS if you wish to save the access settings to hard disk.

If you select this option, the following message is displayed:

ACCESS SET

14 HALLMARK 5

This option is not supported in Advance NDC.

25 KEY ENTRY 5

This option can be selected to change any encryption keys or the current key mode. Key modes 3 and 4 are available only when an Encrypting Pin Pad (EPP) has been configured. If secure key entry is enabled with International Security (DAPI‐7), only key mode 4 (double‐length key entry with XOR restricted) is available. For more information, see “Secure Key Entry” on page 5‐18.

Use this option to change the following:

● Key A (the Master Key)

● Key B (the Communications Key)

● Key V (the Visa Master Key)

● Key entry mode.

You can enter single or double‐length keys with or without XOR functionality. Double‐length keys provide Triple DES security.

When you select this option the following screen is displayed:

Figure 5-4 Key Entry Menu




Key Entry Mode 5

The current key mode can be either 1, 2, 3, or 4 as follows:

● 1 = single‐length key without XOR encryption

Key mode 1 is the default key mode

● 2 = single‐length key with XOR encryption

● 3 = double‐length key with XOR Triple DES encryption

Key mode 3 is valid only if an EPP is configured

● 4 = double‐length key with XOR Triple DES encryption in restricted mode

Key mode 4 is valid only if an EPP is configured and International Security is used. Only Key A can be entered locally when using key mode 4.

You can use the Key Entry menu at any time to change the keys without changing the current key mode; but if you want to change the current key mode as well, you must do this first as described in the next section.

Changing the Key Entry Mode 5

You would normally change the key entry mode before entering any keys, as changing the key entry mode deletes all the existing DES keys when the EPP encryptor is present. To change the key entry mode, complete the following steps:

1 On the Key Entry Mode menu at the KEY‐ prompt, enter 9 and press the Enter key to display the following screen:

Figure 5-5 Changing Key Entry Mode




2 Enter a value for the key entry mode you require (1, 2, 3 or 4) and press Enter to display the confirmation screen. In the following example, the Key Entry Mode is being changed from 1 to 3:

Figure 5-6 Confirming Key Entry Mode

3 Press 6 and Enter to confirm the new key entry mode and redisplay the Key Entry Mode menu.

Note 1: If an EPP is not configured for the terminal and mode 3 or 4 is selected, the error message ‘INVALID MODE’ is displayed.

Note 2: If a BAPE encryptor is present, the keys will not be deleted when a new key entry mode is selected.

Entering a New Key 5

You can enter a new A, B, or V key by selecting 0, 1, or 2 on the Key Entry menu. The method of entering a key depends on the current key mode. The following sections describe the method of entry for each mode using Key A as an example. Key B and Key V are entered in exactly the same way.

Note: If you make a mistake with a digit or change your mind, you must select the Cancel key and re‐enter the whole key. An XFS keyboard restriction does not allow a single digit to be cleared.




Key Mode 1: Single‐Length Key Entry without XOR 5

1 On the Key Entry menu, select 0 for Key A and press the Enter key to display the following screen:

Figure 5-7 Entering Key A, Single Length without XOR

2 At the prompt, enter 16 digits. The counter increments as you enter the digits. If you press the Enter key, this is accepted as a zero (0) digit and the counter is incremented.

Once you have entered 16 digits, the key is stored in the encryptor and you are returned to the Access menu where the message ‘KEY A STORED’ is displayed above the SELECT FUNCTION prompt.

If an EPP is configured, for every key entry, the KVV is displayed once data entry is complete. Select the Enter key to load the key. Select Cancel to discard the data.

Key Mode 2: Single‐Length Key Entry with XOR 5

Parts 1 and 2 must be entered in sequence before using the key. This is a requirement of the CEN‐XFS specification.

1 On the Key Entry menu, select 0 and press Enter to display the following screen:

Figure 5-8 Entering Key A, Single Length with XOR




2 Enter a number for the part you want to enter, as follows:

● 1 to enter part 1 of the key

● 2 to enter part 2 of the key

● 3 to enter parts 1 and 2 of the key

If part 1 is loaded, you cannot enter part 1 again until part 2 is loaded. If you select part 1 for a second time, the error message ‘PART 1 ALREADY SET’ is displayed.

If you select option 2, part 1 of the key must already be loaded. If it is not already loaded, the error message ‘NO PART 1 SET’ is displayed.

For details, see Appendix B, “Error Messages”.

Entering Part 1 or Part 2 5If you select 1 or 2, a screen enabling you to enter 16 hexadecimal digits is displayed. The following example shows the screen for part 1 of Key A:

Figure 5-9 Entering Part 1 of a Key

The digit counter increments as you enter the digits. If you press the Enter key, this is accepted as a zero (0) digit and the counter is incremented.

Once you have entered 16 digits, the key is stored in the encryptor and you are returned to the Access menu, where the message ‘KEY <X> STORED’ is displayed.

If an EPP is configured, the KVV is displayed once data entry is complete. Select the Enter key to load the key. Select Cancel to discard the data.

Entering Parts 1 and 2 5Selecting component 3 displays the screen shown in Figure 5‐9, “Entering Part 1 of a Key” on page 5‐16. Once you enter 16 hexadecimal digits, the key is stored and, if an EPP is




configured, the KVV is displayed as shown in the following example:

Figure 5-10 Confirming Part 1

If the terminal does not have an EPP, the screen displays the following for Key A or Key B, where XXXX is the calculated checksum:

CHECKSUM VALUE = XXXX

Note: This is the only time that a checksum value is displayed when using the Key Entry menu options at a terminal without an EPP.

Press the Enter key to confirm part 1 of the key, which is stored in the encryptor, and display the screen for part 2 entry.

Once you have entered a complete key for part 2, a screen like Figure 5‐10 is displayed requesting that you confirm key part 2. Press Enter to confirm part 2, which is then XORed with the part 1 key and stored in the encryptor. The Access menu is redisplayed with the message ‘KEY A STORED’ above the SELECT FUNCTION prompt.

If you press the Cancel key while entering part 2, the key stored for part 1 is retained in the encryptor as the encryption key and the Access menu is redisplayed.

Key Mode 3: Double‐Length Key Entry with XOR 5

Entering this key is similar to single‐length keys with XOR (Key Mode 2), except 32 digits are required for each part.

Parts 1 and 2 must be entered in sequence before using the key. This is a requirement of the CEN‐XFS specification. If the parts are not entered in sequence, the errors described for Key Mode 2 are displayed.




Mode 3 requires the presence of an EPP. If you select this option when no EPP is configured, the error message ‘INVALID MODE’ is displayed.

Key Mode 4: Double‐Length Key Entry with XOR Restricted 5

Entering a key in mode 4 is similar to mode 3, except this mode prevents operations that would violate security procedures and is used with International Security. On NCR SSTs, if secure key entry is enabled, this mode is the only mode available.

Only Key A and Key V can be entered locally when the current mode is 4. If you select ‘1’ ENTER KEY B from the Key Entry menu when the current mode is 4, the error ‘EC02’ is displayed.

Mode 4 requires the presence of an EPP with International Security. If you select this option when no EPP is configured, the error message ‘INVALID MODE’ is displayed.

Secure Key Entry 5Secure key entry is enabled by configuring International Security through the platform. If it is configured for an EPP, only mode 4 is supported. All other modes are invalid. The PIN pad is remapped to allow entry of the FDKs through the on‐screen PIN pad, as shown in the following illustration for NCR SSTs:

Figure 5-11 PIN Pad Remapping for Secure Key Entry

Note: Configuring International Security to enable secure key entry will require the keys to be re‐entered. For more information about Basic and International Security, refer to the following in the online APTRA Documentation:

Self‐Service Support, System Application User Guide a PDF accessed through APTRA XFS | Runtime Maintenance | System Application

SDC Encrypting PIN Pad ‐ EKC Emulation (EPPE)select APTRA XFS | Programmers Reference | Feature Management.




Note: As well standards compliance, secure key entry offers enhanced security in that the application never sees the key value. The decision to use secure key entry is the responsibility of the financial institution.

Table of ContentsSetting up the Terminal



Chapter 6

Setting up the Terminal

Performing an Initial Configuration 6‐2

Additional Communications Configuration 6‐2

EPP Initialisation 6‐2

Setting up the Terminal 6‐2

Table of ContentsSetting up the Terminal



Overview

-1



Setting up the TerminalF

Overview 6

In this chapter we provide step‐by‐step instructions on using the Supervisor menus to set local configuration and terminal access parameters when Advance NDC is first installed on the SST. NCR recommends that you read this chapter if you are responsible for setting up the SST.

If the Supervisor functionality of your terminal has been customised, there may be other steps in addition to those shown in this section, or certain menus may differ. If you are operating a terminal that has been customised in this way, refer to any Supervisor documentation or third‐party guides describing the customisations that are installed on your SST. Enhancing Supervisor functionality using Advance NDC is described in the APTRA Advance NDC, Developer’s Guide.

Note: We assume that a field engineer has carried out the installation of the terminal before you. You do not have to configure the hardware, as all NCR SSTs are self‐configuring. However, you do have to enter the product class, for example 5675.

For details of configuring the terminal for RS232 and MISCIF, and for calibrating the touch screen, refer to the installation manual for your terminal.

For details of setting the thickness of notes, refer to the Operator’s Manual for your terminal.

If you are setting up another vendor’s SST, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual for additional configuration requirements in a multi‐vendor environment.

Setting up the TerminalPerforming an Initial Configuration



Performing an Initial Configuration 6

This section contains step‐by‐step instructions on how to set local configuration and terminal access parameters, at the facia or the enhanced operator interface, prior to switching the terminal to In‐Service mode for the first time.

On NCR SSTs, how you switch to Supervisor mode depends on the terminal type you have. Front replenishing terminals have a mode switch which can be activated automatically whenever the terminal’s facia is lifted and the door opened for replenishment. Rear replenishing terminals have a mode switch as part of the rear operator interface or a mode switch activated by the door opening for replenishment.

The individual menu options are described in detail in Chapter 4, “Configure Menu” and Chapter 5, “Access Menu”. Details of how to replenish your terminal’s supplies are given in Chapter 3, “Replenish Menu”.

Note: If you do not set local configuration details and switch on the terminal in Normal mode, a power‐up status message is sent to Central and the terminal assumes all default configuration values.

Additional Communications Configuration 6

For information about configuring a domain name server (DNS) for TCP/IP, or configuring communications for protocols supported by the PC Communications Module (PCCM), refer to “Configuring Communications” in the APTRA Advance NDC, Developer’s Guide.

EPP Initialisation 6

During the first application load following installation, Advance NDC attempts to restore the EPP with the required keyspace structure. If the EPP is not detected, or is in an invalid state, an mError can be generated with a status of EPP Initialisation Error. If there is no hardware fault with the device, rebooting the SST will resolve this.

Setting up the Terminal 6

When setting up the SST for an Advance NDC application, use the steps given in Table 6‐1 as a guide. For information about Advance NDC on other vendors’ SSTs, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Multi‐Vendor Support Reference Manual.




If password protection is configured for a PA/PCI‐DSS compliant solution, the following steps will request a recognised user name and password:

● 14

● 26

● 31

● 32

● 33

● 34

● 35

● 36

● 37

● 38.

For further information on PA/PCI‐DSS compliance and configuration, refer to Appendix E of the APTRA Advance NDC Developer’s Guide.

Table 6-1 Steps for Setting up the SST

StepNo.

To... Do this...

1 Enter Supervisor Mode, and display the Select menu.

Set the mode switch to ‘Supervisor’ and switch on the terminal.

2 Select the Configure menu. Press ‘5’ (CONFIGURE) and Enter. Enter password if prompted.

3 Display the configuration data.

Press ‘0’ and Enter.

4 Enter Track 1 format. Press ‘2’ (TRACK 1) and Enter.

Enter the Track 1 digit and press Enter.

5 Set the roll width of the receipt or journal printer.

Press ‘3’ (ROLL WIDTH) and Enter.

Enter the roll width and press Enter.

Enter the left margin and press Enter.

6 Enter the machine number. Press ‘4’ (MACHINE NO) and Enter.




Enter the machine number and press Enter.

7 Set the date in the format YYMMDD.

Press ‘5’ (DATE/TIME) and Enter.

Enter the date and press Enter.

Set the time in the format HHMM.

Enter the time and press Enter.

8 Enter the message mode (only if you want to modify the default options).

Press ‘6’ (MSG MODE) and Enter.

Enter the message mode and options, and press Enter.

9 Define the printer to be used for replenishment functions.

Press ‘8’ (SET PRINT) and Enter.

Enter your choice and press Enter.

10 Set up standard note counts if the standard cash replenishment function is to be used.

Press ‘9’ (SET CASH) and Enter.

Now enter the note count for each cassette configured:

Enter the cassette type and press Enter when prompted. Then enter the number of notes and press Enter.

Press the Cancel key.

11 Set up standard coin counts if the standard coin replenishment function is to be used

Press ‘14’ (SET COINS) and Enter.

Now enter the coin count for each hopper type configured:

Enter the hopper type number and press Enter when prompted. Then enter the number of coins and press Enter.


StepNo.

To... Do this...




12 Specify how the system will recover following a power fail or system reset.

Press ‘10’ (RST MODE) and Enter.


13 Enable the electronic journal function if applicable.

Press ‘30’ (SET JRNL) and Enter.

14 Select the TCP/IP CONFIG or the DIALUP CONFIG menu option.(Steps 15 to 17 apply only if you intend using TCP/IP communications between the SST and Central; step 18 applies only to CCM VISA2 dialup communications, otherwise go to step 19.)

Press ‘37’ (TCP/IP CONFIG) and Enter, then go to step 15; or press ‘38’ (DIALUP CONFIG) and go to step 18.

15 Specify the Remote IP Address.

Press ‘0’ (RMT ADDRESS) and Enter.

Enter the IP Address and press Enter.

16 Specify the Remote Port Number.

Press ‘1’ (RMT PORT NO) and Enter.

Enter the Port Number and press Enter.

17 Specify the Local Port Number.

Press ‘3’ (LCL PORT NO) and Enter.

Enter the Port Number and press Enter. Go to step 19.

18 View the default settings for the dialup connection and change if required.

Select the Dialup menu option required and press Enter. Repeat for each option you wish to view/change.

19 Return to the Configure menu.


20 Return to the Select menu. Press the Cancel key.

21 Select the Diagnostic menu. Press ‘7’ (DIAGNOSTIC) and Enter.

22 Shutdown the system Select the Shutdown option from the System Application

StepNo.

To... Do this...




23 Enter Supervisor Mode, and display the Select menu.

Set the mode switch to ‘Supervisor’ and switch on the terminal.

24 Select the Access menu. Press ‘6’ (ACCESS) and Enter.

25 Display the access data. Press ‘0’ and Enter.

26 Establish or change the password for access and configuration options.

Press ‘2’ (SET PASSWRD) and Enter.

Follow the prompts, and complete each entry by pressing Enter.

If you are establishing a password for the first time, press Enter when prompted for the old password.

27 Specify whether the initial display on subsequent entries to Supervisor Mode shall be the Select menu, the Replenish menu or an Exit Supervisor.

Press ‘3’ (INIT ENTRY) and Enter.


28 Specify the display and keyboard to be accessed initially on subsequent entries to Supervisor mode.

Press ‘4’ (INIT DISPLY) and Enter.


29 Specify whether Supervisor mode is to be exited automatically when Supervisor mode switch is set to ʹNormalʹ. The default is no automatic exit.

Press ‘5’ (EXIT MODE) and Enter.


30 If required, change the current key entry mode from the default mode (1).

To enter keys using the Key Entry menu, continue from step 37.

Press ‘25’ (KEY ENTRY) and Enter.

Press ‘9’ (CHANGE KEY ENTRY MODE) and Enter.Enter the required key entry mode.Go to step 37 to enter keys using the Key Entry menu.

StepNo.

To... Do this...




31 Using the Access menu, enter encryption key V for key entry mode 1, if applicable. This is only used for VISA PIN verification.

Press ‘6’ (ENTER V) and Enter.

Enter encryption key V.

32 If applicable, write the value entered using the ‘Enter V’ option to the VISA Master Key store of the encryptor.

Press ‘7’ (WRITE V) and Enter.

33 Enter required key A for key entry mode 1.

Press ‘8’ (ENTER A) and Enter.

Enter key A.

34 If required, enter key B for key entry mode 1.

Press ‘10’ (ENTER B) and Enter.

Enter key B.

35 When key A has been entered, write key A to the key store of the encryptor.

Press ‘9’ (WRITE A) and Enter.

36 When key B has been entered, write key B to the key store of the encryptor and continue from step 38.

Press ‘11’ (WRITE B) and Enter.

Go to step 38.

37 Enter keys A, B and V as required, for key entry modes 1 to 4.

Press ‘25’ (KEY ENTRY) and Enter.

Enter keys A, B and V as required.

38 Enter the Message Authentication Code (MAC) number (only if you want to configure the Data Security feature).

Press ‘12’ (ENTER MAC) and Enter.

Enter MAC digits and press Enter.

39 Return to the Select menu. Press the Cancel key.

StepNo.

To... Do this...




40 Perform any required replenishment functions, such as adding new receipt paper.Note: If present, you must initialise the BNA (using ‘INIT BNA’) if it has been previously configured to accept 50 notes.

See Chapter 3, “Replenish Menu” for details of how to carry out these functions.

41 Exit from Supervisor mode. This step is not required if you have selected automatic exit from Supervisor mode.

Press ‘9’ (EXIT) and Enter.

42 Place the terminal in service.

Move the mode switch from Supervisor (the position it is in before the machine is powered up to perform an initial configuration) to Normal. High Order Communications are only established when Normal Mode is entered.

An attempt is made to send a power‐up message to Central. The screen will display 002 in the top left corner. This is the default ‘Out‐of‐Service’ screen that is displayed until the real screen is downloaded and a start‐up command received.

StepNo.

To... Do this...

Table of ContentsError and Exception Reporting and Recovery



Chapter 7

Error and Exception Reporting and Recovery

Local Journal Log 7‐2

Device Status Messages 7‐2

Security Trace Messages 7‐4

Presenter Error Message 7‐5

Deposit Envelope Length Error Message 7‐6

Communications Trace 7‐6

Card Capture Message 7‐6

SST Off‐Line/On‐Line Messages 7‐6

BNA Journalling 7‐7

Journalling Retract Counts 7‐11

Journalling Rejected Counts 7‐12

Journalling Automatic Error Recovery 7‐12

Journalling Removal and Insertion of GBXX Cassettes 7‐13

Local Electronic Journal Log 7‐14

Validating the Checksum 7‐14

Journalling Serial Numbers and Failed Reads 7‐15

Journal Printer Backup Mode 7‐17

Reprint Sequence Example 7‐18

Power Failure/Restart 7‐19

Device Fault Reporting 7‐20

Handling Device Failures 7‐22

Device Exception Recovery 7‐22

Error Recovery 7‐23

GBRU Error Recovery 7‐24

Automatic Error Recovery 7‐25

Capture of Media on Power‐Up 7‐25

Table of ContentsError and Exception Reporting and Recovery



Overview

-1



Error and Exception Reporting and RecoveryG

Overview 7

In this chapter we provide details of the errors and exceptions that can be reported by the terminal to Central and the local device status reporting available to you at the terminal. We describe the following topics:

● Local journal log

● Local electronic journal (EJ) log

● Local device fault status reporting

● Handling device failures.

When a device fails or runs out of media, the following events occur:

● The device fault is displayed on the enhanced operator interface, while in Out of Service, In Service, Offline and Suspend modes

● A status message for the appropriate device is sent to Central

● The status message is logged in the journal

● An entry is added to the System Application’s Device Status List.

The terminal responds to all subsequent Terminal Commands and Transaction Reply Commands from Central by reporting the error condition until the condition has been cleared.

Error and Exception Reporting and RecoveryLocal Journal Log



Local Journal Log 7

The paper or electronic journal log provides a local log of all significant cardholder and supervisor activity. As well as recording information from Central, the terminal adds supplementary information to the log. In this section, we give you details of the following messages:

● Device status messages

● Security trace messages

● Presenter error message

● Deposit envelope length error message

● Communications trace

● Card capture message

● SST off‐line/on‐line messages.

Note: For simplicity, ‘the journal’ is used to mean the journal printer or the electronic journal (EJ). Thus the phrase ‘printed on the journal’ means printing on the journal printer, or writing to the EJ.

Device Status Messages 7

Whenever an exception status message is sent to Central, a single line message is printed on the journal. This, together with the preceding transaction message sent from Central, gives a complete record of the transaction. The format of the message is:

*TTTT*M*D*SSS----

where

TTTT is the transaction serial number

M is the message type:

1 ‐ unsolicited

2 ‐ solicited

D is the device code

SSS‐‐‐‐ is the device status

Field SSS‐‐‐‐ has the following format:

AA---A, M-BB, R-CC----C

where

AA‐‐‐A is the transaction/device status represented as a string of decimal digits.




BB is the first byte of diagnostic status represented as two decimal digits

CC‐‐‐‐C contains supplies status information represented as a string of decimal digits

If the Sensors unsolicited device status message is sent due to cassette removal and insertion while in Diagnostics, the journalled message does not include bytes 1 to 8. Although the correct message including the cassette sensor status is sent to Central, the journal includes the following:

* *1*P* 11111

If any message from Central is rejected, the following message is printed on the journal:

*TTTT*2*

If any message from Central is rejected when you have selected the specific command reject option, the following message is printed on the journal:

*TTTT*2**GNN*

where

G is the category

NN is the reject error number

TTTT is spaces if no transaction reply has been received.

For further information about status messages, see the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual.




A typical example of a journal log printout is shown in the following diagram:

Figure 7-1 Native Mode Printout

Security Trace Messages 7

Illegal activity by authorised personnel can be traced by analysing the security trace messages on the journal. All significant supervisor activity is recorded with a security trace number and date and time. A list of security trace messages with default text is provided in the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual. You can change the text in these messages by either downloading new reserved screens or editing RESRVD.DEF.

The line preceding the security trace message contains a header and is formatted as follows:

*NNN*XX/XX/XX*HH.MM*

where

NNN is the security trace number

XX/XX/XX is the date, in the format specified by the Enhanced Configuration Parameters Date Option

HH is the hour

MM is the minute.

You can reverse Day and Month by using the date format enhanced configuration option. See the passage “5 DATE/TIME” on page 4‐10 for details on setting the terminal date and time.

Security TraceNumber (NNN)

SecurityTrace

Message

Date/Time

ExceptionMessage

Message Type (M)

Device IdentificationGraphic (E=Dispenser)

SuppliesStatusR-(CC-C)

DiagnosticStatusM-(BB)

Transaction/DeviceStatus (AA-A)

Transaction SerialNumber (TTTT)

*055*02/29/00*14.48*SUPERVISOR MODE ENTRY* *1*R*8* *1*R*7* *1*L*2,M-05* *1*R*9* *1*P*200000,M-

*056*02/29/00*14.54*SUPERVISOR MODE EXIT*0000*1*R*7*0000*1*R*9*0000*1*P*200000,M-* *1*D*0,M-00,R-4* *1*D*0,M-00,R-4* *1*D*0,M-00,R-4* *1*D*0,M-00,R-4* *1*D*0,M-00,R-4* *1*L*2*M-05* *1*L*2*M-05*0000*2*E*200000000,M-02,R-11131




The header starts at print column 1 and the security trace message starts on column 6 of the next line. For example:

*123*02/29/00*23.59*

TOP CASSETTE REMOVED

The message is prefixed with the relevant cash handler identifier.

For single cash handlers, the prefix is C1, or as defined in the resrvd.def file.

For dual cash handlers, C1 is the primary cash handler and C2 is the secondary cash handler. Using the above example, if the top cassette in the secondary cash handler were removed the message would be as follows:

*123*02/29/00*23.59*

C2 TOP CASSETTE REMOVED

The security trace number increments by one for each message. If there is an interruption in this sequence, this indicates that there has been illegal tampering with the journal in an attempt to disguise other illegal activity.

The number is held in persistent memory and is set to 000 at installation time.

Note: If a power failure occurs during a notes dispense operation, the security trace message ‘T76’ is sent to the journal on power‐up. For screen details, refer to the “Reserved Screens” appendix in the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual.

Presenter Error Message 7

If a Presenter Error or Retract occurs, this means that notes have been detected entering the purge bin after an apparently successful present to a cardholder. The following message is logged on the electronic or printed journal:

PRESENTER ERROR

The message is logged on the local journal to allow reconciliation to take place.




Deposit Envelope Length Error Message 7

If the cardholder carries out a deposit transaction but the envelope placed in the depository is not the correct length, the following message is logged on the local journal:

ENVELOPE LENGTH ERROR

This allows for possible fraud attempts to be noted.

Communications Trace 7

If the communications trace is turned on, using the TRACE ON option of the Configure menu, incoming and outgoing messages are journalled. For details, see “12 TRACE ON” on page 4‐17.

If the communications link has not yet been opened, the following message is journalled:

COMMUNICATIONS CLOSED

If the communications link is not connected, for example the line may have been dropped, the following message is journalled:

COMMUNICATIONS DOWN

If the communications link is inoperable, the following message is journalled:

COMMUNICATIONS FATAL

Card Capture Message 7

By setting option digit 5b, a cardholder’s account number is printed on the journal when the card is captured. For details, see Appendix A, “Option Digits”.

The message printed is:

CARD CAPTURED A/C xxxxxx

where xxxxxx is the cardholder account number read from the card.

If the account number cannot be read from the cardholder’s card, or no match is available in the FITs, the following message is printed on the journal:

CARD CAPTURED A/C NO. UNKNOWN

SST Off‐Line/On‐Line Messages 7

By setting option digit 5c, a message containing the trace number, date and time of the event is printed on the journal (if configured) when High Order Communications go off‐line or are lost. See Appendix A, “Option Digits” for details.




The message printed is:

*NNN*MM/DD/YY*HH:MM*

SST OFF-LINE

When High Order Communications come back on‐line, or when they are initially established, the following message is printed:


SST ON-LINE

Changes in mode are also recorded when option digit 5c is set using the following messages:


SST IN SERVICE


SST OUT OF SERVICE


SST IN SUSPEND MODE


SST OUT OF SUSPEND MODE

Note: NNN represents the security trace number and MM/DD/YY*HH:MM represents the date and time stamp.

BNA Journalling 7

If a BNA or GBXX device is present, the journalled information helps in the local reconciliation of notes and the identification of the cardholder in cash deposits.

Whether the counters are journalled following a Transaction Reply message is set using enhanced configuration option 44. All solicited and unsolicited status messages containing device‐specific status information are journalled.

When journalled, the account number is masked. If the account number is less than or equal to four digits, all are masked. If more than four digits are journalled all are masked except the last four, as in the following example:

[A/C xxxxxxxxxxxx1234]




If automatic error recovery is turned on and the device supports note retract, an attempt is made to retract notes even if the host has not enabled retract. In this situation, the notes are moved to the cash‐in cassettes (encashed or vaulted) and included in the journalled counts. If a jam has occurred on a BNA device, note counts may not be correct.

If notes are jammed in the device, the following message is journalled:

DEVICE ERROR : NOTES IN ESCROWData\Time Mstatus codeESC: 007EUR5 - 007, EUR10 - 000VAL: 000RET: 000Rejects: 000CAT2: 000CAT3: 002EUR5 - 002

Note: Any notes that have been vaulted are not journalled.

If the notes are vaulted or returned after the transaction is cancelled, the note counts are journalled as described below. Only note types defined as active in the GBNA.ini configuration file are journalled. For details, see “39 GBRU/GBNA CONFIGURATION” on page 4‐68. In a transaction reply, if the notes are encashed successfully, a check is made to see if the note counts are to be journalled. If so, the encashed counts are journalled.

The default format is as follows:

*w*[Transaction Code], M-[MStatus], R-[Supplies][A/C xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx][DESCRIPTION]ESC : [Enn]VAL : [Vnn]RET : [Rnn]REJECTS-[xxx]CAT2: [xxx]CAT3: [xxx][TYPE] - [xxx], [TYPE] - [xxx]

For example:

*1234*1*w*0, M-00, R-1OPERATION OKESC : 003USD1-002, USD10-001,

VAL : 000




RET : 005REJECTS-005*

Note 1: Configuring BNA journalling in this way causes a device status message to be generated and journalled for every deposit transaction.

Note 2: Currencies are grouped by denomination. For example, all USD counts are journalled followed by all GBP counts.

Note 3: If no notes are identified as counterfeit or suspect, the counts for counterfeit (CAT2) and suspect (CAT3) notes are not included.

Note 4: NCR recommends setting Enhanced Configuration option 44 if implementing the ECB 6 regulations. If this option is not set and notes are re‐categorised during second bill validation, ECB 6 counts are omitted from the journal.

When 54 INIT BNA is selected from the Replenish menu, the journal entry is similar to the following:

TXPOINT: REFUNDOPERATION OKESC: 000VAL: 002EUR5 - 01, EUR10 - 01RET: 000Rejects: 000CAT2: 000CAT3: 001EUR5 - 001, EUR10 - 00

The last transaction point is defined as described in Table 7‐1.




Table 7-1 Last Transaction Point

If enhanced journalling is enabled, the format is similar to the following:

*w*1*(ALERT: CUSTOMER CANCEL)ESC: 000VAL: 000RET: 007USD 1 X 1 = 1USD 2 X 0 = 0USD 5 X 0 = 0USD 10 X 2 = 20USD 20 X 0 = 0USD 50 X 0 = 0USD 100 X 0 = 0

USD TOTAL = 21REJECTS-004

Transaction Point Default Journal String

Cash Accept state started START OF TRANSACTION

Notes inserted into device NOTES IN ESCROW

Notes returned to the cardholder due to one of the following:

● Cardholder selected Cancel or Return keys during the Cash Accept state

● Transaction reply contained a function identifier of ‘*’ (refund notes and print)

● Notes refunded during the Close state

REFUND

Notes encashed due to one of the following:

● Transaction reply contained a function identifier of ‘1’, ‘7’ (deposit and print), ‘‐’ (deposit notes and print), or ‘’’ (deposit notes and wait)

● Notes deposited or retained during the Close state

ENCASH

Timeout due to lack of response from either cardholder or Central

TIMEOUT

Retract initiated RETRACT




If cardholder details are to be included, the format is as follows:

*w*[Transaction/Device Status]*[Description]A/C XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXESCROW: [Enn]VAULT : [Vnn]RETURN: [Rnn]

The account information (A/C) is taken from track 2, and any masking is applied.

If the notes are not vaulted successfully, an unsolicited error message is sent.

If the cardholder cancels the transaction, CUSTOMER CANCEL is journalled. If the cardholder does not respond and a timeout occurs, CUSTOMER TIMEOUT is journalled.

All BNA data is cleared from the system when this state is run.

Journalling Retract Counts 7

Following all retract operations, the following is journalled:

A/C NO. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXRETRACT NO: N, TOT: MMMM, ITEMS: PPPPESC : [Enn]VAL : [Vnn][TYPE]-[XXX], [TYPE]-[XXX]

For example:

A/C NO. NOT KNOWNRETRACT NO: 5, TOT: 0500, ITEMS: 0050ESC : 000VAL : 005

USD10-050

Table 7-2 Retract Counts Journal Information

Count Description

RETRACT NO The total number of retract operations

TOT The total number of retracted notes across all retract operations

ITEMS The number of retracted notes in the last retract operation




Journalling Rejected Counts 7

The rejected counts are journalled at the same time as returned counts. The journal entry looks similar to the following:

CUSTOMER CANCEL ESC: 000VAL: 000RET: 004EUR5-001,EUR10-000EUR20-000,EUR50-000EUR100-000, EUR200-000REJECTS-003

The above example shows that a total of 4 notes have been returned to the cardholder, comprising one 5 euro note and three notes rejected as unrecognised.

Reject counts are cumulative. For example, if an invalid note is inserted it is reported as REJECTS‐001, if another invalid note is inserted, the count is incremented to REJECTS‐002.

Although the counts may sometimes be greater than is supported by the message format, the actual note counts are correctly journalled. This situation is handled as follows:

● If more than 90 notes are accepted and the returned note count is greater than supported by the message format (that is, 90+999=1089), the actual note count is printed to journal (returned note count + excess of 1089), but only 1089 can be reported to the host

● If more than 90 notes are not accepted and the returned note count is greater than supported by the message format (that is, 90), the actual note count is printed to journal (returned note count + excess of 90), but only 90 can be reported to the host.

If the REJECT COUNTS NOT UPDATED - ESCROW FULL message is displayed, the note counts are not updated and all notes are returned to the cardholder. This only occurs when note counts cannot be reported due to a driver limitation.

Journalling Automatic Error Recovery 7

If automatic error recovery is turned on, the following situations are journalled:

● Automatic error recovery has started

● Counters cannot be updated

● Successful reset, with counts as described in “BNA Journalling” on page 7‐7




● Failed reset, with counts as described in “BNA Journalling” on page 7‐7. The counts may not be accurate in this situation.

Journalling Removal and Insertion of GBXX Cassettes 7

The removal and insertion of GBXX cassettes are journalled using the following messages:

CASSETTE x INSERTED where x indicates the physical cassetteCASSETTE x REMOVED where x indicates the physical cassetteREJECT BIN INSERTEDREJECT BIN REMOVEDRETRACT BIN INSERTEDRETRACT BIN REMOVEDCOUNTERFEIT BIN INSERTEDCOUNTERFEIT BIN REMOVED

Error and Exception Reporting and RecoveryLocal Electronic Journal Log



Local Electronic Journal Log 7

This passage supplements the information supplied in the “Local Journal Log” section earlier in this chapter. The electronic journal log emulates the printed journal. All data normally recorded on the journal printer is written to the electronic journal log file on the terminal’s system disk. This file must NOT be accessed or edited in any way.

Although the information captured by the electronic log is as described in “Local Journal Log” on page 7‐2, the content of the unprocessed electronic journal log file is different. It is a stream of uncompressed ASCII characters, including control characters, which is written to the hard disk as a sequential DOS file. The time, date, method of initialisation, and a checksum value are also appended to the file, which may further be compressed or be password protected and compressed.

In order to use the information stored in the log file, you must first copy the file from the hard disk to a destination drive using the INIT EJRNL option, described on page 3‐31, or automatically as described in “4 AUTO INIT EJ OPTIONS” on page 4‐24. This releases space on the hard disk and creates a file ‘ejnnnnnn.xxx’ (where nnnnnn is the six‐digit machine number and xxx is an incrementing number between 000 and 999).

To access the information in the ‘ejnnnnnn.xxx’ file, you need to either use an editor to read the file manually or write a utility to convert the new electronic journal file output to the format of your choice. If the file is compressed, you will also have to rename the file extension to .zip, and decompress the file before you can read or convert the output.

For details of purging the EJ log file before installing Advance NDC, see section “40 INIT EJRNL (Initialise Electronic Journal)” on page 3‐31.

When the EJ log is 90% full and 100% full, an unsolicited message is reported, unless automatic initialisation by cutover is enabled. The trigger points for these unsolicited messages are never reached as an automatic initialisation occurs when the EJ log reaches 90% full. If cutover fails, the unsolicited message is still reported when the EJ log reaches 100% full.

Validating the Checksum 7

An eight‐byte checksum is appended to the EJ log file during the initialisation operation. This checksum can be validated using the supplied validation utility.




To use the validation utility, do the following:

1 Select Start|All Programs|NCR APTRA|Advance NDC|Tools|Validate Checksum. The utility appears, as follows:

Figure 7-2 Validate Checksum Utility

2 Enter, or browse to, the path and file for which you want to validate the checksum.

3 Select the Validate button, the Result field displays VALID or INVALID, as appropriate.

4 When finished, select the Exit button to close the utility.

If the validation utility finds that the checksum is INVALID, the file has been corrupted. To save the EJ file to a new destination, use the RCOPY option as described in “50 RCOPY EJRNL (Recopy Electronic Journal)” on page 3‐40.

Journalling Serial Numbers and Failed Reads 7

If using a GBXX device with a dual‐camera bill validator, the following information is journalled to the EJ:

● Optionally, the serial numbers of notes identified as category 4 under the ECB 6 regulations

● The number of failed reads of serial numbers

● The number of failed reads of note signature of any notes identified as category two and category 3 under the ECB 6 regulations.

The EJ must be enabled if you want to record note serial numbers.

Serial numbers are logged when the notes are validated or if notes are in the transport when the device is initialised.

The serial number is returned by the platform and may not match the serial number of the note. For example, the platform may pad the serial number AG8387152 to ARKS GQSB 896 356 869 732 145




569 206. The format used may vary based on the note template and note types defined on the device.

The journal entry following a successful read looks similar to the following:

SERIAL NUMBERS:<new line character><note 1 serial number><new line character><note 2 serial number>

If the serial number is not successfully read for some category 4 notes, a count of the unsuccessful reads is added to the end of the journal entry. The journal entry looks similar to the following:

SERIAL NUMBERS:<new line character><note 1 serial number><new line character><note 2 serial number><new line character>FAILED SERIAL NUMBER READS:<counts>

The journal entry following an unsuccessful read of all notes looks similar to the following:

SERIAL NUMBERS:<new line character><FAILED SERIAL NUMBER READS:<counts>

The journal entry following an unsuccessful read of only category 2 notes looks similar to the following:

FAILED SIGNATURES: CAT2 : <counts>

The journal entry following an unsuccessful read of only category 3 notes looks similar to the following:

FAILED SIGNATURES: CAT3 : <counts>

The journal entry following an unsuccessful read of both category 2 and category 3 notes looks similar to the following:

FAILED SIGNATURES: CAT2:<counts> CAT3:<counts>

Error and Exception Reporting and RecoveryJournal Printer Backup Mode



Journal Printer Backup Mode 7

There is an option available that allows for journal printer backup to be used. This means that journalling can continue even when the journal printer is in a fatal condition. For details of how to set the option, refer to the section on Enhanced Configuration Parameters in the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual.

If the option is set and the journal printer enters a fatal state, journalling continues using the journal backup mode and the system disk resident buffer file. The journalling includes the text of the last command sent to the journal printer before it went fatal.

Journal backup continues until the journal printer becomes operational again; this would typically be due to someone fixing the problem in Supervisor mode. At this point, all the data that has been logged since the journal printer entered a fatal state is copied to the journal printer. This is known as ‘reprinting’. When the hardcopy backup log is 100% full, an unsolicited message is reported.

While the data is being reprinted, any additional log data that is received in journal backup mode is first stored in the journal backup log buffer and then reprinted. Once reprinting is complete, journal backup mode ceases and the journal printer becomes operational again.

For security reasons, reprinting from the journal backup log to the journal printer is suspended if the SST goes off‐line, but continues as soon as communications have been re‐established.

Before the data is copied to the journal printer, it sends a test sequence to the printer to make sure it is working correctly. If it is not working, an error message is displayed. If it is working, the following message is sent to the journal printer to indicate that this is the start of reprinting:

**** COMMENCING REPRINT ****

When reprinting is complete, the following message is sent to the journal printer:

**** REPRINT COMPLETED OK ****




Reprint Sequence Example 7

An example of a reprint sequence on the journal log after the journal has failed due to paper out is shown below:

Figure 7-3 Reprint Sequence Example

The following explanation leads you through the reprint sequence example:

Table 7-3 Reprint Sequence Example

*071*02/29/00*09:46***** COMMENCING REPRINT ****

*066* *09:46***** JOURNAL BACKUP STARTED ****

TOP CASSETTE INSERTED

02/29/00

02/29/00

02/29/00

02/29/00

02/29/00

02/29/00

02/29/00

02/29/00

02/29/00

02/29/00

02/29/00

02/29/00

*065* *09:46*TOP CASSETTE REMOVED* *1*P*1010110010100,M-

*067* *09:46*

* *1*P*1010110011100,M-

*075* *09:47***** COMMENCING REPRINT ****

*068* *09:46*TOP CASSETTE REMOVED* **1*P*1010110010100,M-

*069* *09:46*TOP CASSETTE INSERTED* *1*P*1010110011100,M-* *1*P*21,M-

*070* *09:46*SUPERVISOR MODE ENTRY* *1*R*09

*072* *09:47*SUPERVISOR MODE EXIT* *1*P*20,M-

*073* *09:47***** REPRINT HALTED ****

* *1*P*21,M-*074* *09:47*

SUPERVISOR MODE ENTRY* *1*P*20* *1*R*09

*076* *09:47*SUPERVISOR MODE EXIT* *1*P*20,M-

*077* *09:48***** REPRINT COMPLETED OK ****

SecurityTrace No.

Action

071 Start of reprint operation. All data logged, since the journal printer went fatal, is copied to the journal printer.

066 Journal printer is out of paper. Journal printer backup begins.

065 The top currency cassette has been removed. Trace message is buffered (Journal is out of paper).

067 The top currency cassette has been inserted.

075 Reprint operation begins again.




Once the journal paper has been replaced and Supervisor mode is exited, the journal printer backup log is reprinted. As shown in the above example, the security trace number sequence is not in order. The COMMENCING REPRINT message always appears at the start of the reprint sequence. In this example, the reprint is temporarily halted when a print‐head jam occurs.

Power Failure/Restart 7

During a power failure/restart, the journal printer backup log is checked for any data that was logged before the system restart and that has not been printed. If data is present and the journal printer is not in a fatal state, the data is printed before the power failure/restart journal message is printed. The following conditions are applied:

● If the system is restarted with no journal printer and the EJ is used, any journal data stored during a journal printer backup operation will not be copied to the EJ log before recommencing journal operation.

● If a journal printer backup is active and the pmdata file has been deleted or lost, all records are reprinted. This occurs whether or not the records have been previously reprinted.

● If a journal printer backup is active and the pmdata file indicates that there are records to be reprinted, but the backup file is missing, it is assumed that an update build has been applied. In this case the pmdata file count is cleared and the REPRINT HALTED message is printed.

068 The top currency cassette has been removed.

069 The top currency cassette has been inserted.

070 Operator enters Supervisor mode to replace paper.

072 Operator exits Supervisor mode after replacing paper.

073 The reprint operation is halted due to a print‐head jam.

074 Operator re‐enters Supervisor mode to clear print‐head jam using the Device Status List.

076 Operator exits Supervisor mode after clearing print‐head jam.

077 Reprint operation is complete.

SecurityTrace No.

Action

Error and Exception Reporting and RecoveryDevice Fault Reporting



Device Fault Reporting 7

Advance NDC continually checks the status of each device in the terminal and reports faults on the enhanced operator interface, while in any of the following modes:

● Out of Service

● In Service

● Off‐line

● Suspend.

We refer to displaying device faults on the enhanced operator interface, while not in Supervisor mode, as ‘Fault Display’. The Fault Display identifies the total number of device faults and cycles through fault information for each device requiring attention.

Note: Suspend and fatal conditions for DASH readers are generated by the application, and not XFS. This means that no fault information can be displayed for DASH readers.

This provides you with the necessary information to anticipate and prevent media shortages and device failures at an early stage.

When there are no outstanding faults, the terminal is said to be ‘healthy’.

If any faults arise which cannot be cleared by an operator, then all existing faults will be replaced with the text “Please Call A Service Engineer”.

Table 7‐4 describes when the System Application and the Fault Display reporting differs. These differences are due to the level of information available to Advance NDC.

Error and Exception Reporting and RecoveryDevice Fault Reporting



Table 7-4 Differences in System Application and Fault Display Reporting

Scenario System Application Fault Display

The capture bin is full on the receipt printer USB Receipt PrinterCapture Bin Full

No error is displayed

The envelope dispenser is empty Envelope DispenserEnvelope Hopper is Empty

ENV DISPENSERDISPENSER EMPTY

ENV DISPENSER FATALDISPENSER ERROR

Reject bin not correctly inserted USB Cash DispenserPurge Bin Removed

Cash Handler FatalCash Units FatalTransport FatalReject Cass Removed

Reject bin is full Purge Bin full Cash Handler FatalCash Units FatalTransport FatalReject Cass Full

Error and Exception Reporting and RecoveryHandling Device Failures



Handling Device Failures 7

If a device fails or runs out of media, an appropriate status message is sent to Central and local indications are given. The terminal continues to report errors to Central until the condition is dealt with locally.

In this passage we provide details of the following:

● Device exception recovery

● Capture of media on power‐up.

Device Exception Recovery7

To clear device faults, you need to access the APTRA Self‐Service Support System Application. The System Application provides functions that are used to perform configuration and maintenance on an SST. For some devices, you also have to perform Supervisor functions after clearing the fault.

The Diagnostic option on the Select menu provides access to the System Application. You use the Device Status List in the System Application to obtain more information on the device states that require attention.

For details of using the Device Status List to clear device faults, refer to the APTRA Self‐Service Support, System Application User Guide.

The device faults which require you to perform Supervisor functions in the Replenish menu after clearing the state are as follows:

Table 7-5 Exceptions Requiring Action After Clearing State

Select this function...

After... Why?

CLR CARDS Emptying the card capture bin.

To clear the Cards Captured counter to zero.

CLR DEPOS Emptying the envelope deposit bin.

To clear the Deposits counter to zero.

ADD CASH Replenishing a currency cassette.

To specify the number of notes newly added to the cassette.

You may also wish to perform the CLR CASH function, prior to the ADD CASH function, to clear the currency counter to zero.




Error Recovery 7

The service provider can request that Advance NDC perform the reset for one of the following devices when a fatal error is encountered during a transaction:

● Cash handler 1 (or GBRU, where fitted)

● Cash handler 2

● Coin dispenser

● Card reader

● Envelope depository

● Cheque processor

● Journal printer

● Receipt printer

● Statement printer

● Envelope dispenser

● Pin Pad/Encryptor

● Night safe

● Barcode reader

● BNA/GBXX

Advance NDC attempts to reset the device at the end of the cardholder session. A Supervisor entry message is sent prior to the

ADD COINS Replenishing a coin hopper

To specify the number of coins added to the hopper type.

You may also wish to perform the CLR COINS function, prior to the ADD COINS function, to clear the coin counters to zero.

INIT DEPOS Clearing a fault with the cheque processor or Envelope device

To enable the transaction application to use the cheque processor or Envelope device

TEST CASH A failed reset of a BNA or GBXX device following a cash out transaction

To clear the error and allow the use of the BNA or GBXX device

INIT BNA A failed reset of a BNA or GBXX device following a cash in transaction

To clear the error and allow the use of the BNA or GBXX device

Select this function...

After... Why?




reset. An R09, and Supervisor exit message are sent following the reset. This informs the host that a reset has been performed and allows a Get Config terminal command to be sent to check the current status of the device.

Any media in the device transport during a reset is captured.

GBRU Error Recovery 7

If notes are in the device transport following a cash‐out transaction, they are moved to the retract or reject bin, depending on the last status, as follows:

● If the notes were not presented, they go to the reject bin and the reject counts are updated

● If the notes were presented, the dispensed counts are updated, and the notes are moved to the retract bin at the end of the session.

If the GBRU remains in a fatal condition after the reset operation and the last transaction was a cash‐in transaction, an INIT BNA operation must be performed to clear the error.

If the GBRU remains in a fatal condition after the reset operation and the last transaction was a cash‐out transaction, a TEST CASH operation must be performed to clear the error.

The recovery process is journalled along with the counts before and after the reset. The journal includes the counts before and after the reset, other information is given as shown in Table 7‐6.

Table 7-6 GBRU Journal Messages

Message Description

CASH DISPENSE ERROR Identifies the last transaction as a cash‐out transaction

RESET TO REJECT AREA SUCCESSFUL

Identifies the last dispense status as not presentedThe reset operation was successfulThe notes were sent to the reject bin and the reject counts updated




Automatic Error Recovery 7

On a terminal with a BNA or GBXX that supports retract, the device attempts to retract the notes to the intermediate stacker, even if the host has not enabled retract, in any situation where all the following conditions are met:

● A timer expires

● Notes are left at the exit or in the escrow

● Automatic error recovery is turned on.

Following the attempted retract to the intermediate stacker, a reset is attempted. The notes are then encashed and counts are journalled. If notes are left at the exit or in the escrow, the Supervisor counts could be incorrect. While automatic error recovery is attempted, the SST is in simulated Supervisor mode and the screen used when the terminal is Out of Service is displayed.

Capture of Media on Power‐Up 7

When the terminal is powered‐up following a power supply interruption, it will check whether any media are present which would hinder operation. Anything that is found will be captured, in order to clear the terminal for the next cardholder’s use, for example:

● A card in the card reader is captured.

● The cash handler is cleared of any notes.

● A statement in the transport is captured.

● An envelope in the envelope dispenser is retracted.

● An envelope in the envelope depository is cleared.

RESET TO REJECT AREA FAILED Identifies the last dispense status as not presentedThe reset operation was unsuccessfulIf the reset fails after moving the notes to the reject bin, the reject counts are updatedIf the reset fails before moving the notes to the reject bin, no counts are updated as the notes are still in the transport.

RESET TO RETRACT AREA SUCCESSFUL

Identifies the last dispense status as presentedThe reset operation was successfulThe notes were sent to the retract bin and the presented counts updated

RESET TO RETRACT AREA FAILED Identifies the last dispense status as presentedThe reset operation was unsuccessfulThe presented counts are updatedIf the reset fails before moving the notes to the retract bin, no counts are updated as no separate retract counts are maintained.

Message Description

Table of ContentsOption Digits



Appendix A

Option Digits

Option Digits Table A‐2

Option Digit Combinations A‐10

Option Digit 1 A‐10







Option Digit 0 Reporting Levels A‐14

Messages for Values 2 or 3 A‐14

Messages for Value 1 A‐14

Option Digits Example A‐16

Selecting the Values to Enter A‐17

Table of ContentsOption Digits



Overview

-1


APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide A

Option DigitsA

Overview A

You can specify certain options when you initially configure the terminal, to accommodate Native mode option variations. These options cannot be controlled by download option selection. For more details, see Chapter 4, “Configure Menu”.

In Advance NDC, the message mode is always 1. After entering the message mode, you can enter option digits to specify the options required. The option digits are numbered from 0‐15 (maximum 16) where option digit 0 is entered first and option digit 15 is entered last. If you enter a value of ‘0’ or no digit, the default operation occurs.

In Advance NDC, the option digits settings are automatically saved to persistent storage, and hence are used on power failure recovery.

An example of how to use this additional feature to customise your terminal further is provided in the “Option Digits Example” section at the end of this appendix.

Some options are not supported; for details, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Developer’s Guide.

Option DigitsOption Digits Table

A-2 APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


Option Digits Table A

Table A-1 Option Digits

Option Digit

Value Meaning

0 Option digit 0 controls the reporting of supervisor menu selection in status messages sent to Central. For more information about the message reporting, see “Option Digit 0 Reporting Levels” on page A‐14.

0 Default. Only items selected from the Select menu are reported.

1 Menu number and menu items selected from all menus available from the Select menu are reported.

2 Menu number and menu items selected from all menus available from the Select menu, and the Key Entry menu are reported.

3 As for value 2, plus components selected from the Key Entry sub‐menus are reported.

1 0‐3 Option digit 1 controls two voice guidance options. For each option there is a Default condition (D) and an Action condition (A).

For details of the option combinations, see “Option Digit 1” on page A‐10. The conditions for each option are the following:

Option AThis option defines how SSTs with Enhanced Audio capabilities are reported

Default Report SSTs with Enhanced Audio capabilities as variant ‘02’

Action Report SSTs with Enhanced Audio capabilities as variant ‘01’

Option BThis option defines whether voice guidance sessions are enabled on the SST

Default Disable voice guidance sessions; do not report audio hardware and fitness

Action Enable voice guidance sessions; report audio hardware and fitness


APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide A-3


2 0‐7 Option digit 2 controls three separate options. For each option there is a Default condition (D) and an Action condition (A).


Option A Retract notes not taken.

Default Retract notes once timer 05 has expired.

Action Do not retract notes.If the transaction includes a coin dispense, the coin dispense is started immediately after the notes have been successfully presented.

Option B Beeper used while notes are presented.

Default Do not sound beeper.

Action Beeper sounds while notes are presented, until notes have been taken or timer 05 has expired.

Option CBeeper used during BNA note or cheque processor cheque deposit.

Default Beeper is enabled when the BNA or cheque processor is waiting for a deposit and until an ejected cheque is taken.

Action Beeper is disabled when the BNA or cheque processor is waiting for a deposit and until an ejected cheque is taken.

3 0‐7 Option digit 3 controls three independent options. For each option there is a Default condition (D) and an Action condition (A).


Option A This option controls when the night safe depository is checked for overfill.

Default Check for overfill after night safe deposit has been completed.

Option Digit

Value Meaning




Action Check for overfill before night safe deposit has begun.

Option B This option controls whether or not an NAK status received from the security camera is sent to Central. Not supported by Advance NDC.

Default NAK status is sent to Central.

Action NAK status is not sent to Central.

Option C This option controls whether or not the Cancel key on the cardholder keyboard is enabled when a ‘print statement and wait’ function is being performed. After the Cancel key has been pressed, it is disabled even if other ‘print statement and wait’ functions are received. If an interactive transaction response is received in a sequence of ‘print statement and wait’ functions, and the Cancel key has been pressed before the interactive transaction response, it is re‐enabled in subsequent ‘print statement and wait’ functions.

Default Cancel key is disabled during ‘print statement and wait’ function.

Action Cancel key is enabled during ‘print statement and wait’ function. If the Cancel key is pressed during statement printing, a new unsolicited status is sent to Central.

This is valid for sideways printing on the receipt.

4 0‐24‐6

Option digit 4 controls three separate options. For each option there is a Default condition (D) and an Action condition (A).

For details of the option combinations, see“Option Digit 4” on page A‐11. The conditions for each option are the following:

Option Digit

Value Meaning




Option A This option controls when the solicited status message is sent after a dispense. Note: Option A is not valid if a spray dispenser is configured.

Default Status message is sent after the requested notes and coins have been successfully presented, or an error has occurred at any time up to and including the present operation.

Action Solicited cash handler status message is sent after an error has occurred at any time up to and including the present operation.

It can also be sent after a cash retract when notes have not been taken, or after a retract operation. Otherwise, send a Ready message after the retract has completed. If the transaction includes a coin dispense, the coin dispense is started immediately after the notes have been taken.

Note: A delay of approximately 15 seconds occurs prior to the message being sent. Unnecessary delay to the cardholder may be avoided by using the Parallel Eject/Dispense and Print function to complete the transaction.

Option B This option controls whether or not the beeper is used when the card is ejected.Note: Option B is valid if a motorised card reader is configured.

Default Beeper is enabled when the card is ejected.

Action Beeper is inhibited when the card is ejected.

Option C This option controls whether extra fields are added to the cash handler status message for the spray dispenser.

Default Extra fields are not added.

Option Digit

Value Meaning




Action Extra fields are added. The extra fields contain the number of notes presented to the cardholder for each cassette type and in the case of a partial dispense, may not be the same as the notes requested.



Option A This option controls whether or not a download of customisation data is saved to disk when a Go‐In‐Service terminal command is received from Central.

Default Download is always written to disk.

Action Download is written to disk only if there is a configuration ID in the download.

Option B This option controls whether or not the cardholder account number is printed on the journal printer when a card is captured.

Default No message is printed on the journal.

Action The cardholder account number is read from the card and the following message is printed on the journal:

CARD CAPTURED A/C XXXXXX

XXXXXX is the cardholder account number. The number of digits printed on the journal is obtained from the Primary Account Number Length (PANLN) in the associated FIT table.

Option Digit

Value Meaning




If no match is available in the FIT table or there is no Primary Account Number data on the card, the following message is printed on the journal:

CARD CAPTURED A/C NO. UNKNOWN

Option C This option controls whether or not reserved screens ‘T37’, ‘T38’, ‘t60’, ‘t61’, ‘t62’ and ‘t63’ are printed on the journal printer when high order communications go off‐line and on‐line or the SST mode changes. For details of the screens, see “SST Off‐Line/On‐Line Messages” on page 7‐6.

Note: An attempt to journal these screens will only be made if the journal is configured.

The trace number, date and time of the event are included in the message.

Default No message is printed on the journal.

Action Screens ‘T37’, ‘T38’, ‘t60’, ‘t61’, ‘t62’ and ‘t63’ are printed.



Option A Reserved.

Option B This option determines the maximum number of lines that can be printed on a receipt before a cut.

Default Maximum of 24 lines before a cut.

Action Maximum of 49 lines before a cut.

Not supported in sideways printing mode.

Option Digit

Value Meaning




Option C This option determines whether the Advance NDC Release Number and Software ID fields are added to the Configuration Terminal State Message.

Default The fields are not added to the message.

Action The fields are added to the message.



Option A This option controls whether the four FDKs to the right of the screen (A, B, C and D) are used for the Time‐Out state and all Four FDK states or the four FDKs to the left of the screen (I, H, G and F) are used.

Default Use the right hand keys (A, B, C and D).

Action Use the left hand keys (I, H, G and F).

Option B Reserved.

Option C Reserved.

8 0‐5 Option digit 8 controls the media entry/exit indicators (MEIs) flash rate setting.

The value determines the flash rate as follows:000 = Quick (4.0 Hz)001 = Medium (1.0 Hz)002 = Medium (1.0 Hz)003 = Slow (0.25 Hz)004 = Slow (0.25 Hz)005 = Continuously on.Note: This can be overwritten by a different value within an enhanced configuration parameters message.

9‐11 Reserved

Option Digit

Value Meaning




12 Option digit 12 controls whether Journal Paper Exhausted or Low status messages are sent to Central when the journal paper is exhausted (out). For hardcopy backup or dual mode it also controls whether journal fatal is reported or whether a warning is reported when the physical journal is fatal.

0 Default. Send Journal Paper Exhausted status messages. If the journal paper is out, it is reported as out. If the physical journal is fatal, journal fatal is reported.

1 No Journal Paper Exhausted status messages sent. If the journal paper is out, it is reported as low instead. If hardcopy backup or dual mode is enabled, journal warning is reported when the physical journal is fatal.

13 Option digit 13 controls the conversion between ASCII and EBCDIC of all messages sent to and received from Central.

0 Default. No conversion between ASCII and EBCDIC.

1 Conversion of incoming messages from EBCDIC to ASCII. Conversion of outgoing messages from ASCII to EBCDIC.Note: Any message authentication is performed in EBCDIC.

14‐15 Reserved

Option Digit

Value Meaning

Option DigitsOption Digit Combinations



Option Digit Combinations A

Option Digit 1 A

The following table shows the combinations of options that exist for the permitted option digit values.

Table A-2 Option Digit 1 Combinations

Option Digit 2 A


Note: If a spray dispenser is configured, Options A and B are not valid; therefore for option C, the only valid values are 0 and 4.


Option Value Option AVariant Reporting

Option B Voice Guidance

0 D D

1 A D

2 D A

3 A A

OptionValue

Option A Cash Retract

Option BCash PresentBeeper

Option CDepositBeeper

0 D D D

1 A D D

2 D A D

3 A A D

4 D D A

5 A D A

6 D A A

7 A A A




Option Digit 3 A



If the Cancel key is pressed during statement printing, an unsolicited status is sent to Central. If this option is used, Central must be changed. For details of sideways printing, see the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual, “Sideways Printing On Receipt” section.

Option Digit 4 A


Note: Option A is not valid if a spray dispenser is configured. Option B is valid where a motorised card reader is configured. Option C is valid only when a spray dispenser is configured.


For more information about the additional note count for a spray dispenser, refer to the APTRA Advance NDC, Reference Manual.

OptionValue

Option ANight SafeOverfill

Option BCamera NAK Status

Option CStatementCancel

0 D D D

1 A D D

2 D A D

3 A A D

4 D D A

5 A D A

6 D A A

7 A A A

OptionValue

Option ACash Handler Status

Option BCard Eject Beeper

Option CAdditional Note Count

0 D D D

1 A D D

2 D A D

4 A A D

5 D D A

6 D A A




Option Digit 5 A



Option Digit 6 A

The following table shows the combinations of options that exist for the permitted option digit values. Option A is reserved.


OptionValue

Option ASaveDownload

Option BCustomerA/C No.

Option CPrintOn-/Off-Line

0 D D D

1 A D D

2 D A D

3 A A D

4 D D A

5 A D A

6 D A A

7 A A A

OptionValue

Option BReceipt Length

Option CSend Release Number

0 D D

1 D D

2 A D

3 A D

4 D A

5 D A

6 A A

7 A A




Option Digit 7 A

The following table shows the combinations of options that exist for the permitted option digit values. Options B and C are reserved.


OptionValue

Option ALeft/Right FDK Enable

0 D

1 A

2 D

3 A

4 D

5 A

6 D

7 A

Option DigitsOption Digit 0 Reporting Levels



Option Digit 0 Reporting Levels A

Option digit 0 controls reporting of all supervisor menu number and/or menu item selections in status messages sent to Central. For details, see “Option Digits Table” on page A‐2.

When reporting encryption key entry from the Key Entry supervisor menu, you can use value 1 to send the same messages as are sent for keys entered through the Access menu. Alternatively, you can use values 2 and 3 to specify additional levels of reporting. The following sections explain key entry reporting in more detail.

Messages for Values 2 or 3 A

If you set option digit 0 to a value of 2, the following will be sent:

● A message when option ʹ25ʹ KEY ENTRY on the Access menu is selected

● Reports of all items selected from the Key Entry menu, including option ʹ9ʹ CHANGE KEY ENTRY MODE.

To include reporting down to component selection level, you can set option digit 0 to a value of 3.

For example, for value 3 the following message reports all possible levels of item selection:

12fs000fsfsfsR3250101

in which the last seven numbers mean the following:

When option digit 0 is set to 2 or 3, the messages report only that a selection to enter a key has been made. No message will be sent to report that a key has been written as there is no such option on the Key Entry menu.

Messages for Value 1 A

When option digit 0 is set to 1, messages corresponding to those for the Enter/Write A, B and V options on the Access menu will be sent. This results in the following:

● Two messages will be sent and journalled when keys are entered and written using the Key Entry menu

3 = Access menu

25 = Key Entry menu

01 = Enter B

01 = Enter Part 1

Option DigitsOption Digit 0 Reporting Levels



● No messages will be sent when ‘25’ KEY ENTRY is selected from the Access menu, or option 9 from the Key Entry menu.

For example, if the key entry mode is 1 (single‐length without XOR) and you select ‘0’ ENTER KEY A on the Key Entry menu, a message relating to the Access menu (3) and option ‘8’ ENTER KEY A (08) on the Access menu will be sent to Central.

When the key is written to the encryptor, a second message relating to the Access menu (3) and option ʹ9’ WRITE KEY A (09) will be sent to Central.

In any mode using XOR, the message reporting that the key has been written will be sent when part 1 or part 2 of the key has been entered.

Option DigitsOption Digits Example



Option Digits Example A

On the Configure Menu, select ‘6’ MSG MODE to customise the message mode with a string of option digits that allow additional local parameters to be set, which cannot be included in download options. The option digits are identified by the order in which they are entered at the terminal.

At the Message mode prompt:

ENTER MSG MODE -

enter ‘1’ followed by the option values you want. When your selection is complete, press the Enter key to return to the Configure menu. If there is a reserved option digit between your selections, enter 0 for it.

If you enter ‘1’ at the prompt and press Enter without selecting any additional options, all option digits default to a value of 0.

Functions are currently defined for option digits 0, 2 to 8 and 12 to 13. The remaining option digits are reserved for future use.

For example, to configure your terminal for the following:

● Report only items selected from the Select menu to Central (the default)

● Not to retract notes once timer 05 has expired

● Disable the beeper while notes are being presented

● Disable the beeper while the depository is waiting for an envelope

● Set default values for the remaining digits,

you enter the following values:

ENTER MSG MODE - 1005

and press the Enter key. In this example the entries are as follows:

Table A-9 Option Digit Example

Option Value Description

1 In Advance NDC the Message mode is always 1.




As the default value is required for all option digits after option digit 2, no further entries are needed.

Selecting the Values to Enter A

Before you start entering option digit values, ensure you have the correct sequence you require, as follows:

1 Check which functions are associated with which option digit. (See “Option Digits Table” starting on page A‐2.)

2 Look at each digit in turn and note down which option you want to select and whether it is an action or default setting.

3 Check your action and default settings in the tables for option combinations. The option value to the left of the option combinations selects the functions you require. (See “Option Digit Combinations” starting on page A‐10.)

4 Note down a zero for any reserved option digit.

5 Enter your option digit selection at the prompt.

0 Option digit 0, value 0 (the default) to report items selected from the Select menu only. (See page A‐2.)

0 Option digit 1, value 0 (the default) to report SSTs with Enhanced Audio capabilities as ‘02’ and disable voice guidance.

5 Option digit 2, value 5 to:

— Not retract notes

— Disable the beeper while notes are being presented

— Disable the beeper while the depository is waiting for an envelope. (See page A‐10.)

Table of ContentsError Messages



Appendix B

Error Messages

Error Messages B‐2

e00 ‐ NOT CONFIGURED B‐2

e01 ‐ BIN NOT PRESENT B‐2

e02 ‐ FAILED TO CREATE CHECKSUM B‐2

e08 ‐ UNKNOWN OR SAME ORIENTATION B‐2

e09 ‐ EJ UPLOAD MAY BE IN PROGRESSPRESS 1 ‐CONTINUE 0 ‐CANCEL B‐2

e10 ‐ INVALID, EJ MODE IS STANDARD B‐3

e11 ‐ INVALID; MAX POSSIBLE VALUE=X B‐3

e12 ‐ INSUFFICIENT HARD DISK B‐3

e13 ‐ FAILED TO OVERWRITE IN CDRW B‐3

e17 ‐ EJ SCHEDULED INIT NOT CONFIGURED B‐3

e18 ‐ INVALID PSWD (MIN4,MAX 20 CHARS) B‐4

e19 ‐ AUTO INIT COPY FAILED B‐4

e20 ‐ NO DRIVES AVAILABLE B‐4

e21 ‐ CHECKSUM FAILED B‐4

e22 ‐ COMPRESSION FAILED B‐5

e23 ‐ AUTO INIT COPY DRIVE NOT CONFIGURED B‐5

e24 ‐ SILENTDEBUG NOT STARTED B‐5

e25 ‐ SILENTDEBUG NOT STOPPED B‐5

e26 ‐ SILENTDEBUG LOGS NOT DELETED B‐5

e27 ‐ SILENTDEBUG LOGS NOT COPIED B‐6

e28 ‐ NO DRIVES SUITABLE FOR COPY B‐6

e29 ‐ SILENTDEBUG ALREADY STARTED B‐6

e30 ‐ SILENTDEBUG ALREADY STOPPED B‐6

e31 ‐ SILENTDEBUG CONFIG INVALID B‐6

e32 ‐ INVALID:MAX VALUE=X B‐7

E0010 ‐ NO DISK IN DRIVE B‐7

E0011 ‐ FLOPPY PROTECTED B‐7

E0016 ‐ EJ NOT PRESENT B‐7

E0018 ‐ TOO MANY DIGITS B‐7

E0019 ‐ NOT ENOUGH DIGITS B‐8

E0020 ‐ INVALID VALUE B‐8

E0022 ‐ DEVICE NOT PRESENT B‐8

E0023 ‐ DISK I/O ERROR B‐8

E0025 ‐ COMMAND NOT ALLOWED B‐8

E0026 ‐ COINS EXCEED LIMIT OF 65534 B‐9

E0032 ‐ CAMERA FAILURE B‐9




E0033 ‐ INVALID MEI OPTION B‐9

E0036 ‐ FILE ALREADY EXISTS B‐9

E0038 ‐ EJ BACKUP INVALID B‐9

E0039 ‐ FRONT FEATURE ONLY B‐10

E0040 ‐ DCS FAILURE B‐10

E0042 ‐ LOAD ERROR B‐10

E0047 ‐ CALL ERROR B‐10

E0048 ‐ JRNL PRNTR PRESENT B‐11

E0050 ‐ NO PART 1 SET B‐11

E0061 ‐ CASH OUT ERROR B‐11

E0100 ‐ INVALID FUNCTION B‐11

E0101 ‐ INVALID SELECTION B‐12

E0102 ‐ INCOMPLETE DATA B‐12

E0103 ‐ INVALID COMBINATION B‐12

E0104 ‐ INITIALISATION FAILURE B‐12

E0105 ‐ NO JOURNAL DEVICE B‐13

E0106 ‐ EJ ALREADY ACTIVE B‐13

E0107 ‐ PAPER JOURNAL ACTIVE B‐13

E0108 ‐ ERROR DURING ACTIVATION B‐13

E0109 ‐ COPY TO DRIVE FAILED B‐14

E0110 ‐ KEY DATA NOT PRESENT B‐15

E0111 ‐ INVALID KEY DATA B‐15

E0112 ‐ FAILED TO STORE KEY V B‐15

E0113 ‐ FAILED TO STORE KEY A B‐16

E0114 ‐ FAILED TO STORE KEY B B‐16

E0115 ‐ NO VALID DATA PRESENT B‐16

E0116 ‐ PRINT FAILURE B‐16

E0119 ‐ INVALID MODE B‐17

E1801 ‐ COMMUNICATIONS CLOSED B‐17

E1802 ‐ COMMUNICATIONS FATAL B‐17

E1803 ‐ COMMUNICATIONS DOWN B‐17

PD Error Messages B‐17

Investigation Already Active B‐17

Start Failed B‐18

Valid Investigation Not Present B‐18

Investigation Not Stopped B‐18

Disk Not Present: Insert Disk B‐18

Disk Error: Replace the Disk B‐18

Disk Error: No Disk Space B‐19

Disk Error: Disk Write‐Protected B‐19

Disk Error: Format Failure B‐19

Error: File Already Exists B‐19

Error: Device Unavailable B‐19

Export Failed: <message text> B‐20

GBXX Configuration Error Messages B‐20




Device Error B‐20

XML Error B‐20

Registry Error B‐21

Configuration Error B‐21

Overview

-1


APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide B

Error MessagesB

Overview B

In this appendix we provide a list of error messages that can occur during Supervisor mode.

For each message we explain the meaning, suggest the probable cause and recommend the necessary corrective action.

Error MessagesError Messages

B-2 APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


Error Messages B

e00 ‐ NOT CONFIGURED B

Meaning: 2Either a TCP/IP configuration file does not exist or there is no entry in the configuration file for the selected option.

Corrective Action: 2Enter a value for the configuration option.

e01 ‐ BIN NOT PRESENT B

Meaning: 2The required bin is not present.

Probable Cause: 2You have selected a function which uses a bin which is not configured.

Corrective Action: 2None required. This message is for information only.

e02 ‐ FAILED TO CREATE CHECKSUM B

Meaning: 2There is a problem with the (non‐EPP) encryptor.

Corrective Action: 2Contact your hardware support service.

e08 ‐ UNKNOWN OR SAME ORIENTATION B

Meaning: 2The direction of note insertion is the same as a previous insertion or is unrecognised.

Probable Cause: 2The note has already been inserted in this direction.

Corrective Action: 2Insert the note in a different orientation.

e09 ‐ EJ UPLOAD MAY BE IN PROGRESSPRESS 1 ‐CONTINUE 0 ‐CANCEL B

Meaning: 2The EJ cannot be backed up at this time.

Probable Cause: 2The host is currently uploading the EJ file.

Corrective Action: 2None required. The EJ cannot be backed up during upload. Attempt EJ backup after the upload completes.


APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide B-3


e10 ‐ INVALID, EJ MODE IS STANDARD B

Meaning: 2The current EJ mode is set to standard.

Probable Cause: 2You tried to set the maximum number of EJ backup files in standard EJ mode, but only one EJ backup file is permitted in standard EJ mode.

Corrective Action: 2Change to multiple EJ or use only one EJ backup file.

e11 ‐ INVALID; MAX POSSIBLE VALUE=X B

Meaning: 2The space available on disk allows X EJ backup files; you have specified more than this number.

Probable Cause: 2The number of EJ backup files that you have specified exceeds the space available on disk.

Corrective Action: 2Enter a number less than or equal to that specified in the message.

e12 ‐ INSUFFICIENT HARD DISK B

Meaning: 2There is insufficient space on the hard disk for the current operation.

Probable Cause: 2The available disk space is not sufficient for the current save operation.

Corrective Action: 2Reduce the maximum number of backups. This deletes old backup files and allows the operation to continue.

e13 ‐ FAILED TO OVERWRITE IN CDRW B

Meaning: 2The CD was not written to successfully.

Probable Cause: 2There is a problem with the CD drive, or the CD is full or not writable.

Corrective Action: 2Check that the CD drive is working, and that the CD has enough space and is writable.

e17 ‐ EJ SCHEDULED INIT NOT CONFIGURED B

Meaning: 2Automatic INIT at specified intervals is not currently enabled.




Probable Cause: 2A pattern has been set for the scheduled INIT, but the scheduled INIT is not enabled.

Corrective Action: 2Enable the scheduled INIT before setting the pattern.

e18 ‐ INVALID PSWD (MIN4,MAX 20 CHARS) B

Meaning: 2The entered password is not in a valid format.

Probable Cause: 2Too few or too many characters have been entered.

Corrective Action: 2Enter a password of between four and 20 characters.

e19 ‐ AUTO INIT COPY FAILED B

Meaning: 2The auto INIT copy has not been saved successfully.

Probable Cause: 2The specified drive is corrupted or write‐protected, or not physically present.

Corrective Action: 2Check the specified drive before the next auto INIT.

e20 ‐ NO DRIVES AVAILABLE B

Meaning: 2There are no writable removable drives available.

Probable Cause: 2Drives are logically but not physically present, or are write‐protected.

Corrective Action: 2Check the connections to the drives, or update the access levels.

e21 ‐ CHECKSUM FAILED B

Meaning: 2The checksum was not written to the file.

Probable Cause: 2The checksum was corrupted during the write operation.

Corrective Action: 2No corrective action. A checksum will be added to the next file.




e22 ‐ COMPRESSION FAILED B

Meaning: 2The compression of the EJ file was unsuccessful.

Probable Cause: 2A failure or corruption occurred while trying to compress the file.

Corrective Action: 2No corrective action is required.

e23 ‐ AUTO INIT COPY DRIVE NOT CONFIGURED B

Meaning: 2There is no drive configured for the automatic INIT.

Probable Cause: 2No drive is set up for a copy of the automatic INIT.

Action: 2Select a copy drive for the automatic INIT from the Supervisor menu.

e24 ‐ SILENTDEBUG NOT STARTED B

Meaning: 2Silent Debug has not been started properly.

Probable Cause: 2The Silent Debug Win32 service is not started.

Corrective Action: 2Ensure that the Silent Debug Win32 service is in a started state.

e25 ‐ SILENTDEBUG NOT STOPPED B

Meaning: 2Silent Debug is not be stopped.

Probable Cause: 2This message can be caused by the following:

● Reconfiguring Silent Debug without first stopping Silent Debug logging

● Deleting Silent Debug logs without first stopping Silent Debug logging.

Corrective Action: 2Stop Silent Debug.

e26 ‐ SILENTDEBUG LOGS NOT DELETED B

Meaning: 2The Silent Debug logs cannot be deleted.

Probable Cause: 2Another application is using the log files.

Corrective Action: 2Ensure that the log files are not in use by another application.




e27 ‐ SILENTDEBUG LOGS NOT COPIED B

Meaning: 2The Silent Debug logs can not be copied.

Probable Cause: 2An error has occurred during transfer.

Corrective Action: 2Check the drive and disk, then retry.

e28 ‐ NO DRIVES SUITABLE FOR COPY B

Meaning: 2No suitable removable media can be found to which the Silent debug logs can be copied.

Probable Cause: 2Removable media is not inserted, or there is insufficient space on the removable media to store the log files.

Corrective Action: 2Ensure removable media is inserted and there is enough free space to store the log files.

e29 ‐ SILENTDEBUG ALREADY STARTED B

Meaning: 2Silent Debug has already been started.

Probable Cause: 2An attempt has been made to start Silent Debug, but it is already started.


e30 ‐ SILENTDEBUG ALREADY STOPPED B

Meaning: 2Silent Debug has already been stopped.

Probable Cause: 2An attempt has been made to stop Silent Debug, but it is already stopped.


e31 ‐ SILENTDEBUG CONFIG INVALID B

Meaning: 2The new SilentDebug.ini file is invalid.

Probable Cause: 2There is a formatting error, or a value in the SilentDebug.ini file is invalid.

Corrective Action: 2Replace the invalid SilentDebug.ini file with a valid file.




e32 ‐ INVALID:MAX VALUE=X B

Meaning: 2There is insufficient space on the hard disk to set the EJ file size to the requested size.

Probable Cause: 2The hard drive does not have the capacity to save an EJ file of the requested size.

Corrective Action: 2Reduce the size of the EJ file.

E0010 ‐ NO DISK IN DRIVE B

Meaning: 2There is no writable media available.

Probable Cause: 2The disk is not physically present, or is write‐protected.

Corrective Action: 2Ensure the presence of a writable disk in the drive.

E0011 ‐ FLOPPY PROTECTED B

Meaning: 2The diskette is not writable.

Probable Cause: 2The diskette is write‐protected.

Corrective Action: 2Ensure the presence of a writable diskette in the drive.

E0016 ‐ EJ NOT PRESENT B

Meaning: 2EJ is not active.

Probable Cause: 2Electronic Journal has not been configured before selecting the INIT EJRNL or RCOPY EJRNL options.

Corrective Action: 2Select the SET JRNL option from the Configure menu to configure Electronic Journal.

E0018 ‐ TOO MANY DIGITS B

Meaning: 2Too many digits have been entered.

Probable Cause: 2More than the maximum number of digits have been entered.

Corrective Action: 2Check the maximum allowable number of digits, and enter no more than that number.




E0019 ‐ NOT ENOUGH DIGITS B

Meaning: 2No digits have been entered when entering the coin count for a coin hopper.

Probable Cause: 2Enter has been selected at the coin hopper prompt without first entering a number.

Corrective Action: 2Enter the number of coins in the hopper using up to five digits before pressing the Enter key.

E0020 ‐ INVALID VALUE B

Meaning: 2You have entered an invalid value.

Probable Cause: 2You have entered an invalid value in response to a prompt.

Corrective Action: 2Enter the correct value.

E0022 ‐ DEVICE NOT PRESENT B

Meaning: 2The required device is not configured.

Probable Cause: 2You have selected a function which uses a device which is not configured.


E0023 ‐ DISK I/O ERROR B

Meaning: 2The required disk cannot be read from or written to.

Probable Cause: 2There is not enough space on the hard disk for the EJ.

Corrective Action: 2Remove unnecessary and temporary files to create sufficient disk space. The EJ requires up to 3 MB of space to be successfully activated.

E0025 ‐ COMMAND NOT ALLOWED B

Meaning: 2An attempt has been made to disable dual‐mode printing but dual mode is not active.





E0026 ‐ COINS EXCEED LIMIT OF 65534 B

Meaning: 2The entered number of coins is outside the valid limit for coins.

Corrective Action: 2Enter a number of coins within the valid limit of 0 to 65534, inclusive.

E0032 ‐ CAMERA FAILURE B

Meaning: 2An attempt to use the camera has failed.

Probable Cause: 2You attempted to use the camera when it is not present, or has failed.

Corrective Action: 2Ensure a camera is present. If the camera has failed, contact your local NCR representative.

E0033 ‐ INVALID MEI OPTION B

Meaning: 2The value of the MEI flash rate local option digit is out of range.

Probable Cause: 2You entered an incorrect local option value string at the Message Mode command.

Corrective Action: 2Enter the correct local option digit string.

E0036 ‐ FILE ALREADY EXISTS B

Meaning: 2The file already exists.

Probable Cause: 2The ECB 6 signature has already been created.

E0038 ‐ EJ BACKUP INVALID B

Meaning: 2The backup file was not successfully created on the hard disk during an INIT EJRNL operation.

Probable Cause: 2You have tried to initialise the EJ log file (using the INIT EJRNL option from the Replenish menu) but the backup log file was not successfully created, probably due to insufficient disk space.




Corrective Action: 2Free up at least 1.4 MB of system disk space for the backup log file.

E0039 ‐ FRONT FEATURE ONLY B

Meaning: 2This function is not available from the rear of the terminal.

Probable Cause: 2You selected either the VOLUME SST or the VOLUME JACK function from the Configure menu at the rear of the terminal.

Corrective Action: 2None required. The Digital Audio Service is not supported.

E0040 ‐ DCS FAILURE B

Meaning: 2An attempt to use the DCS has failed.

Probable Cause: 2You attempted to use the DCS when it is not present, or has failed.

Corrective Action: 2Ensure a DCS is present. If the DCS has failed, contact your local NCR representative.

E0042 ‐ LOAD ERROR B

Meaning: 2A DLL file containing user‐written code could not be loaded.

Probable Cause: 2The file is missing.

Corrective Action: 2Check the DLL on the terminal from the build list. Check the details in the SUPCTR table are correct. Contact the supplier of the Exit DLL.

E0047 ‐ CALL ERROR B

Meaning: 2A user‐written routine could not be accessed.

Probable Cause: 2The code is not present in the appropriate DLL.

Corrective Action: 2Check the SUPCTR table has the correct function name. Contact the supplier of the Exit DLL.




E0048 ‐ JRNL PRNTR PRESENT B

Meaning: 2There is a physical printer configured for the SST

Probable Cause: 2You have entered 1 to activate the electronic journal while a physical printer is configured for the SST.

Corrective Action: 2On the Configure menu, enter 2 at the SET JOURNAL OPTION data prompt.

E0050 ‐ NO PART 1 SET B

Meaning: 2Part 1 of the single or double‐length key with XOR being entered is missing

Probable Cause: 2An attempt has been made to enter part 2 of the key before entering part 1.

Corrective Action: 2Return to the selection screen, and select 1 at the COMPONENT prompt to enter the first part of the key.

E0061 ‐ CASH OUT ERROR B

Meaning: 2An error occurred during a dispense operation.

Probable Cause: 2A jam or other error has occurred that prevents the device from being initialised.

Corrective Action: 2Select the TEST CASH or STD CASH option (in the Replenish menu) from the operator interface.

E0100 ‐ INVALID FUNCTION B

Meaning: 2The selected function is not supported in Advance NDC.

Corrective Action: 2Select a valid function.




E0101 ‐ INVALID SELECTION B

Meaning: 2You have selected an option which is not supported for display on the current interface.

Probable Cause: 2This error is displayed if you select the DISP SCRN option (in the Configure menu) from the operator interface. This option is not supported for display on the operator interface.

Corrective Action: 2‘Select the DISP SCRN option from the facia interface at the front of the SST.

E0102 ‐ INCOMPLETE DATA B

Meaning: 2The data you have entered is not the correct length.

Corrective Action: 2Re‐enter the data.

E0103 ‐ INVALID COMBINATION B

Meaning: 2You have entered an invalid combination of values.

Probable Cause: 2You have entered values in response to a number of prompts and the combination of these values is invalid.

Corrective Action: 2Enter the correct values.

E0104 ‐ INITIALISATION FAILURE B

Meaning: 2The device is not present or has failed to initialise.

Corrective Action: 2Check that the device is connected and configured. In the case of the receipt printer or statement printer, check that the paper is loaded correctly and clear any jams. In the case of the BNA or depository, clear any jams in the transport. You might also need to use the System Application to clear the device before initialisation can be successful.




E0105 ‐ NO JOURNAL DEVICE B

Meaning: 2The journal printer or electronic journal (EJ) is not present.

Probable Cause: 2The comms trace feature logs comms trace information to the journal. Therefore a journal must be configured in order to use this feature.

Corrective Action: 2Configure a journal (paper or electronic) before retrying the operation.

E0106 ‐ EJ ALREADY ACTIVE B

Meaning: 2Electronic journal (EJ) is already enabled.

Probable Cause: 2You have tried to enable the EJ (using the SET JRNL option from the Configure menu) when it is already active.


E0107 ‐ PAPER JOURNAL ACTIVE B

Meaning: 2A journal printer is configured in the terminal.

Probable Cause: 2You have tried to enable the Electronic Journal (using the SET JRNL option from the Configure menu) when a journal printer is connected to the terminal. Electronic journalling can only be used when there is no journal printer present.

Corrective Action: 2None required; this message is for information only. If Electronic Journal is required, the paper journal must be disconnected, before re‐trying the SET JRNL operation.

E0108 ‐ ERROR DURING ACTIVATION B

Meaning: 2Electronic journal was enabled, but new journal data could not be successfully logged.

Probable Cause: 2You have tried to enable the EJ (using the SET JRNL option from the Configure menu) but although it was activated successfully, new journal data could not be successfully logged. This is probably because the EJ has previously been active and the existing log file is too full to successfully journal the relevant trace message(s) on re‐activation.

Corrective Action: 2Perform an INIT EJRNL operation to empty the current log file before attempting to log more journal data.




E0109 ‐ COPY TO DRIVE FAILED B

Meaning: 2A file copy to diskette or selected drive could not be performed successfully.

Probable Cause/Corrective Action: 2There are a number of probable causes. The following table identifies likely probable causes along with corrective actions:

Table B-1 Causes of Failure in Diskette Copy

Probable Cause Corrective Action

No diskette in the drive. Insert a diskette in the drive.

Diskette or drive is write‐protected. Use a diskette or drive that is write‐enabled.

Diskette or drive is already full or nearly full.

Delete the files on the disk or drive, or use another disk or drive.

File already exists on diskette or drive. For example, an EJ log file has already been copied to disk by a previous RCOPY command.

None required.

EJ log file is full and the journal is now fatal. For example, an attempt has been made to write to the EJ log which has resulted in the maximum log file size being exceeded.

Use the INIT EJRNL command to copy the full log file.

Unrecoverable I/O error has occurred within the EJ operations. For example, EJ may be unable to format a portion of the log file correctly. This is due to an internal processing error or the host has sent an unusual combination of data to the journal.

Perform an immediate INIT EJRNL to purge the EJ log file. This will ensure that future inspection operations will not be disrupted. If the problem persists, we recommend that you contact your NCR support organisation.




E0110 ‐ KEY DATA NOT PRESENT B

Meaning: 2Insufficient, or no key data is present.

Probable Cause: 2You have tried to write either the Visa Master Key (V Key), the Master Key (A Key), or the Backup Communications Key (B Key) to the encryptor; but the key entered, using either the ENTER V, ENTER A, or ENTER B option on the Access menu, has not been entered or is incomplete.

Corrective Action: 2Enter or re‐enter the key.

E0111 ‐ INVALID KEY DATA B

Meaning: 2Invalid key data is present.

Probable Cause: 2You have tried to write either the Visa Master Key (V Key), the Master Key (A Key), or the Backup Communications Key (B Key) to the encryptor; but the key entered, using either the ENTER V, ENTER A, or ENTER B option on the Access menu, contains an invalid value.

Corrective Action: 2Re‐enter the key.

E0112 ‐ FAILED TO STORE KEY V B

Meaning: 2An error has occurred when storing the key data in the encryptor.

File is empty. For example, an attempt has been made to use the RCOPY command after EJ is first activated on a system not previously running EJ.

The error will clear after the first INIT EJRNL command is issued.

Backup file is damaged or the backup file obtained using RCOPY is not successfully written after a good EJ file transfer. For example, an INIT EJRNL function is selected and the requested file is copied. However, the backup copy is not written correctly. This also occurs if the backup has been invalidated by an I/O error during processing of an INIT EJRNL command.

If the function was RCOPY, make a backup copy of the EJ file just removed from SST (no backup is available through RCOPY). If the function was INIT JRNL, save any data obtained, deactivate EJ and reload software onto hard disk. Contact your NCR representative if problem persists.

Probable Cause Corrective Action




Probable Cause: 2The encryptor device has either gone fatal due to a hardware failure or the sensors have been tripped.

Corrective Action: 2Reset the encryptor.

E0113 ‐ FAILED TO STORE KEY A B


Probable Cause: 2The encryptor device has either gone fatal due to a hardware failure or the sensors have been tripped.


E0114 ‐ FAILED TO STORE KEY B B


Probable Cause: 2The encryptor device is in a fatal state due to a hardware failure or the sensors have been tripped.


E0115 ‐ NO VALID DATA PRESENT B

Meaning: 2Insufficient, or no valid data is present.

Probable Cause: 2You have entered insufficient or no data.

Corrective Action: 2Ensure valid data is entered.

E0116 ‐ PRINT FAILURE B

Meaning: 2The required printer is configured but the print operation failed.

Probable Cause: 2You have selected a function which uses a printer, however the printer has insufficient paper to complete the print operation.

Corrective Action: 2You may need to check the Device Status via the APTRA Self‐Service Support System Application if the cause of the print failure is not obvious.




E0119 ‐ INVALID MODE B

Meaning: 2An option has been selected which is not valid for the current key entry mode.

Probable Cause: 2You have attempted to use option V, A or B on the Access menu when the current key entry mode is not 1.

Corrective Action: 2Use the Key Entry menu to enter the key, or change the key entry mode to 1.

Caution Changing the key mode deletes all previously entered DES keys. RSA keys associated with Remote Key Management will not be deleted.

E1801 ‐ COMMUNICATIONS CLOSED B

Meaning: 2The communications link is not yet open.

Probable Cause: 2Communications have not yet been established with Central.

Corrective Action: 2Open the communications link.

E1802 ‐ COMMUNICATIONS FATAL B

Meaning: 2The communications line is inoperable.

Probable Cause: 2The line has a fault.

Corrective Action: 2Check all connections.

E1803 ‐ COMMUNICATIONS DOWN B

Meaning: 2The communications line is down.

Probable Cause: 2The line has been dropped.

Corrective Action: 2Re‐establish communications.

PD Error Messages B

The following messages are displayed when the PD menu options are processed and errors occur.

Investigation Already Active B

Meaning: 2You have selected PD Options menu option 1 but an investigation is already running.




Corrective Action: 2Select PD Options menu option 2 to stop the current investigation.

Start Failed B

Meaning: 2An error has occurred during the start‐up of the investigation.

Probable Cause: 2Starting an investigation after an unsuccessful export where the log file was not successfully deleted from the SST can cause such errors.

Corrective Action: 2Problem Determination automatically recovers from this error; but you must select the ʺStart Investigationʺ option again.

Valid Investigation Not Present B

Meaning: 2This message can be caused by either of the following:

● There is no investigation currently running on the SST but option 2 STOP PD INVESTIGATION has been selected

● There is no investigation log file but option 3 EXPORT PD LOG FILE has been selected.

Corrective Action: 2Start an investigation.

Investigation Not Stopped B

Meaning: 2Option 3 has been selected while an investigation is running.

Corrective Action: 2Stop the investigation.

Disk Not Present: Insert Disk B

Meaning: 2An error has occurred during the export operation as a diskette is not present in the diskette drive.

Corrective Action: 2Insert a diskette.

Disk Error: Replace the Disk B

Meaning: 2An error has occurred during the export operation as there is a fault in the diskette.




Corrective Action: 2Use another blank, formatted diskette.

Disk Error: No Disk Space B

Meaning: 2An error has occurred during the export operation as the diskette in use does not have enough disk space to store the compressed file.

Corrective Action: 2Replace the diskette with a blank formatted one.

Disk Error: Disk Write‐Protected B

Meaning: 2An error has occurred during the export operation as the diskette in use is write‐protected.

Corrective Action: 2Remove the write‐protection from the diskette or use another unprotected diskette.

Disk Error: Format Failure B

Meaning: 2An error has occurred during the export operation as the diskette in use is not formatted.

Corrective Action: 2Replace the diskette with a formatted one.

Error: File Already Exists B

Meaning: 2An error has occurred during the export operation as the diskette in use already contains an exported log (cab1.cab).

Corrective Action: 2Replace the diskette with an unused formatted one.

Error: Device Unavailable B

Meaning: 2An error has occurred during the export operation as a diskette drive is not accessible.

Corrective Action: 2Check the diskette drive for faults.




Export Failed: <message text> B

Meaning: 2This message is caused by a problem accessing the log file in the intermediate directory (source directory) to compress it. The message text can be one of the following:

● No Source Files

● Source Invalid

● Source Null

● Destination Invalid

● Destination Null

● Hard Disk Failed

● Copy Failed

● Error Unexpected

● Excess Log Size

● Error After Copy

Corrective Action: 2Try the export operation again. If it continues to fail, contact your support team.

Note: The maximum log size is 1.44 MB.

GBXX Configuration Error Messages B

The following messages are displayed when the GBNA/GBRU Configuration menu option is processed and errors occur.

Device Error B

Error: 2CONFIGURATION FAILED

DEVICE ERRORPRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

Meaning 2The GBXX is unavailable; for example, it is powered off.

Corrective Action 2Ensure that the GBXX is running and in a good state before using the option.

XML Error B


XML ERRORPRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

Meaning 2There is an XML error in the configuration file

Corrective Action 2Ensure that the XML file is present, well‐formed and valid.




Registry Error B


REGISTRY ERRORPRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

Meaning 2There was a registry error during configuration.

Corrective Action 2Contact your NCR support organisation.

Configuration Error B


CONFIGURATION ERRORPRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

Meaning 2The commands to XFS failed. Further information can be found in the event log.

Corrective Action 2Contact your NCR support organisation.

Table of ContentsRelated Documentation



Appendix C

Related Documentation

Advance NDC Documentation C‐2

APTRA Author Documentation C‐3

NDC+ Documentation C‐5

Other NCR Documentation C‐6

CEN‐XFS Documentation C‐7

Table of ContentsRelated Documentation



Overview

-1


APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide C

Related DocumentationC

Overview C

This appendix lists the following documentation:

● Documentation provided with the Advance NDC CD‐ROM

● Documentation that is historically linked to Advance NDC, but not provided on the Advance NDC CD‐ROM

● Documentation from other sources, such as optional components and standards bodies. This documentation is not provided on the Advance NDC CD‐ROM.

To read the Adobe Acrobat® Portable Document Format (PDF) documentation, you need Adobe Reader version 5.0 or later. The latest version is available free from www.adobe.com.

On a development system, the documentation can be installed alone or installed with the Advance NDC software. The documentation is not installed on a runtime system.

http://adobe.com

Related DocumentationAdvance NDC Documentation

C-2 APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


Advance NDC Documentation C

The following publications are provided on the Advance NDC CD‐ROM. Printed versions can be ordered from the NCR Publications web site.

Note: The Advance NDC Windows help files mentioned in Table C‐1 are provided as part of the APTRA Author.

Table C-1 Advance NDC Documentation

Title Format Description

APTRA Advance NDC, OverviewB006‐6597

PDF/Paper Provides an introduction to Advance NDC, including overviews of the components contained in the Advance NDC product and provided as part of the ANDC Package on CD‐ROM.

APTRA Advance NDC, Developer’s GuideB006‐6046

PDF/Paper Describes how to migrate to Advance NDC. It also identifies the functionality offered by Advance NDC, and describes how to enhance it.

APTRA Advance NDC, Reference ManualB006‐6180

PDF/Paper Provides application programmers with reference information for Advance NDC, including States, Screens, and the message formats between Central and the terminal.

APTRA Advance NDC, Multi‐Vendor Support Reference ManualB006‐6344

PDF/Paper Provides users with information about running the Advance NDC application on other vendors’ SSTs, describing the differences between Advance NDC on NCR SSTs and other vendors’ SSTs.

APTRA Advance NDC, Supervisor’s GuideB006‐6062

PDF/Paper Describes the Supervisor interface, how to set up the terminal’s local configuration parameters, and how to replenish the terminal.

Advance NDC Help Windows Help

Context‐sensitive help for the Advance NDC Authoring components (excluding Application Core components).

Advance NDC Application Core Help Windows Help

Context‐sensitive help for the Application Core/Supervisor Authoring components.

http://infocentral.daytonoh.ncr.com


Related DocumentationAPTRA Author Documentation

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide C-3


APTRA Author Documentation C

The following titles are provided on the Advance NDC CD‐ROM to support the use of the authoring environment. A printed version of the PDF file can be ordered from the NCR Publications web site.

Note: Advance ADE is no longer available as a separate product, but the APTRA Author is used in Advance NDC development.

Table C-2 Provided Authoring Environment Documentation

The PDF publications in Table C‐3 below are not provided on the Advance NDC CD‐ROM. These publications have not been updated, but may be useful if you are using the authoring environment to extend Advance NDC. Printed versions can be ordered from the NCR Publications web site.


APTRA Author, User’s GuideB006‐6038

PDF/Paper Describes how to install and use the Author and Runtime Components to design, develop and maintain a self‐service application.

APTRA Author Help Windows Help

Context‐sensitive help for the Author user interface and authoring errors.

Runtime Core Help Windows Help

Context‐sensitive help for the Runtime Core Authoring components and runtime errors, which are part of Advance Core Self‐Service.

GUI Help Windows Help

Context‐sensitive help for the GUI Authoring components, which are part of Advance Core Self‐Service.

Self‐Service Core Help Windows Help

Context‐sensitive help for the Self‐Service Core Authoring components, which are part of Advance Core Self‐Service.

ActiveX™ Help Windows Help

Context‐sensitive help for the ActiveX™ Authoring components and runtime errors, which are part of Advance Core Self‐Service.

Basic Self‐Service Help Windows Help

Context‐sensitive help for the Authoring components and runtime errors provided with Advance Basic Self‐Service.

ATM Help Windows Help

Context‐sensitive help for the Authoring components and runtime errors provided with Advance ATM.

Special Self‐Service Help Windows Help

Context‐sensitive help for the Authoring components and runtime errors provided with Advance Special Self‐Service.

Statement Printer Help Windows Help

Context‐sensitive help for the Authoring components and runtime errors provided with Advance Statement Printer.



Related DocumentationAPTRA Author Documentation



Note: NCR recommends the use of C Exits to extend Advance NDC.

Table C-3 Additional Authoring Environment Documentation


APTRA Advance ADE, Programmer’s GuideB006‐6042

PDF/Paper Describes how application programmers can create their own C++ Worker Classes. It also contains information on using C routines to manipulate data.

APTRA Advance ADE, C++ Class ReferenceB006‐6043

PDF/Paper Provides application programmers with definitions for a number of C++ Runtime and Utility Worker Classes provided by NCR.

Related DocumentationNDC+ Documentation



NDC+ Documentation C

The publication in the following table is provided on the Advance NDC CD‐ROM. A printed version can be ordered from the NCR Publications web site.

Table C-4 Provided NDC+ Documentation

The publications in the following table are not provided on the Advance NDC CD‐ROM. Printed versions can be ordered from the NCR Publications web site.

Table C-5 Additional NDC+ Documentation


NDC, Using NDC ExitsB006‐5102

PDF/Paper

Introduces NDC Exits to experienced NDC programmers intending to develop customised terminal applications.


NDC, Programmer’s OverviewB006‐2485

PDF/Paper

Provides an introduction to, and overview of, the NDC software.

NDC+, Programmer’s Reference ManualB006‐2486

PDF/Paper

Aimed at programmers who write host or switch applications to support NDC+ terminals, or who create the terminal configuration that customises NDC+.

NDC, Message Formats For Host Application DevelopersB006‐4201

PDF/Paper

Designed for Central control application developers working with NDC RMX, NDCxa or NDC+. Intended to help in creating a control program that handles all the NDC variants.

NDC+, Supervisor’s Reference ManualB006‐2487

PDF/Paper

Designed for those people who are responsible for setting up the terminal’s local configuration parameters, or for routine replenishment of the terminal.




Related DocumentationOther NCR Documentation



Other NCR Documentation C

The publications in the following table are provided with the software component to which they refer. Printed versions of the first two titles can be ordered from the NCR Publications web site.

Table C-6 Other NCR Documentation

Component Title Format Description

EMV/CAM2 Exits for APTRA Advance NDC

EMV Integrated Circuit Card (ICC) Reference ManualB006‐6297

PDF/Paper Provides reference information for any Advance NDC developer who wishes to add EMV Integrated Circuit Card (ICC) Card Authentication Method (CAM) functionality to their Advance NDC application.Version 1.xx of the product is required for Advance NDC.

APTRA XFS NCR APTRA XFS OverviewB006‐6166

PDF/Paper Provides information about APTRA XFS, its features and functionality, and the requirements for its use.

APTRA Simulator APTRA Simulator Microsoft HTML Help (CHM)

Context‐sensitive help and reference for the XFS Simulator.

PC Communications Module

APTRA Communications Feature, User’s Guide B006‐0012

PDF/Paper Explains how to install and use the Communications feature. It also provides information required by customer applications to access the communications database.

APTRA Promote APTRA Promote User’s Guide(B006‐6309)

PDF/Paper Explains how to use APTRA Promote in advertising campaigns.

CCM VISA2 CCM VISA2 On‐line Documentation

CHM Describes the communications connection management (CCM) VASA2 component.


Related DocumentationCEN-XFS Documentation



CEN‐XFS Documentation C

For device access, Advance NDC supports release 3 or later of the CEN‐XFS specification.

The following documents are available from the CEN site, http://www.cenorm.be/isss/Workshop/XFS.

Table C-7 CEN-XFS Documentation


Extensions for Financial Services (XFS) interface specification(CWA 14050)

PDF or zipped PDF

Provides reference information for CEN‐XFS specifications, release 3.00 or later.

ActiveXFS Interface Specification(CWA 13849)

PDF or zipped PDF

Provides reference information for the ActiveXFS specifications.

http://www.cenorm.be/isss/Workshop/XFS

Related DocumentationCEN-XFS Documentation



-1

Glossary


APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide Glossary

Glossary 0

AActiveX ActiveX is the product of two Microsoft technologies called OLE and COM.

ADE Application Development Environment

Advance ADE NCR’s Advance Application Development Environment.

API Application Programming Interface

Application An application is a collection of Workers that can be built to create an executable (see Self‐Service Application).

Application Core The Application Core performs the SST mode handling, message processing and supervisor functions.

APTRA Author Tool that allows you to visually design and develop a self‐service application.

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A standard code for representing alphanumeric characters.

Authoring Components An Authoring component is the smallest manageable unit in Advance ADE. Examples of Authoring components are Workers, Applications and Catalogs.

BBAPE Basic Alpha PINpad Encryptor.

BIN The physical container within a device such as a cheque processor.

BNA Bunch Note Acceptor.

CCardholder This is the SST customer.

Catalog A Catalog is a component which allows you to organise all your other Authoring components into manageable groups.

CCM Communications Connection Manager.

CD Compact Disc. An optical disk used to store information.

Cheque Processor CPM and bunch cheque acceptor.

COM Common Object Model. An open architecture for cross‐platform development of client/server applications based on object‐oriented technology. Clients have access to an object through interfaces implemented on the object (access to Methods, Properties and Events).

Glossary

Glossary-2 APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


Component See Authoring Components and Runtime Components.

Counterfeit note A note with authentication features missing or out of tolerance, which the cash deposit device classifies as a potential forgery. This is the same as a category 2 note, as defined in the ECB 6 regulation.

CPM Cheque Processing Module.

Coin Hopper A physical container holding coins in a coin dispenser.

Coin Hopper Type An Advance NDC coin hopper type is a mapping to one logical XFS CDM cash unit. A coin hopper type is a logical representation of one or more coin hoppers containing the same type of coin.

Currency Medium of exchange in a country, for example USD or GBP.

Customisation Layer The Customisation Layer performs the ‘In Service’ activities associated with the cardholder.

DDAPI Direct Application Programming Interface.

Denomination The value of the monetary units.

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.

DIG Device Identification Graphic.

DLL Dynamically Linked Library.

DNS Domain Name Server.

Dual Cash Handler SST with two cash dispensers.

EEBCDIC Extended Binary‐Coded Decimal Interchange Code. An eight‐bit character code.

EJ Electronic Journal.

Encash The movement of notes from the escrow to the cash‐in cassette. Also known as ‘to vault’.

EOP Enhanced Operator Panel. An operator display unit with keyboard, LCD display and LED indicators, provided on the rear of Personas SSTs.

EPP Encrypting Pin Pad.

Exit State A state defined and programmed by the user.

Exit Supervisor A supervisor feature defined and programmed by the user.

Glossary

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide Glossary-3


FFault Display This gives information to allow you to anticipate and prevent media shortages and device failures.

FDK Function Display Key. These keys are located on each side of the facia screen and enable various options to be chosen.

FIT Financial Institution Table. This contains details of where and how information is stored on the card, and how a transaction will be processed.

Flex drive Diskette drive.

GGBNA Global Bunch Note Acceptor.

GBRU Global Bill Recycling Unit. NCR cash recycler.

GBXX GBNA and GBRU.

GOP Graphical Operator Panel. An operator display unit with a 10.4‐inch touchscreen display, provided on the rear of SelfServ SSTs

HHooks General term referring to miscellaneous Exits, which are detailed in the MISCONT file. For more details, see the NCR publication Using NDC Exits

IID Identification.

Interlock Switch A switch that cuts power to the cash handler when it is opened. This switch may be attached to the safe door or to the cash handler. Power is restored when the switch is closed.

I/O Input/Output.

ISO International Standards Organisation.

KKVV Key Verification Value.

LLCD Liquid Crystal Display.

LED Light‐Emitting Diode.

MMAC Message Authentication Code. A method of protecting messages passing between the terminal and Central from tampering.

MEI Media Entry/Exit Indicators.

MISCIF Miscellaneous Interface Board. This is a hardware interface to devices such as alarms, indicators and night safe depositories.

MISCONT A rule file detailing miscellaneous Exits. See Hooks.

Glossary



Multiple EJ Backup Alternative setting for EJ backup. Allows multiple EJ backup files to be retained, as defined by the setting for the number of multiple backups.

NNAK Negative Acknowledgement. This indicates the failure of an operation.

NCR XFS Simulator A tool providing simulations of self‐service devices (See Simulated Services) to enable testing of applications during development.

NDC NCR Direct Connect. An NCR application that works in conjunction with a Central application to perform self‐service transactions.

Note Type The currency, and value of a note. For example, an English five‐pound note and a Scottish five‐pound note have the same currency identifier (GBP) and denomination (unit value of 5). Also known as bill type.

PPCCM PC Communications Module. An NCR proprietary network card for communications protocols.

PD Problem Determination. A software component from NCR, comprised of PD Collection and PD Analysis.

PDF Portable Document Format. The Adobe native file format for documents viewable in Acrobat Reader

Personal Identification Number (PIN) A secret identification number that is issued to each cardholder.

Pocket See BIN.

Project An APTRA Author Project is a collection of Authoring components.

RRS232 This is a hardware interface to devices such as cameras and remote relays.

Rule File A file used to determine which supervisor functions or states are standard, which are user written, and where the user‐written routines are to be found. A rule file also gives information about (See) Hooks and Virtual Controllers.

Runtime Components These provide the Authoring components used to construct a self‐service application and the SST runtime software.

SSelf-Service Application This is the application which runs on an SST and processes all the necessary transactions.

Glossary

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide Glossary-5


Self-Service Support A 32‐bit open software platform supplied by NCR for use on SSTs.

Simulated Services Simulations of SST devices. Used instead of real devices when testing the Advance NDC application in the development environment.

SSL Secure sockets layer.

SST Self‐Service Terminal.

Standard EJ Backup The default setting for EJ backup. Creates a single electronic journal backup file.

SUPCTR A rule file that links Exit Supervisor features to the associated DLLs.

Suspect note A note with recognised authentication features but quality and/or tolerance deviations. In most cases, this means a damaged or soiled banknote. This is the same as a category 3 note, as defined in the ECB 6 regulation.

TTCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. TCP/IP is the suite of network protocols used for all Internet traffic.

UUSB Universal Serial Bus. A hardware interface for attaching peripheral devices, such as disk drives.

VVCCONT A rule file used by Exits when Virtual Controllers are added.

Virtual Controller A routine defined and programmed by the user which can intercept and respond to messages.

WWAVE WAVE or .WAV (Waveform Audio). A standard Windows‐based sound format.

Windows XP Microsoft Windows eXPerience operating system.

Work Flow A Work Flow enables Workers to communicate across Work Groups by associating two Work Groups. It specifies the flow of control from one Work Group to another.

Work Group A Work Group contains a collection of Workers with similar roles in the Worker hierarchy.

Worker You develop an application by visually linking Workers (graphical building blocks). Workers are the Authoring components in a self‐service application.

Glossary



Worker Class Every Worker belongs to a Worker Class. The Worker Class defines the characteristics and functions that any given Worker will have.

XXFS Extensions for Financial Services. An open interface specification for device access in SSTs.

-1

Index


APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide Index

Index 0

AAccess menu 1‐9, 2‐4, 5‐2

DISP ACCESS 5‐3ENTER A 5‐8ENTER B 5‐9ENTER MAC 5‐10ENTER V 5‐6entering a password 5‐2EXIT MODE 5‐6HALLMARK 5‐12INIT DISPLY 5‐5INIT ENTRY 5‐5KEY ENTRY 5‐12PRNT ACCESS 5‐4SET ACCESS 5‐11SET PASSWRD 5‐4WRITE A 5‐9WRITE B 5‐10WRITE V 5‐7

Access menu and customer‐sensitive data 1‐3Add Cash in ADD CASH 4‐75Add coins option 3‐29Add to cash counters options 3‐16Advance ADE documentation C‐2Advance NDC

documentation C‐2Advance NDC documentation C‐2Advanced TCP/IP Settings 4‐42APTRA Promote 5‐3Audio jack volume 4‐20

BBackup

copying the EJ backup to diskette 3‐40corrective action for damaged backup file B‐15EJ BACKUP INVALID message B‐9EJ mode 4‐21hardcopy 7‐17journal printer backup mode 7‐17maximum EJ 4‐22

Bunch note acceptor (BNA) 3‐8configuration settings 4‐80initialise option 3‐43

Ccab1.cab 4‐70Calibrate Cash Units in ADD CASH 4‐75Cancel key 1‐9Card capture message 7‐6CCM VISA2 4‐54

Index

Index-2 APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide


CCM VISA2 menu 4‐64Check CDM option 3‐38Checksum for BAPE 5‐3Checksum validation (EJ) 7‐14Cheque processor 3‐8, 3‐14Clear bins option 3‐38Clear BNA option 3‐42Clear captured cards counters option 3‐15Clear Cash in ADD CASH 4‐75Clear cash supplies option 3‐14Clear coins option 3‐29Clear deposits counter option 3‐16Clear key 1‐9Communications

additional configuration for DNS and PCCM 6‐2Trace 7‐6

Configure Cash Units in ADD CASH 4‐73Configure menu 1‐9, 2‐4, 4‐2

DATE/TIME 4‐10DIALUP CONFIG 4‐54DISBL JRNL 4‐20DISP CONFIG 4‐3DISP CSH/ACC CONFIG for BNA 4‐80DISP SCRN 4‐12EJ OPTIONS 4‐21GBNA.INI CONFIG 4‐81GBRU/GBNA CONFIGURATION 4‐68JOURNAL LEVEL 4‐35MACHINE NO 4‐9MAX STATEMENT LENGTH 4‐71MORE 4‐82MSG MODE 4‐11PRNT CONFIG 4‐6PRNT CSH/ACC CONFIG for BNA 4‐80ROLL WIDTH 4‐8RST MODE 4‐15SELECT COMMS TYPE 4‐72SET CASH 4‐14SET COINS 4‐17SET DEFAULT 4‐16SET JRNL 4‐18SET PRINT 4‐13TCP/IP CONFIG 4‐37TRACE OFF 4‐17TRACE ON 4‐17TRACK 1 4‐7TROUBLESHOOTING 4‐68VOLUME JACK 4‐20VOLUME SST 4‐20

Configure menu, access to customer‐sensitive data 1‐3Configuring

a server for TCP/IP 4‐41a terminal for the first time 6‐2

Index

APTRA Advance NDC Supervisor’s Guide Index-3


communications for DNS and PCCM 6‐2GBXX device 4‐68

Copy options for dialup configuration 4‐66Create sigs option

Replenish menu 3‐44CRT screen 1‐7

DDAPI 5‐18DASH reader

fault display 7‐20Date formats 3‐5Date/time option 4‐10Deposit envelope length error message 7‐6Depository initialise option 3‐37Device exception recovery 7‐22Device failure 7‐1

clearing 7‐22handling 7‐22reporting 7‐20

Device status messages 7‐2Diagnostic menu 2‐5Dialup

application parameters 4‐59CCM VISA2 configuration 4‐64configuration menu 4‐54copy configuration files 4‐66modem configuration 4‐61network address menu 4‐66serial link configuration 4‐63

Display access option 5‐3Display coins options 3‐27Display configuration option 4‐3Display screens option 4‐12Display supplies counters (cash) option 3‐5, 3‐6Display supplies counters option 3‐7Display supplies status option 3‐2Domain name server (DNS) 6‐2Double‐length key entry with XOR 5‐17Dual cash handlers

setting counters 3‐17Dual mode printing 4‐18

disabling 4‐20Dump images option 3‐39

Ee00 ‐ NOT CONFIGURED B‐2E0010 ‐ NO DISK IN DRIVE B‐7, B‐8E0011 ‐ FLOPPY PROTECTED B‐7E0016 ‐ EJ NOT PRESENT B‐7E0018 ‐ TOO MANY DIGITS B‐7E0019 ‐ NOT ENOUGH DIGITS B‐8E0020 ‐ INVALID VALUE B‐8E0022 ‐ DEVICE NOT PRESENT B‐8

Index



E0026 ‐ COINS EXCEED LIMIT OF 65534 B‐9E0032 ‐ CAMERA FAILURE B‐9E0033 ‐ INVALID MEI OPTION B‐9E0036 ‐ FILE ALREADY EXISTS B‐9E0038 ‐ EJ BACKUP INVALID B‐9E0039 ‐ FRONT FEATURE ONLY B‐10E0040 ‐ DCS FAILURE B‐10E0042 ‐ LOAD ERROR B‐10E0047 ‐ CALL ERROR B‐10, B‐11E0050 ‐ NO PART 1 SET B‐11e0061 ‐ CASH OUT ERROR B‐11e01 ‐ BIN NOT PRESENT B‐2E0100 ‐ INVALID FUNCTION B‐11E0101 ‐ INVALID SELECTION B‐12E0102 ‐ INCOMPLETE DATA B‐12E0103 ‐ INVALID COMBINATION B‐12E0104 ‐ INITIALISATION FAILURE B‐12E0105 ‐ NO JOURNAL DEVICE B‐13E0106 ‐ EJ ALREADY ACTIVE B‐13E0107 ‐ PAPER JOURNAL ACTIVE B‐13E0108 ‐ ERROR DURING ACTIVATION B‐13E0109 ‐ COPY TO FLEX FAILED B‐14E0110 ‐ KEY DATA NOT PRESENT B‐15E0111 ‐ INVALID KEY DATA B‐15E0112 ‐ FAILED TO STORE KEY V B‐15E0113 ‐ FAILED TO STORE KEY A B‐16E0114 ‐ FAILED TO STORE KEY B B‐16E0115 ‐ NO VALID DATA PRESENT B‐16E0116 ‐ PRINT FAILURE B‐16E0119 ‐ INVALID MODE B‐17e02 ‐ FAILED TO CREATE CHECKSUM B‐2e08 ‐ UNKNOWN OR SAME ORIENTATION B‐2e09 ‐ EJ UPLOAD IS IN PROGRESS B‐2e10 ‐ INVALID SELECTION, EJ MODE IS STANDARD B‐3e11 ‐ INVALID VALUE B‐3e12 ‐ INSUFFICIENT HARD DISK B‐3e13 ‐ FAILED TO OVERWRITE IN CDRW B‐3e17 ‐ EJ SCHEDULED INIT NOT CONFIGURED B‐3e18 ‐ INVALID PSWD (MIN4,MAX 20 CHARS) B‐4E1801 ‐ COMMUNICATIONS CLOSED B‐17E1802 ‐ COMMUNICATIONS FATAL B‐17E1803 ‐ COMMUNICATIONS DOWN B‐17e19 ‐ AUTO INIT COPY FAILED B‐4e20 ‐ NO DRIVES AVAILABLE B‐4e21 ‐ CHECKSUM FAILED B‐4e22 ‐ COMPRESSION FAILED B‐5e23 ‐ AUTO INIT COPY DRIVE NOT CONFIGURED B‐5e24 ‐ SILENTDEBUG NOT STARTED B‐5e25 ‐ SILENTDEBUG NOT STOPPED B‐5e26 ‐ SILENTDEBUG LOGS NOT DELETED B‐5e27 ‐ SILENTDEBUG LOGS NOT COPIED B‐6e28 ‐ NO DRIVES SUITABLE FOR COPY B‐6e29 ‐ SILENTDEBUG ALREADY STARTED B‐6

Index



e31 ‐ SILENTDEBUG CONFIG INVALID B‐6e32 ‐ INVALID

MAX VALUE=% B‐7EJ options option

Configure menu 4‐21ejdata.log 3‐33, 3‐34ejnnnnnn.xxx 3‐32, 3‐34, 3‐40, 7‐14ejrcpy.log 3‐32, 3‐41Electronic journal 4‐18

automatic INIT options 4‐24agent 4‐28cutover 4‐25optional copy 4‐28scheduled INIT 4‐25

backup mode 4‐21preventing host changes 4‐31

compression 4‐29copying data to diskette 3‐31description 7‐14disabling 4‐20display configuration 4‐21example of sequence reprint 7‐18initialise option 3‐31journalling serial numbers 7‐15maximum backups 4‐22maximum file size 4‐30multiple destinations 4‐23power failure/restart 7‐19privacy options 4‐31

disable 4‐34password 4‐34

recovering from a power failure 3‐34validating the checksum 7‐14

Enter A option 5‐8Enter B option 5‐9Enter key 1‐9Enter MAC option 5‐10Enter V option 5‐6Entering a new key 5‐14Entering data, enhanced operator interface 1‐6Entering part 1 or 2 of a key 5‐16Entering parts 1 and 2 of a key 5‐16Entering supervisor mode

at a front access terminal 1‐3at a rear access terminal 1‐3

Envelope length error 7‐6Error conditions 4‐19Error messages B‐2

EPP initialisation 6‐2understanding 1‐10

Error recovery 7‐23GBRU 7‐23

Error reporting 7‐1

Index



Exception reporting 7‐1Exit menu 1‐4, 2‐6Exit mode option 5‐6Extract sigs option

Replenish menu 3‐45

FFacia interface 1‐7

transferring from 2‐6Fault display 7‐20Fault Display menu 2‐8FDK emulation 1‐7Files

cab1.cab 4‐70ejdata.log 3‐33, 3‐34ejnnnnnn.xxx 3‐32, 3‐34, 3‐40, 7‐14ejrcpy.log 3‐32, 3‐41GBNA.ini 4‐81pmdata 4‐16, 5‐12, 7‐19resrvd.def 7‐4visa2communicationserviceconfig.xml 4‐67

Fill envelope option 3‐35Flash rate for MEI A‐8Front access terminal, Supervisor mode entry 1‐3Front facia interface, using 1‐7Function keys 1‐9

GGateway IP address 4‐44GBNA

activating denominations 4‐81configuring 4‐68

GBNA.ini 4‐81GBRU

configuring 4‐68GBXX

GBNA.INI 4‐81journalling serial numbers 7‐15

HHallmark option 5‐12Handling device failures, description 7‐22Hardcopy backup 4‐19, 7‐17

IInitial configuration of a terminal 6‐2Initial interface option 5‐5Initial menu display option 5‐5Initialise BNA option 3‐43Initialise depository option 3‐37Initialise electronic journal option 3‐31Initialise receipt option 3‐21Initialise statement option 3‐24Interpreting error messages 1‐10

Index



IP addresses 4‐38, 4‐40, 4‐44, 4‐45, 4‐46, 4‐47, 4‐48, 4‐49

JJournal level 4‐35Journal printer, backup mode 7‐17

KKey entry menu 5‐12Key Verification Value (KVV) for EPP 5‐3Keys

entering double‐length with XOR 5‐17entering double‐length with XOR restricted 5‐18entering single‐length no XOR 5‐15entering single‐length with XOR 5‐15rear settlement CLR key 3‐26rear settlement CNL key 3‐26secure key entry 5‐18

LLeaving supervisor mode 3‐27Local IP address 4‐40Local journal log

backup mode 7‐17deposit envelope length error message 7‐6description 7‐2device status messages 7‐2presenter error message 7‐5security trace messages 7‐4SST off‐line/on‐line messages 7‐6

Local port number 4‐40

MMachine number option 4‐9MAX POSSIBLE VALUE=% B‐3Media capture on power‐up 7‐25MEI flash rate A‐8Menus

Access 1‐9, 2‐4, 5‐2Configure 1‐9, 2‐4, 4‐2Diagnostic 2‐5dialup configuration 4‐54Exit 1‐4, 2‐6Fault Display 2‐8Key entry 5‐12Misc Funcs 2‐8Replenish 1‐4, 1‐9, 2‐3, 3‐2Select 1‐9, 2‐3Supervisor 2‐3, 6‐1TCP/IP configuration 4‐37Transfer 2‐5

Message mode option 4‐11Misc Funcs menu 2‐8Modem Link menu 4‐61More option

Index



Configure menu 4‐82Replenish menu 3‐47

Moving between the rear and front of a terminal 1‐4Multiple copies of electronic journal file 3‐40MV diagnostics menu 2‐8

NNavigating

This publication i‐xxxviiNetwork Address menu, dialup 4‐66

OOperator interface, transferring from 2‐5Option digits

combinations of A‐10example A‐16reporting levels for option 0 A‐14table of A‐2

Options, selecting from menus 1‐9

PPassword, setting 5‐4PC Communications Module (PCCM) 6‐2Performing an initial configuration 6‐2pmdata 5‐12pmdata file 4‐16, 7‐19Port numbers for TCP/IP 4‐39, 4‐40Power failure, recovering from 3‐34Power‐up, media capture 7‐25Presenter error message 7‐5Primary DNS 4‐45, 4‐47, 4‐49Print access option 5‐4Print configuration 4‐6Print configuration option 4‐6Print supplies counters option 3‐12, 3‐47Print supplies status option 3‐4Problem Determination 4‐68

error messages B‐17maximum log size B‐20

Promote 5‐3Prompts during supervisor settlement 3‐25

RRear access terminal 1‐4

moving between the rear and the front 1‐4Rear operator interface, using 1‐6Rear settlement

BUFB‐ prompt 3‐26BUFC‐ prompt 3‐26CASH‐ prompt 3‐25CLR key 3‐26CNL key 3‐26completion of data entry 3‐26FUNC‐ prompt 3‐25

Index



leaving supervisor mode 3‐27Transaction Request message 3‐26

Receipt initialise option 3‐21Recovering from a power failure 3‐34Remote IP address 4‐38Remote port number 4‐39Replenish menu 1‐4, 1‐9, 2‐3, 3‐2

ADD CASH 3‐16ADD COINS 3‐29CLR BINS 3‐38CLR BNA 3‐42CLR CARDS 3‐15CLR CASH 3‐14CLR COINS 3‐29CLR DEPOS 3‐16CREATE SIGS 3‐44DIRECT EJ BACKUP 3‐42DISP CASH 3‐5DISP CNTRS 3‐7DISP COINS 3‐27DISP SPPLY 3‐2DSP BNA RCNL 3‐39DUMP IMAGES 3‐39EXTRACT SIGS 3‐45FILL ENV 3‐35INIT BNA 3‐43INIT DEPOS 3‐37INIT EJRNL 3‐31INIT RECPT 3‐21INIT STMNT 3‐24MORE 3‐47PRN BNA RCNL 3‐40PRNT CNTRS 3‐12PRNT SPPLY 3‐4RCOPY EJRNL 3‐40SECURITY CAMERA 3‐35SPVR TRANS 3‐24STD CASH 3‐23STD COINS 3‐31TEST CASH 3‐22WRITE SIGS 3‐45

Reprint sequence, example 7‐18Resetting the system 1‐5resrvd.def 7‐4Restart mode option 4‐15Restricted double‐length key entry with XOR 5‐18Roll width option 4‐8

SScreens

customised 2‐6reserved 2‐6

Secondary DNS 4‐46, 4‐48

Index



Secure key entry 5‐18Security trace messages 7‐4Select menu 1‐9, 2‐3

ACCESS 2‐4CONFIGURE 2‐4DIAGNOSTIC 2‐5EXIT 2‐6FAULT DISPLAY 2‐8MISC FUNCS 2‐8MV DIAG 2‐8REPLENISH 2‐3TRANSFER 2‐5

Selecting menu options 1‐9Selecting transfer from the facia interface 2‐6Selecting transfer from the operator interface 2‐5Serial Link menu 4‐63Set access option 5‐11Set cash option 4‐14Set coins option 4‐17Set default option 4‐16Set electronic journal option 4‐18Set password option 5‐4Set printer option 4‐13Set Reject Threshold in ADD CASH 4‐79Setting supervisor reporting 1‐11Setting the machine number 4‐9Setting up the terminal 6‐2Silent Debug 4‐68Single‐length key entry no XOR 5‐15Single‐length key entry with XOR 5‐15Smart card handling C‐1SST off‐line/on‐line messages 7‐6Standard cash option 3‐23Standard coins 3‐31Standard menus available in Supervisor mode 2‐2Statement initialise option 3‐24Statement length 4‐71Supervisor menu 6‐1Supervisor menus 2‐3Supervisor mode

entering 1‐3facia interface 1‐7introduction 1‐2menus available 2‐2operator interface 1‐6

Supervisor mode entry 1‐4Supervisor reporting 1‐11Supervisor transactions

prompts displayed during rear settlement 3‐25Replenish menu option 3‐24

Supply screen 2‐6System application 2‐5System reset 1‐5

Index



TTCP/IP

advanced settings 4‐42computer name 4‐48configuration menu option 4‐37display configuration 4‐43DNS menu 4‐45firewall 4‐48gateway address 4‐44keep alive 4‐52local address 4‐40multi host IP 4‐51ping 4‐44port numbers 4‐39, 4‐40primary DNS 4‐45, 4‐47, 4‐49print configuration 4‐43remote address 4‐38Remote host 4‐52remote host 4‐52secondary DNS 4‐46, 4‐48server configuration 4‐41subnet mask 4‐45WINS 4‐47

Terminaldisplay configuration 4‐3front access 1‐3initial configuration 6‐2moving between front and rear 1‐4off‐line/on‐line messages 7‐6print configuration 4‐6rear access 1‐4

Test Cash in ADD CASH 4‐77Test cash option 3‐22Time and date option 4‐10Touch screen FDK emulation 1‐7Trace off option 4‐17Trace on option 4‐17Track 1 option 4‐7Transaction request message 3‐26TRANSFER

selecting transfer from the facia interface 2‐6selecting transfer from the operator interface 2‐5

Transfer menu 2‐5

UUnderstanding error messages 1‐10Update Currency ID in ADD CASH 4‐78Update Media Type in ADD CASH 4‐78Update Note Types in ADD CASH 4‐77Using the front facia interface 1‐7Using the rear operator interface 1‐6

Index



VVISA2 menu 4‐64visa2communicationserviceconfig.xml 4‐67

WWrite A option 5‐9Write B option 5‐10Write sigs option

Replenish menu 3‐45Write V option 5‐7

Title:

Number: Release: Date:

NCR welcomes your feedback on this publication. Your comments can be of great value in helping us improveour information products.

You may send your comments to us electronically. See over for details.

Circle the numbers below that best represent your opinion of this publication.

Ease of use 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 = Excellent4 = Good3 = Adequate2 = Fair1 = Poor

0 = Not applicable

Accuracy 5 4 3 2 1 0

Clarity 5 4 3 2 1 0

Completeness 5 4 3 2 1 0

Organisation 5 4 3 2 1 0

Appearance 5 4 3 2 1 0

Examples 5 4 3 2 1 0

Illustrations 5 4 3 2 1 0

Job performance 5 4 3 2 1 0

Question resolution 5 4 3 2 1 0

Overall satisfaction 5 4 3 2 1 0

Indicate the ways you feel we could improve this publication.

❑ Improve the table of contents ❑ Add more/better quick reference aids

❑ Improve the overview/introduction ❑ Add more examples

❑ Improve the organisation ❑ Add more illustrations

❑ Improve the index ❑ Add more step‐by‐step procedures

❑ Make it less technical ❑ Add more troubleshooting information

❑ Make it more concise/brief ❑ Add more detail

Cut

APTRA Advance NDC, Supervisor’s Guide

B006‐6062‐L000 Issue 1 June 2009

User Feedback Form

Fold

Fold

Cut

AffixPostageStampHere

Write any additional comments you may have below and on additional sheets, if necessary. Include pagenumbers where applicable.

Use the following addresses to send your comments to us electronically:

E‐mail ‐ [email protected]

Web (within firewall) ‐ http://www.dundee.ncr.com/infoprod/rcomment/newform/webform99.htm

If we may contact you concerning your comments, please fill in the information below:

Thank you for your evaluation of this publication. Fold the form where indicated, tape (please do not staple),and drop in the mail.

F 8763‐0695

Name:

Organisation:

Company:

Address:

Phone: Fax:

NCR Financial Solutions Group Ltd.

Information Solutions Feedback

Kingsway West

Dundee

Scotland

DD2 3XX

mailto: [email protected]?subject=APTRA Advance NDC, Supervisors Guide%20(B006-6062-L000%20Issue%201)

http://www.dundee.ncr.com/infoprod/rcomment/newform/webform99.htm

aandc supervisor guide

Documents